Vegetarian Recipes - Full flavoured recipes without the meat - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/vegetarian/ Nutritious and full flavoured recipes Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:44 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.4 https://properfoodie.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/square-logo-96x96.png Vegetarian Recipes - Full flavoured recipes without the meat - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/vegetarian/ 32 32 Mango Salsa Recipe https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:42 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9031 A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy.  👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Mango salsa is a great recipe for...

Read More

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Mango salsa is a great recipe for a healthy starter or refreshing side dish. Its easy to prepare and perfect for a make ahead appetiser. Best served cold; toss in lime juice to keep the salsa at its freshest and then chill in the fridge.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough mango salsa to serve 6 people:

Ingredients for making mango salsa.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.

Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.

Chilli: Optional.

Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
  2. Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
  3. Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
  4. Garnish with freshly chopped coriander (cilantro).
How to make mango salsa step by step

💭 Expert tips

  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.
  • Mango and avocado salsa is a dish I like to make in advance as the mango and avocado chopping can be a bit messy. However, if you don't mind a bit salad prep just before dinner or even once your guests have arrived then this is quite an easy recipe to knock together from scratch. For more salad ideas why not try my Vietnamese style beef salad, Italian pasta salad, roasted cauliflower salad.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.

Is this recipe healthy?

This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.

Bowl of mango and avocado salsa.

🥗 Other starter recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
Print

Mango Salsa Recipe

A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 
Course Appetizer, lunch, Salad, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine cuban, Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Low Calorie, Low Fat, Low Lactose, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 43kcal

Equipment

  • Sharp knife
  • chopping board
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Large spoon
  • Serving bowl and spoon

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion finely chopped
  • 2 limes juiced
  • 1 chilli deseeded and finely chopped
  • 2 mangoes peeled and chopped
  • 1 avocado peeled and chopped
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro) roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
    1 red onion, 2 limes
  • Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
    2 mangoes, 1 avocado, 1 chilli, 2 limes
  • Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
    Salt and pepper
  • Garnish with freshly chopped coriander.
    Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro)

Notes

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.
Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.
Chilli: Optional.
Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.
Is this recipe healthy? This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.
Expert tips:
  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 43kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 438IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Sept 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips. 

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/#comments Tue, 15 Mar 2022 22:56:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2275 Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This warming sweet potato and chickpea curry is a great option for a delicious vegetarian...

Read More

The post Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour.

Sweet potato and chickpea curry in a bowl with naan bread and topped with yogurt and coriander.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This warming sweet potato and chickpea curry is a great option for a delicious vegetarian dinner with plenty of healthy veg and aromatic spicy flavours. The sweet potatoes really bring this dish to life by melting their wonderfully sweet caramelised juices into the spicy coconut sauce and creating a gorgeous consistency. A warm and inviting curry with husky flavours of cumin and garam masala and a pungent taste of ginger all infused with the sweetness of the potatoes. It really is the ultimate healthy, comfort food.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough sweet potato curry to serve 4 people:

Ingredients needed to make sweet potato and chickpea curry

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Sweet potatoes: If preferred you can use normal potatoes, and make potato and spinach curry.

Coconut milk: Use full fat coconut as reduced fat will make the curry watery.

Chickpeas: Optional or can be replaced with other pulses such as beans, split peas or lentils.

Yogurt (not pictured): Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them). As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion, garlic and ginger and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
  2. Stir in the curry powder, garam masala and cinnamon and cook for a further minute to allow the flavours to be released.
  3. Next add the cubed sweet potato, chopped tomatoes, tomato puree and coconut milk. Stir together well then bring to a gentle simmer.
  4. Place a lid on the pan and continue to simmer for around 30 minutes or until the potatoes are soft (blade of a knife pushes in easily).Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make sweet potato curry for steps 1-4.
  5. Meanwhile drain and rinse the can of chickpeas and wash the spinach leaves. Once the potatoes are cooked through, add the chickpeas and spinach to the curry. Stir in and continue to cook on the heat until the spinach has wilted. 
  6. Season with salt, pepper and lime juice then serve with rice and naan. Add toppings if desired: yogurt, fresh coriander, chilli flakes, onion seeds and lime wedges.Collage of 2 images showing how to make sweet potato curry for steps 5 and 6.

💭 Expert tips

  • Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
  • Chickpeas: To avoid any chickpeas skins floating around in the curry, place the chickpeas in a sieve then agitate under a running tap to loosen any skins. Pick these out and discard.
  • Make it your own: Use split peas, lentils or beans, or completely swap the chickpeas for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add other vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is sweet potato and chickpea curry healthy?

This curry is packed full of nutrients including protein, fibre, iron and plenty of vitamins and minerals. Chickpeas are low in fat and high in protein and along with the sweet potatoes will do a great. Job of filling you up due to both containing plenty of fibre. Spinach is also a great option for boosting your iron and folate levels.

How to make this curry extra spicy?

If you like your curry hot then there are a couple of extras you can add to turn up the heat. Try adding fresh green or red chopped chillies during cooking. The increase the heat further use smaller chillies and leave in the seeds. You could also add chilli flakes whiles cooking or add chilli sauce or Tabasco as toppings.

How to store?

What to do with any leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover curry to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Sweet Potato and chick curry in a bowl with a piece of naan bread and extra naan and lime in the background.

🍛 Other Curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Sweet potato and chickpea curry in a bowl with naan bread and topped with yogurt and coriander.
Print

Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry

Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour.
Course Dinner, evening meal, fake away, main meal
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 238kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 1 onion roughly chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and grated
  • 2 tablespoons medium curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • 2 large sweet potatoes peeled and chopped into small chunks
  • 2 tins of chopped tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoons tomato puree
  • 1 tin coconut milk full fat
  • 2 handfuls of baby spinach leaves
  • 1 small tin chickpeas
  • Lime juice to taste
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Extras to serve

  • Rice
  • Plain yogurt
  • Chilli flakes
  • Onion seeds
  • Fresh coriander
  • Naan bread

Instructions

  • Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them). As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion, garlic and ginger and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon cumin seeds, 1 onion, 1 clove garlic, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Stir in the curry powder, garam masala and cinnamon and cook for a further minute to allow the flavours to be released.
    2 tablespoons medium curry powder, 1 teaspoon garam masala, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • Next add the cubed sweet potato, chopped tomatoes, tomato puree and coconut milk. Stir together well then bring to a gentle simmer.
    2 large sweet potatoes, 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, 2 tablespoons tomato puree, 1 tin coconut milk
  • Place a lid on the pan and continue to simmer for around 30 minutes or until the potatoes are soft (blade of a knife pushes in easily).
  • Meanwhile drain and rinse the can of chickpeas and wash the spinach leaves. Once the potatoes are cooked through, add the chickpeas and spinach to the curry. Stir in and continue to cook on the heat until the spinach has wilted.
    1 small tin chickpeas, 2 handfuls of baby spinach leaves
  • Season with salt, pepper and lime juice then serve with rice and naan. Add toppings if desired: yogurt, fresh coriander, chilli flakes, onion seeds and lime wedges.
    Lime juice to taste, Rice, Plain yogurt, Chilli flakes, Onion seeds, Fresh coriander, Naan bread

Notes

Note: Above nutritional info is for 1 portion of curry with toppings but without any sides such as rice or naan bread.
Sweet potatoes: If preferred you can use normal potatoes, and make potato and spinach curry.
Coconut milk: Use full fat coconut as reduced fat will make the curry watery.
Chickpeas: Optional or can be replaced with other pulses such as beans, split peas or lentils. To avoid any chickpeas skins floating around in the curry, place the chickpeas in a sieve then agitate under a running tap to loosen any skins. Pick these out and discard.
Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.
Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
Make it your own: Use split peas, lentils or beans, or completely swap the chickpeas for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add other vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.
Is sweet potato and chickpea curry healthy?
This curry is packed full of nutrients including protein, fibre, iron and plenty of vitamins and minerals. Chickpeas are low in fat and high in protein and along with the sweet potatoes will do a great. Job of filling you up due to both containing plenty of fibre. Spinach is also a great option for boosting your iron and folate levels.
How to make this curry extra spicy?
If you like your curry hot then there are a couple of extras you can add to turn up the heat. Try adding fresh green or red chopped chillies during cooking. The increase the heat further use smaller chillies and leave in the seeds. You could also add chilli flakes whiles cooking or add chilli sauce or Tabasco as toppings.
How to store?
What to do with any leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover curry to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 282mg | Potassium: 988mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 25711IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 140mg | Iron: 4mg

This post was first published in Sept 2016. Updated in Mar 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

Sweet potato, chickpea & spinach vegetarian curry: a deliciously warming curry with plenty of healthy veg and aromatic spicy flavours | Properfoodie.com

 

The post Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/feed/ 8
5 Easy Recipes For Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/easy-recipes-for-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/easy-recipes-for-pancakes/#respond Mon, 28 Feb 2022 22:42:33 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=18690 These 5 easy recipes for pancakes are the perfect inspiration for pancake day. This easy guide to making pancakes will show you how to make 5 different types of delicious pancakes. Plus, keep reading to find the answers to the usual questions asked about making pancakes and get my best tips and tricks for the...

Read More

The post 5 Easy Recipes For Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
These 5 easy recipes for pancakes are the perfect inspiration for pancake day. This easy guide to making pancakes will show you how to make 5 different types of delicious pancakes. Plus, keep reading to find the answers to the usual questions asked about making pancakes and get my best tips and tricks for the perfect pancake.

Collage of 5 images showing 5 different ways to make pancakes.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

English Pancakes Recipe

This traditional English pancakes recipe is a great option for pancake day and is made simply with eggs, flour and milk (no baking powder required). The batter can be made in just 5 minutes and the recipe for this ensures a super smooth batter every time. Follow the link below for the full recipe and enjoy perfectly thin and light, English style pancakes on Pancake Tuesday.

English Pancakes Recipe
Traditional English pancakes with lemon and sugar.
Make this recipe
A plate of this flat pancakes stacked with the top four folded twice topped with a lemon wedge and a second wedge being squeezed over the top.

American Pancakes Recipe

Thick, soft and spongy American pancakes that can be made at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Unlike the British pancake, American style pancakes are small and stackable and have a thick spongy texture that is perfect for soaking up lashing of syrup. Make your own stack for a special breakfast, for pancake day or even for a dessert.

American Pancakes
Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes.
Make this recipe
A stack of American pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.

Blueberry Pancakes Recipe

Easy blueberry pancakes recipe filled with warm, juicy blueberries and topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup. Make a stack of these light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes in just 25 minutes.

American Blueberry Pancakes
Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step recipe.
Make this recipe
Stack of American style blueberry pancakes with a piece of butter on top and syrup being poured over

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)

These soft and sweet scotch pancakes are perfect for breakfast, hot and dripping with butter. Make up a batch at the start of the week and then pop a couple in the toaster to warm for your breakfast each day. This recipe is really easy and requires just 5 minutes to whisk together the batter.

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)
Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg.
Make this recipe
A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.

Healthy Banana Pancakes Recipe

This healthy pancakes recipe is made with bananas, oats and eggs and is great alternative for pancake day if you need flourless pancakes, milk-free pancakes or just a generally stodge-free pancake. These pancakes are soft, naturally sweetened, healthy and nutritious! Serve up with extra banana to ensure you are getting in 1 of your 5 day and add a drizzle of honey to make them all the more tempting.

Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats)
Make this nutritious pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan.
Make this recipe
A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from above.

Recipe for Pancakes - Frequently asked questions

How thick or thin should pancake batter be?

For the English pancakes recipe the batter should be thin and similar to the consistency of single cream.

The batter for American pancakes, blueberry pancakes and scotch pancakes is much thicker than crepe or English pancake batter. It should hold together to form a thicker pancake and not run over the surface of the pan.

Why shouldn’t you over mix pancake batter?

Over mixing pancake batter can cause too much gluten to form, which leads to chewy pancakes. Mix the batter until everything is just about combined. 

Some of the recipes above suggest best ways to combine the ingredients so as to avoid lumpy batter. However, if you do get lumps in your batter, don’t keep mixing. Instead leave it to rest in the fridge for 15-30 minutes. This will allow most of the lumps to dissolve.

How do you know when pancake batter is ready?

The pancake batter will be ready once all the ingredients have been combined and if necessary it has had time to rest and dissolve any lumps.

How to make fluffy American pancakes?

Fluffy American pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

When is the pan is hot enough to start making pancakes?

Once the pan has been on the heat for a couple of minutes, spread oil or melted butter over the surface. You can then test if the pan is ready by adding a small amount of batter. Flip after 30 seconds and the batter should have started to go golden brown. This is a good indication that the pan is ready. 

Recipes for Pancakes - Tips and tricks

How to stop pancakes sticking to the pan

If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

When to flip pancakes

For English pancakes its time to flip when you can shake the pan and the pancake loosens and starts to slide over the surface of the pan.

The indication that its time to flip American pancakes is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

Be aware that the healthy banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.

Handle banana pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.

Keeping pancakes warm

For all of these recipes for pancakes, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

Best toppings for pancakes

The traditional topping for English pancakes is sugar and lemon - nice and simple. However, you could also top with strawberries, mango, banana, nutella, honey, syrup, chocolate sauce, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

For extra flavour and texture in American pancakes mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.

Scotch pancakes are best served hot with a good helping of butter spread on the top

Serve up healthy banana pancakes with extra fruit and a drizzle of honey

Equipment you'll need for making pancakes

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Difference between English pancakes and crepes?

In the UK, English pancakes are traditionally eaten on Shrove Tuesday at the start of lent (and hardly any other time). The french version of pancakes (crepes) are very similar to British pancakes except they are larger, thinner and eaten as a dessert at any time. A special tool is used for spreading the batter on a hot plate, which makes crepes very thin.

Difference between American Pancakes and English Pancakes?

Unlike English pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than English pancakes.

Happy pancake flipping!!

The post 5 Easy Recipes For Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/easy-recipes-for-pancakes/feed/ 0
Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 06 Feb 2021 18:48:51 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=17031 Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe If you are looking...

Read More

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for a flourless and milk free option for Pancake day then this is your recipe. These soft and naturally sweetened, healthy pancakes are packed with banana and oats and are held together with eggs. A lovely nutritious alternative to the usual stodgy pancake. Serve up with extra banana to ensure you are getting in 1 of your 5 day and add a drizzle of honey to make them all the more tempting.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy pancakes recipe at home you will need:

Ingredients needed to make healthy banana pancakes.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.

Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.

Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  2. Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  3. Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  4. Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  6. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  7. Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  8. Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

💭 Expert tips

  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What toppings to serve with banana pancakes?

The most simple topping for banana pancakes is more banana and a drizzle of honey. However, these healthy pancakes are great on their own. The banana ensures a moisture texture and naturally sweet flavour.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat these pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.

Are these healthy pancakes gluten free?

These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.

Can these pancakes be frozen?

Once made, allow to fully cool then place in a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost and reheat all in one go in either the microwave or toaster until warmed through.

Stack of banana pancakes topped with sliced bananas, and with a wedge skewered and cut out from one side of the pancake stack and put to the side.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

🍌 Other Banana recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from above.
Print

Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats)

Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas and oats for a flourless and milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Low Fat, Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 71kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Fork or masher
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Large spoon or tablespoon
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 2 medium bananas
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon ground almonds
  • 50 g rolled oats or porridge oats
  • knob of Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  • Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  • Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  • Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.
  • Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat, scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  • Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  • Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

Notes

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.
Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.
Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.
Toppings: Sliced banana and a drizzle of honey for a simple topping. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.
Can you reheat these pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.
Are these healthy pancakes gluten free? These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.
Expert tips:
  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

Nutrition

Calories: 71kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 69mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 78IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
Porcini Mushroom Risotto https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/ https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/#respond Thu, 24 Feb 2022 20:47:19 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1423 Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This easy porcini mushroom risotto recipe is one...

Read More

The post Porcini Mushroom Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes.

Porcini mushroom risotto on a small plate with fresh dill and parmesan.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy porcini mushroom risotto recipe is one of my most favourite ways to enjoy mushrooms. Even better with a bit of truffle grated on top! Here the dried mushrooms are left to soak in boiling water and the liquid from this is used to make the risotto. Resulting in that wonderfully earthy mushroom flavour being encapsulated in every plump grain of rice. Delicious!

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough dried porcini mushroom risotto to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making mushroom risotto.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Mushrooms: Dried porcini mushrooms are used here. However, you can replace with your preferred type of mushroom (fresh or dried).

Risotto rice: Risotto has short grains and high starch content. Look for as Arborio rice, Carnaroli rice or simply; risotto rice.

Butter: Use butter! Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 

Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so I add it to all my risotto recipes. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.

Dill: A perfect paring to the earthy mushrooms, but also optional. If preferred leave out or replace with parsley.

Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.

Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Soak the dried mushrooms in 500ml of hot water for at least 30 minutes until soft. After 30 minutes remove the mushrooms, reserving the liquid, and roughly chop. Then strain the liquid through a paper towel lined sieve into a clean bowl. 
  2. Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
  3. Add the rice and mix in well allowing the melted butter to coat each grain of rice.
  4. Next add the wine and simmer until the wine has nearly all reduced or been absorbed by the rice.Four images showing how to make mushroom risotto for steps 1-4.
  5. Then add two ladles of mushroom liquid, stirring attentively between each ladleful. Only add the second ladle when the first one has been fully absorbed.
  6. At this point switch to the veg stock to ensure the mushroom flavour isn't too overpowering. Add ladlefuls of the veg stock one at a time, again only adding the next ladleful when the previous has absorbed. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
  7. Stir in the soaked mushrooms, soured cream, parmesan and lemon juice.
  8. Serve the porcini mushroom risotto with fresh dill.Four images showing how to make mushroom risotto for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

  • Soaking mushrooms: use a large bowl to soak the dried mushrooms and stir occasionally. The space and stirring will ensure all the mushrooms are fully soaked and plumped up.
  • Mushroom grit: Dried mushrooms can be gritty. To avoid a gritty risotto the mushrooms can be rinsed after they have been soaked. The soaking liquid will also contain grit, so before adding to the risotto this should be strained through a paper towel lined sieve. After straining leave it to settle allowing any leftover grit to sink to the bottom. Do not disturb the bottom when adding the liquid to the risotto.
  • Stock: This recipe uses 2 types of stock. The first is mushroom stock, made by soaking the mushrooms. The second is vegetable stock. The mushroom stock will be very strong as dried mushrooms have a very intense flavour, which can be overpowering. Therefore, I suggest only using 2 ladles of mushroom stock then switch to using vegetable stock. However, feel free to add more mushroom stock for a more intense flavour.
  • Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Why use dried porcini mushrooms?

Porcini mushrooms are known for their rich, nutty flavour and meaty texture. Fresh porcini mushrooms are hard to come by as whereas dried porcini are widely available year round.

In addition dried mushrooms have a stronger and more intense flavour than fresh. The need to rehydrate the mushrooms in hot water also creates a full flavoured mushroom stock that can be added to the mushroom risotto during cooking.

How to store porcini mushroom risotto?

Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the mushroom risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard.

Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).

What is the best rice for risotto?

Risotto has plump, short-medium grains and high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. Look for Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy).

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time.

Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

Small plate of mushroom risotto with second plate in the background.

🍝 Other Italian recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Porcini mushroom risotto on a small plate with fresh dill and parmesan.
Print

Porcini Mushroom Risotto

Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, evening meal, Main Course, starter or main
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 634kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 50 g Dried porcini mushrooms
  • 20 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 170 g Carnaroli rice uncooked
  • 150 ml White wine
  • 500 ml Vegetable stock
  • 2 tablespoons Soured cream optional
  • 25 g Parmesan grated and extra to serve
  • ½ Lemon juiced
  • 20 g Fresh dill

Instructions

  • Soak the mushrooms in 500ml of hot water for at least 30 minutes until soft. After 30 minutes remove the mushrooms, reserving the liquid, and roughly chop. Then strain the liquid through a paper-towel lined sieve into a clean bowl.
    50 g Dried porcini mushrooms
  • Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
    20 g Butter, 1 Onion, 1 Garlic clove
  • Add the rice and mix in well allowing the melted butter to coat each grain of rice.
    170 g Carnaroli rice
  • Next add the wine and simmer until the wine has nearly all reduced or been absorbed by the rice.
    150 ml White wine
  • Then add two ladles of the mushroom liquid, stirring attentively between each ladleful. Only add the second ladle when the first one has been fully absorbed.
  • At this point switch to the veg stock to ensure the mushroom flavour isn't too overpowering. Add ladlefuls of the veg stock one at a time, again only adding the next ladleful when the previous has absorbed. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
    500 ml Vegetable stock
  • Stir in the soaked mushrooms, soured cream, parmesan and lemon juice.
    2 tablespoons Soured cream, 25 g Parmesan, ½ Lemon juiced
  • Serve with fresh dill.
    20 g Fresh dill

Video

Notes

Mushrooms: Dried porcini mushrooms are used here. However, you can replace with your preferred type of mushroom (fresh or dried). Porcini mushrooms are known for their rich, nutty flavour and meaty texture. Fresh porcini mushrooms are hard to come by as whereas dried porcini are widely available year round. Use a large bowl to soak the dried mushrooms and stir occasionally. The space and stirring will ensure all the mushrooms are fully soaked and plumped up.
Mushroom grit: Dried mushrooms can be gritty. To avoid a gritty risotto the mushrooms can be rinsed after they have been soaked. The soaking liquid will also contain grit, so before adding to the risotto this should be strained through a paper-towel lined sieve. After straining leave it to settle allowing any leftover grit to sink to the bottom. Do not disturb the bottom when adding the liquid to the risotto.
Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli or simply; risotto rice.
Butter: Use butter! Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 
Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so I add it to all my risotto recipes. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.
Dill: A perfect paring to the earthy mushrooms, but also optional. If preferred leave out or replace with parsley.
Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well. This recipe uses 2 types of stock. The first is mushroom stock, made by soaking the mushrooms. The second is vegetable stock. The mushroom stock will be very strong as dried mushrooms have a very intense flavour, which can be overpowering. Therefore, I suggest only using 2 ladles of the mushroom stock then switch to using vegetable stock. However, feel free to add more mushroom stock for a more intense flavour.
Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.
Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.
How to store? Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

 Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the mushroom risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. 

Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).
What is the best rice for risotto? Risotto rice has plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. Look for Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

 Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy). 

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. 

Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

Nutrition

Calories: 634kcal | Carbohydrates: 101g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 1299mg | Potassium: 727mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1729IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 217mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Nov 2015. Updated in Feb 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Porcini Mushroom Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/feed/ 0
Red Lentil Dahl https://properfoodie.com/red-lentil-tarka-dahl/ https://properfoodie.com/red-lentil-tarka-dahl/#comments Tue, 08 Feb 2022 18:57:13 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2768 Red lentil dahl flavoured with Indian spices and simmered in vine ripened tomatoes. A nutritious, vegan curry that will warm you up, keep you going through winter and can be on the table in just 30 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Really healthy and packed full of protein, fibre, vitamins and minerals, this red...

Read More

The post Red Lentil Dahl appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Red lentil dahl flavoured with Indian spices and simmered in vine ripened tomatoes. A nutritious, vegan curry that will warm you up, keep you going through winter and can be on the table in just 30 minutes.

Lentil dahl in a wide skillet pan and topped with yogurt and parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Really healthy and packed full of protein, fibre, vitamins and minerals, this red lentil dahl is one curry that can be thoroughly enjoyed guilt free. If you fancy a meat free night or are indeed vegetarian or vegan, then this spicy curry recipe is a great option. Its also simple to prepare and uses basic ingredients that won't break the bank.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough red lentil dahl to serve 4 people.

Tarka dahl ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Lentils: Use good quality, freshly bought lentils to ensure good taste and texture. Opt for any variety of lentil but always check packet instructions. If you prefer swap lentils for beans, chickpeas or split peas.

Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.

Vine tomatoes: Opt for vine ripened tomatoes for that earthy, sunshine flavour. If you can't get hold of vine ripened, use tinned chopped or plum tomatoes which also hold plenty of flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Simmer lentils in water for 10-15 minutes or until soft, then drain and set to one side.
  2. Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them).
  3. As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion and garlic and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
  4. Next add the tomatoes, chillies, drained lentils, spices and tomato puree.Four images showing how to make red lentil dahl step by step for steps 1-4.
  5. Mix well and simmer for a couple of minutes, then taste and season if required. If you want to make the Dahl more soup-like or creamy you can add stock or coconut milk at this point, stir in well and bring to a simmer.
  6. Finally; remove from the heat, stir in the chopped coriander and serve with plain yogurt.Two images showing how to make Red lentil dahl for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

Lentils: Choose good quality lentils and don't use old ones. Rinse well under running tap water before cooking to remove any dust or dirt. Don't overcook! Cook until just soft and check packet instructions for recommended cooking times.

Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.

Soupier version: For a version thats creamier or more soup-like add a tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock.

Make it your own: Add chickpeas or split peas, or completely swap the lentils for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Should lentils be soaked before cooking?

No its not necessary to soak lentils before cooking. It is however, good practise to rinse and drain thoroughly before cooking. Lentils are very small and so its not uncommon for dirt and dust to get mixed in during packaging.

Is red lentil dahl healthy?

Dahl is packed full of nutrients and provides a good source of vitamins, minerals and fibre. Lentils are also high in protein and low in fat so they are great substitute for meat.

Storage?

Leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover lentil dahl to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Red lentil dahl in a wide cast iron pan and topped with yogurt and parsley.

🍛 Other curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Red lentil dahl in a wide cast iron pan and topped with yogurt and parsley
Print

Red Lentil Dahl

Red lentil dahl flavoured with Indian spices and simmered in vine ripened tomatoes. A nutritious, vegan curry that will warm you up, keep you going through winter and can be on the table in just 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, main meal
Cuisine Indian
Diet Gluten Free, Low Fat, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 359kcal

Ingredients

  • 300 g dried red lentils rinsed well
  • Boiled water double the volume of lentils

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 2 onions finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 350 g of vine tomatoes roughly chopped
  • 2 green chillies deseeded and finely chopped

  • 1 teaspoon ginger powder
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 3 tablespoon tomato puree
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Handful fresh coriander chopped
  • Plain yogurt to serve
  • Tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock optional, for a more soup-like version

Instructions

  • Simmer lentils in water for 10-15 minutes or until soft, then drain and set to one side.
    300 g dried red lentils, Boiled water
  • Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them).
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion and garlic and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
    2 onions, 2 cloves garlic
  • Next add the tomatoes, chillies, drained lentils, spices and tomato puree.
    350 g of vine tomatoes, 2 green chillies, 1 teaspoon ginger powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric, 1 teaspoon garam masala, 3 tablespoon tomato puree
  • Mix well and simmer for a couple of minutes, then taste and season if required. If you want to make the Dahl more soup-like or creamy you can add stock or coconut milk at this point, stir in well and bring to a simmer.
    Salt and pepper to taste, Tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock
  • Finally; remove from the heat, stir in the chopped coriander and serve with plain yogurt.
    Handful fresh coriander chopped, Plain yogurt

Video

Notes

Lentils: Use good quality, freshly bought lentils to ensure good taste and texture. Opt for any variety of lentil but always check packet instructions. If you prefer swap lentils for beans, chickpeas or split peas. Rinse well under running tap water before cooking to remove any dust or dirt. Don't overcook! Cook until just soft and check packet instructions for recommended cooking times.
Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.
Vine tomatoes: Opt for vine ripened tomatoes for that earthy, sunshine flavour. If you can't get hold of vine ripened, use tinned chopped or plum tomatoes which also hold plenty of flavour.
Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
Soupier version: For a version thats creamier or more soup-like add a tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock.
Make it your own: Add chickpeas or split peas, or completely swap the lentils for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.
Should lentils be soaked before cooking?
No its not necessary to soak lentils before cooking. It is however, good practise to rinse and drain thoroughly before cooking. Lentils are very small and so its not uncommon for dirt and dust to get mixed in during packaging.
Is red lentil dahl healthy?
Dahl is packed full of nutrients and provides a good source of vitamins, minerals and fibre. Lentils are also high in protein and low in fat so they are great substitute for meat.
Storage?
Leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover lentil dahl to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Calories: 359kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 144mg | Potassium: 1100mg | Fiber: 26g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 837IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Jan 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

A warming Red lentil tarka dahl with gluten free roti breads

 

The post Red Lentil Dahl appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/red-lentil-tarka-dahl/feed/ 8
How To Make Pasta https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-homemade-fresh-pasta/ https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-homemade-fresh-pasta/#comments Fri, 21 Jan 2022 19:40:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5350 How to make pasta at home with just flour and eggs. Plus get a FREE 'How to Make Pasta Guide' to download and keep. All the joy and fun of making perfect pasta at home without the stress of it going wrong. Make this pasta with or without a machine and get my handy tips...

Read More

The post How To Make Pasta appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
How to make pasta at home with just flour and eggs. Plus get a FREE 'How to Make Pasta Guide' to download and keep. All the joy and fun of making perfect pasta at home without the stress of it going wrong. Make this pasta with or without a machine and get my handy tips on how to roll, cut and store your homemade fresh pasta.

Homemade strips of pasta wrapped into nests and sprinkled with semolina flour.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This recipe shows how easy it is to make pasta from scratch. The pasta itself requires little more than finely milled flour, large eggs and a bit of elbow grease. Below I'll walk you through the simplest way to make a pasta dough. Theres also handy tips on how to knead the pasta dough and how to roll it out. All by hand with no machine required.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough pasta to serve 3 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making fresh pasta: 00 flour, Durum wheat semolina, Large eggs.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Flour: 00 flour (finely ground Italian flour) is the best for making pasta. This is the finest of the Italian flours and so produces a lovely, soft pasta dough. 00 flour is also the best flour for making pizza dough. If you can't get hold of any 00 flour you can replace with a strong white bread flour for similar results.

Eggs: Make sure the eggs are large and fresh.

Durum wheat semolina: Durum wheat semolina isn't strictly necessary, although it adds a nice flavour and crunch. Its main use is to sprinkle onto the rolled out dough before rolling into a tube and slicing. The semolina stops the pasta dough from sticking together. However, 00 flour can also help with this.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the flour on a clean work surface and make a large well in the middle. Next, crack 3 large eggs into the well.
  2. Use a fork to gradually mix the flour into the eggs. Start from the middle and work outwards.
  3. Once most of the flour has been combined, use your hands to bring together into a dough. Knead for at least 15 minutes until smooth before shaping into a ball (see expert tips below for full instructions on kneading). Split the ball in half, wrap each half in cling film and place both in the fridge to rest for 30 minutes.
  4. After resting roll each half separately. Flour the work surface and use a large, heavy rolling pin to evenly roll out the dough. For best results roll as thin as possible. See expert tips below for evenly rolling into a rectangle.4 images showing how to make pasta step by step for steps 1-4.
  5. Sprinkle the thinly rolled out dough generously with the semolina to stop it sticking to itself when making pasta strips. Then roll the full rectangle of dough into a tube shape, trim off the untidy ends then cut into: half cm strips for tagliatelle; 1mm thin strips for spaghetti; or one and a half cm strips for pappardelle.
  6. Take the ends of the sliced strips and pull upwards allowing the weight of the dough to unravel the strips.
  7. Alternatively, leave the dough flat and cut out squares with a square pasta cutter and pinch into farfalle (butterfly) pasta shapes. Or why not have a go at making your own ravioli.
  8. If you aren't ready to cook your pasta right away, its important that you don't let it dry out. Roll up your raw strips of pasta into nests and place onto a semolina-dusted tray along with any pasta shapes. Cover with a damp cloth until ready to cook.4 images showing how to make pasta step by step for steps 5-8.
  9. For best results cook right away: Place a pan of water on a medium heat and add a good helping of sea salt to season the water. Bring to a rolling boil and then carefully add your pasta. Immediately stir with a wooden spoon to check nothing has stuck together or to the bottom. Boil at a tremble for 3 minutes, then drain and serve. (If you are serving with a sauce - ladle out some of the pasta water into your sauce to add to the consistency).

💭 Expert tips

How to knead pasta dough

  1. Once most of the egg has been combined with the flour, use your hands to bring together into a dough. It may appear quite dry at first but the more you combine the flour the sticker it becomes. 
  2. Use the heal of your hand to begin working and kneading the dough
  3. As it becomes less sticky start to stretch and fold back on itself in between kneading.
  4. Continue to knead and stretch for at least 15 minutes until the dough becomes soft and smooth.  4 images showing how to knead pasta dough step by step.

How to roll pasta dough

  1. After kneading and resting, the dough can be rolled out using a rolling pin or a pasta machine if you have one to hand. Flour the work surface then take one of the dough balls and start to roll out. The dough ball will of course roll into an oval shape.
  2. A rectangular shape is better for cutting pasta as there will be less waste. To form a rectangle fold the edges of the oval into the centre of the dough then fold the full thing in half. Roll over this to flatten down and lengthen.
  3. Then repeat the folding in of the edges and folding in half. This will create a small square.
  4. From here evenly roll the dough square into a large rectangle. Roll as thin as possible, turning and flipping the dough and re-flouring as needed. Plenty of elbow grease will be required to get the pasta dough nice and thin. 4 images showing how to roll pasta dough step by step.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Should the pasta dough be rested before rolling out?

Yes, for best results when rolling the dough, rest in the fridge for 30 minutes first by wrapping in cling film and placing in the fridge.

How thin should I roll the pasta dough?

As thin as possible. Ideally you should be able to put a piece of printed paper behind it and just about see the text through the dough.

Making ahead and how to store?

Fresh pasta is always best cooked fresh as soon as it is made. However, it is possible to make ahead and store if you prefer. A kneaded pasta dough ball can be wrapped in cling film and stored in the fridge for up to 1 week, then rolled and shaped as required.

Rolled and cut out pasta dough can be covered with a damp cloth in the short term (an hour or so) or frozen in the long term. Make sure pasta strips are wrapped into nests in both cases. To freeze place the pasta nests or cut out shapes onto a floured tray and place in the freezer. Once frozen transfer to a freezer bag and store in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Strips of fresh pasta wrapped into a nest and sprinkled with semolina and further nests in background.

🍝 Homemade pasta serving suggestions

📖 How to get your free pasta making guide:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade strips of pasta wrapped into nests and sprinkled with semolina flour.
Print

How To Make Pasta

How to make pasta at home with just flour and eggs. All the joy and fun of making perfect pasta at home without the stress of it going wrong. Make this pasta with or without a machine and get my handy tips on the best way to roll, cut and store your homemade fresh pasta.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Italian, Mediterranean
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Rest Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 3 people
Calories 435kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

Instructions

To make the pasta dough:

  • Place the flour on a clean work surface and make a large well in the middle. Crack 3 large eggs into the well.
    300 g 00 Flour, 3 large eggs
  • Use a fork to gradually mix the flour into the eggs. Start from the middle and work outwards.
  • Once most of the flour has been combined, use your hands to bring together into a dough. It may appear quite dry at first but the more you combine the flour the sticker it becomes.

Kneading the pasta dough:

  • Use the heal of your hand to begin working and kneading the dough. As it becomes less sticky start to stretch and fold back on itself in between kneading.
  • Continue to knead and stretch for at least 15 minutes until the dough becomes soft and smooth and then shape into a ball. You know its been kneaded for long enough if the dough bounces back when pressed with your finger.
  • Split the ball in half, wrap each half in cling film and place both in the fridge to rest for 30 minutes.

Rolling the pasta dough:

  • After kneading and resting, the dough can be rolled out using a large heavy rolling pin or a pasta machine if you have one to hand. Flour the work surface and evenly roll out one of the dough balls. The dough ball will of course roll into an oval shape.
  • A rectangular shape is better for cutting pasta as there will be less waste. To form a rectangle fold the edges of the oval into the centre of the dough then fold the full thing in half. Roll over this with the rolling pin to flatten down and lengthen.
  • Then repeat the folding in of the edges and folding in half. This will create a small square.
  • From here evenly roll the dough square into a large rectangle. Roll as thin as possible, turning and flipping the dough and re-flouring as needed. Plenty of elbow grease will be required to get the pasta dough nice and thin.

Shaping the pasta dough:

  • Sprinkle the thinly rolled out dough generously with the semolina to stop it sticking to itself when making pasta strips. Then roll the full rectangle of dough into a tube shape, trim off the untidy ends then cut into: half cm strips for tagliatelle; 1mm thin strips for spaghetti; or one and a half cm strips for pappardelle.
    Durum Wheat Semolina
  • Take the ends of the sliced strips and pull upwards allowing the weight of the dough to unravel the strips.
  • Alternatively, leave the dough flat and cut out squares with a square pasta cutter and pinch into farfalle (butterfly) pasta shapes. Or why not have a go at making your own ravioli.

Cooking homemade fresh pasta:

  • If you aren't ready to cook your pasta right away, its important that you don't let it dry out. Roll up your raw strips of pasta into nests and place onto a semolina-dusted tray along with any pasta shapes. Cover with a damp cloth until ready to cook.
    Durum Wheat Semolina
  • For best results cook right away: Place a pan of water on a medium heat and add a good helping of sea salt to season the water. Bring to a rolling boil and then carefully add your pasta. Immediately stir with a wooden spoon to check nothing has stuck to the bottom. Boil at a tremble for 3 minutes, then drain and serve. (If you are serving with a sauce - ladle out some of the pasta water into your sauce to add to the consistency).

Video

Notes

Recommendations for equipment and ingredients:
 Rolling Pin   Pasta Cutters        00 Flour         Semolina
        
Flour: The best flour for pasta is 00 flour (Finely ground Italian pasta). This is the finest of the Italian flours and so produces a lovely, soft pasta dough. 00 flour is also the best flour for making pizza dough. If you can't get hold of any 00 flour you can replace with a strong white bread flour for similar results.
Eggs: Make sure the eggs are large and fresh.
Durum wheat semolina: This isn't strictly necessary, although it adds a nice flavour and crunch. Its main use is to sprinkle onto the rolled out dough before rolling into a tube and slicing. The semolina stops the pasta dough from sticking together. However, 00 flour could also be used to the same effect.
Should the pasta dough be rested before rolling out? Yes, for best results when rolling the dough, rest in the fridge for 30 minutes first by wrapping in cling film and placing in the fridge.
How thin should I roll the pasta dough? As thin as possible. Ideally you should be able to put a piece of printed paper behind it and just about see the text through the dough.
Making ahead and how to store? Fresh pasta is always best cooked fresh as soon as it is made. However, it is possible to make ahead and store if you prefer. A kneaded pasta dough ball can be wrapped in cling film and stored in the fridge for up to 1 week, then rolled and shaped as required. Rolled and cut out pasta dough can be covered with a damp cloth in the short term (an hour or so) or frozen in the long term. Make sure pasta strips are wrapped into nests in both cases. To freeze place the pasta nests or cut out shapes onto a floured tray and place in the freezer. Once frozen transfer to a freezer bag and store in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 435kcal | Carbohydrates: 75g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 164mg | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 175mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 240IU | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Nov 2017. Updated in Jan 2022 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post How To Make Pasta appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-homemade-fresh-pasta/feed/ 12
Homemade Tikka Masala Paste https://properfoodie.com/homemade-tikka-masala-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/homemade-tikka-masala-paste/#comments Mon, 27 Sep 2021 15:40:33 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2059 Homemade tikka masala paste made with ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka curry paste is great to have handy in the fridge, ready for your next impromptu curry night. Its fresh and aromatic and whizzed together in just 10 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe I love to make my own...

Read More

The post Homemade Tikka Masala Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade tikka masala paste made with ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka curry paste is great to have handy in the fridge, ready for your next impromptu curry night. Its fresh and aromatic and whizzed together in just 10 minutes.

Tikka masala paste in a jar with a teaspoonful of paste hovering above the jar.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

I love to make my own pastes for all my curries, you just can't beat the sweet and spicy aromas of fresh curry paste hitting the surface of a hot pan. Use this tikka masala curry paste recipe to make a chicken marinade for this amazing chicken tikka masala curry.

Theres also a whole world of pastes to explore once you've mastered making this one (see links below)! I also love to make my own biryani masala marinade for a tasty homemade fish biryani.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a small jar of tikka masala curry paste you will need:

tikka masala paste ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Fresh ginger: Use fresh ginger if you can get hold of it. If not, a teaspoon of ginger paste, jarred ginger or ground ginger will work just fine.

Fresh garlic: Fresh garlic cloves will give the best flavour for this tikka paste, but a teaspoon of jarred or granulated garlic could be used instead.

Red chilli pepper: The chillies used here will ultimately determine how hot your curry is. So if you like it spicy then use hotter chillies. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger red chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with red bell pepper (capsicum).

Coriander: Coriander is a great flavour in tikka masala paste and so I don't recommend that you substitute or leave it out. This recipe uses both fresh and ground coriander for full flavour and a burst of colour.

Tikka masala spices: Cumin, garam masala and paprika are used in this recipe as the base for this tikka paste. I recommend using at least these spices and for a little extra flavour try adding a teaspoon of cinnamon and turmeric.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place all the ingredients into a small blender.
  2. Add just 1 tablespoon of oil to begin with, more can be added as required.
  3. Start the blender and blend until the ingredients start to come together into a paste.
  4. If the blender has trouble getting going add another half tablespoon of oil of tomato puree. then after this add small amounts of tap water in between blending, until you are happy with the consistency.Step by step images of how to make tikka curry paste
  5. Once completely blended the paste can be used immediately as a marinade. Mix 2 tablespoons of the tikka masala paste with 120ml of plain yogurt. Then cover raw or leftover cooked chicken with the marinade and leave in the fridge for at least 2 hours. Alternatively you can jar up the paste and keep in the fridge for up to a month.

💭 Expert tips

Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of tikka paste (one small 110ml jar). To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients.

Consistency of the tikka paste: Make sure to only add small amount of water in between blending (½ a tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.

Spicy tikka paste: For an extra kick add a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made, tikka masala paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a month or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

How to use tikka masala paste?

I like to mix this tikka paste with plain yogurt to create a beautiful marinade for sliced chicken breasts. The marinaded chicken can then be used in this tasty chicken tikka masala curry. But of course you could use any meat or fish. Also use as a marinade for vegetables to make a vegetarian curry. Or if you don't have time to make a paste, check out my quick chicken and almond curry.

Can you buy tikka masala paste?

If you prefer you can just buy a jar of paste from the supermarket. Sometimes a jar of paste and a packet of microwave rice are just the ticket on a busy weekday night. That said, if I have the time and where-with-all to get out my blender and chop up a few ingredients, then I most certainly will. Not only does homemade curry paste taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.

Is there a difference between tikka and tikka masala?

Tikka usually means pieces of marinated meat cooked in a tandoor or grilled. Tikka masala uses the marinated meat in a curry sauce.

Tikka curry paste in a small jar.

🍛 Other easy homemade curry pastes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Tikka curry paste in a small jar.
Print

Homemade Tikka Masala Paste

Homemade tikka masala paste made with ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka curry paste is great to have handy in the fridge, ready for your next impromptu curry night. Its fresh and aromatic and whizzed together in just 10 minutes.
Course paste
Cuisine Indian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 tablespoons
Calories 33kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped

  • 1 red chilli pepper seeds removed and roughly chopped

  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger peeled and minced
  • 2 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon hot paprika or paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon cumin seeds or ground cumin
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • 1 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 30 g fresh coriander chopped including stems

  • Pinch of sea salt

Instructions

  • Place all the ingredients into a small blender.
    2 garlic cloves, 1 red chilli pepper, 2 cm piece of fresh ginger, 2 teaspoon garam masala, 1 teaspoon hot paprika, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon cumin seeds, 1 tablespoon tomato puree, 30 g fresh coriander, Pinch of sea salt
  • Add just 1 tablespoon of oil to begin with, more can be added as required.
    1 tablespoon oil
  • Start the blender and blend until the ingredients start to come together into a paste.
  • If the blender has trouble getting going add another half tablespoon of oil of tomato puree. Then after this add small amounts of tap water in between blending, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Once completely blended the paste can be used immediately as a marinade. Mix 2 tablespoons of the tikka masala paste with 120ml of plain yogurt. Then cover raw or leftover cooked chicken with the marinade and leave in the fridge for at least 2 hours. Alternatively you can jar up the paste and keep in the fridge for up to a month.

Video

Notes

Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of tikka paste (one small 110ml jar). To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients.
Consistency of the tikka paste: Make sure to only add small amount of water in between blending (½ a tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.
Spicy tikka paste: For an extra kick add a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.
How to store? Once made, tikka masala paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a month or in the freezer for up to 3 months.
How to use tikka masala paste? I like to mix this tikka paste with plain yogurt to create a beautiful marinade for sliced chicken breasts. The marinaded chicken can then be used in this tasty chicken tikka masala curry. But of course you could use any meat or fish. Also use as a marinade for vegetables to make a vegetarian curry. Or if you don't have time to make a paste, check out my quick chicken and almond curry.
Can you buy tikka masala paste? If you prefer you can just buy a jar of paste from the supermarket. Sometimes a jar of paste and a packet of microwave rice are just the ticket on a busy weekday night. That said, if I have the time and where-with-all to get out my blender and chop up a few ingredients, then I most certainly will. Not only does homemade curry paste taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.
Is there a difference between tikka and tikka masala? Tikka usually means pieces of marinated meat cooked in a tandoor or grilled. Tikka masala uses the marinated meat in a curry sauce.

Nutrition

Serving: 1tablespoon | Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 69mg | Potassium: 82mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 589IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Aug 2016. Updated in Sept 2021 with an improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

The post Homemade Tikka Masala Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/homemade-tikka-masala-paste/feed/ 27
Leek and Potato Soup https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/#respond Fri, 24 Jan 2020 16:18:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12133 Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable,...

Read More

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is leek and potato soup tasty and comforting but its also a really nutritious recipe and perfect for refuelling on a cold day. Potatoes are a starchy carbohydrate and a great source of calcium, Iron and B vitamins. With the skins on, potatoes also provide a good source of fibre. So to boost the fibre and the texture of this recipe, give your tatties a good wash and leave the skins on!

This warming, full flavoured, healthy potato soup also contains 1 portion of your 5 a day, from the onions, celery and leeks. Plus, each serving of soup comes in at under 300kcal, meaning that theres plenty of room left for a nice chunk of crusty bread on the side. For a soup without potatoes that still contains plenty of nutrients try my rustic, traditional Tuscan ribollita soup

🥘 Ingredients

To make a pot of this delicious leek and potato soup, to serve 4 people, you will need:

  • Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Vegetable stock 
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream (optional)
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.

Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 

Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 

Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery.

Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.

Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
  2. Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
  3. Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
  4. Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 1-4.
  5. When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half. 
  6. Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
  7. For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
  8. Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 5-8.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup?

To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.

How do you make potato soup thicker?

As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more.
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.

How to store?

Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.

What to serve with leek and potato soup?

Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.

What is Vichyssoise?

The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

A bowl of homemade leek and potato soup with a second bowl of soup in the background.

🥔 How can I get more potatoes into my diet?

Potatoes are so versatile and they are great served up with most things.  Like roast potatoes or mashed potatoes with your roast chicken or roast beef dinner on a Sunday. Or if you just want an easy side to go with your mid week meals try these garlic, herb foil pack potatoes. Other potato soups that are just as satisfying as leek and potato on a cold day are celeriac and potato soup or creamy clam chowder.  Or for a meal thats a little more substantial why not try my super affordable Frozen Salmon and potato traybake? Or salmon and mackerel fishcakes.

If you want something a little more indulgent then add potatoes to a pie: fish pie, minted lamb pie, cottage pie or shepherds pie. 

🍵 Other soup recipes you might like:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
Print

Leek and potato soup

Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.
Course main meal, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British, French
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 248kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 30 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 125g
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 100g
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 200
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed 600g
  • 500 ml vegetable stock Plus extra water if required
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream Optional
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve Optional

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
    30 g Butter, 1 Onion finely chopped, 2 celery sticks chopped
  • Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
    2 medium leeks chopped, 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
    500 ml vegetable stock
  • Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half.
  • Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
    Pinch of salt
  • For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
    2 tablespoon double cream
  • Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.
    Chopped chives and extra cream to serve

Video

Notes

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.
Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 
Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 
Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery. Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.
Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.
How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup? To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.
How do you make potato soup thicker? As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more. 
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.
How to store? Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.
What to serve with leek and potato soup? Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.
What is Vichyssoise? The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

Nutrition

Serving: 350ml | Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 645mg | Potassium: 840mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1513IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Sept 2021 with improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/feed/ 0
Cauliflower Cheese https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/#comments Tue, 19 Jan 2021 00:01:47 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12215 This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to...

Read More

The post Cauliflower Cheese appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to serve up with any meal, and its particularly good with a Sunday roast.

Cauliflower presented in a shallow dish with a creamy sauce and topped with baked on cheese and freshly chopped parsley.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is one of those side dish heros that will always go well with any other main dish. Whether your cooking up a joint for a roast beef dinner or lovingly basting your Sunday Roast Chicken, this delicious recipe will not let you down.

Its also great served up along side steak and ale pie or other classic roast dinner favourites like roast potatoes, mash potatoes, foil pack potatoes, green bean almondine and Yorkshire pudding. 

🥘 Ingredients

To make cauliflower cheese you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make cauliflower cheese with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Butter: Butter is required to form the roux, which is the base of the sauce.

Cheese: The simplest cheese sauce uses cheddar and here I have used a medium cheddar. However, you could substitute with other types of cheese for a variety of flavours. Try with red leicester, mozzarella or a blue cheese if you like strong flavours.

Cauliflower: For variations on this dish substitute the cauliflower for broccoli or leeks.

Parsley and black pepper: Optional

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by making the roux. To make the roux place a small milk pan on a medium heat and add 20g of butter. When the butter has melted, stir in 30g plain flour to form a paste - this paste is the roux.
  2. The next step is to turn the roux into a white sauce (or bechamel sauce). To do this gradually add 350ml of semi skimmed milk to the roux whilst continuing to heat and stir.
  3. Once all the milk has been added, you are left with a silky smooth white sauce. Turn the pan down to a low heat and add 50g of grated cheese. Stir in until fully melted into the sauce.
  4. Next, spread cauliflower florets across the base of an 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish. Pour over the cheese sauce ensuring all the cauliflower is covered.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this cauliflower recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Top with a scattering of extra grated cheese and some black pepper.
  6. Then bake at 180 degrees C for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and check if the cauliflower is cooked and soft enough by skewering with a knife. If not return, to the oven for a further 5 minutes. A collage of 2 images showing how to make this cauliflower recipe step by step for instructions 5 and 6.
  7. Once cooked, if the top isn't as golden brown as you would like it, place under the grill on a high heat for a couple of minutes or until you are happy with the colour.

💭 Expert tips

  • Preventing a lumpy cheese sauce: When adding the milk to the roux (paste) it is essential to stir continuously. Stopping stirring will cause lumps to form and no amount of stirring after this will get rid of them. You can also remove the pan from the heat as you need to if you feel its getting too hot or if you can't stir fast enough to stop lumps forming.
  • Preventing a skin forming on the sauce: When the sauce has been made and is removed from the heat it will immediately start to cool. During this process a skin will start to form on top of the sauce. This may happen before you get chance to pour it over the cauliflower. To prevent this, place a piece of cling film directly onto the surface of the sauce as soon as you take it off the heat. When you are ready to use, remove the cling film and use a spoon to scrape any sauce off the cling film and back into the pan.
  • Variations: Try this cheese sauce over broccoli or leeks or use it to make macaroni cheese. For something a little different why not have a go at sprouts in cheese sauce.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is a roux?

A roux is basically melted butter and flour mixed together to form a paste. This paste is the starting point for making cheese sauce. Many recipes say to use equal amounts of butter and flour, but I prefer to use slightly less butter, to give a thicker roux and to stop any excess butter forming on top of the finished sauce.

Why is my cauliflower cheese watery?

Cauliflower cheese can go watery if the cauliflower is overcooked. Overcooked cauliflower releases water, which will seep into the rest of the dish. So even if your sauce was thick when it went in the oven, if its in there too long, the water from the cauliflower will cause it to go watery.

I would advise to not bake for longer than 20-25 minutes. If by this point its not quite brown enough on top, remove from the oven and place under the grill on high for 1-2 minutes.

Can the recipe be made in advance?

Yes you can prepare this recipe right up until the point its ready to go into the oven. At this point allow the whole thing to cool and then cover and place in the fridge until you are ready to bake it.

Can this recipe be reheated?

You can reheat this recipe if it has been stored correctly. Make sure any leftovers are fully cooled then cover and store in the fridge. When you are ready to reheat remove from the fridge, take off the cover and reheat in the oven for 5 - 10 minutes or in the microwave for 2-3 minutes, until piping hot.

Can cauliflower cheese be frozen?

Cauliflower cheese is best frozen before it has been baked. Make the recipe up to the point that that it would normally go into the oven. Then allow to fully cool, cover with a lid or cling film and freeze for up to 3 months. Fully defrost over night before baking at 180 degrees C for 20 minutes.

Cauliflower in a creamy cheese sauce presented in a shallow dish and topped with baked on cheese and parsley

Other cauliflower recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Cauliflower cheese in a black snd white dish with fresh parsley sprinkled over the top
Print

Cauliflower Cheese

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to serve up with any meal, and its particularly good with a Sunday roast.
Course side, Side Dish, sunday roast
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 225kcal

Equipment

  • Small milk pan for the cheese sauce
  • 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish

Ingredients

  • 20 g Butter
  • 30 g Plain flour
  • 350 ml Semi skimmed milk
  • 50 g Cheddar grated
  • 1 medium cauliflower leaves removed and cut into florets (600g)

For the topping

  • 30 g Cheddar grated
  • Black pepper
  • Freshly chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Start by making the roux. To make the roux place a small milk pan on a medium heat and add 20g of butter. When the butter has melted, stir in 30g plain flour to form a paste - this paste is the roux.
  • The next step is to turn the roux into a white sauce (or bechamel sauce). To do this gradually add 350ml of semi skimmed milk to the roux whilst continuing to heat and stir.
  • Once all the milk has been added, you are left with a silky smooth white sauce. Turn the pan down to a low heat and add 50g of grated cheese. Stir in until fully melted into the sauce.
  • Next, spread cauliflower florets across the base of an 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish. Pour over the cheese sauce ensuring all the cauliflower is covered.
  • Top with a scattering of extra grated cheese and some black pepper.
  • Then bake at 180 degrees C for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and check if the cauliflower is cooked and soft enough by skewering with a knife. If not return, to the oven for a further 5 minutes.
  • Once cooked, if the top isn't as golden brown as you would like it, place under the grill on a high heat for a couple of minutes or until you are happy with the colour.

Video

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
Butter: Butter is required to form the roux, which is the base of the sauce.
Cheese: The simplest cheese sauce uses cheddar and here I have used a medium cheddar. However, you could substitute with other types of cheese for a variety of flavours. Try with red leicester, mozzarella or a blue cheese if you like strong flavours.
Parsley and black pepper: Optional
Variations: Try this cheese sauce over broccoli or leeks or use it to make macaroni cheese. For something a little different why not have a go at sprouts in cheese sauce.
Preventing a lumpy cheese sauce: When adding the milk to the roux (paste) it is essential to stir continuously. Stopping stirring will cause lumps to form and no amount of stirring after this will get rid of them. You can also remove the pan from the heat as you need to if you feel its getting too hot or if you can't stir fast enough to stop lumps forming.
Preventing a skin forming on the sauce: When the sauce has been made and is removed from the heat it will immediately start to cool. During this process a skin will start to form on top of the sauce. This may happen before you get chance to pour it over the cauliflower. To prevent this, place a piece of cling film directly onto the surface of the sauce as soon as you take it off the heat. When you are ready to use, remove the cling film and use a spoon to scrape any sauce off the cling film and back into the pan.
Why is my cauliflower cheese watery?: Cauliflower cheese can go watery if the cauliflower is overcooked. Overcooked cauliflower releases water, which will seep into the rest of the dish. So even if your sauce was thick when it went in the oven, if its in there too long, the water from the cauliflower will cause it to go watery. I would advise to not bake for longer than 20-25 minutes. If by this point its not quite brown enough on top, remove from the oven and place under the grill on high for 1-2 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 272g | Calories: 225kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 246mg | Potassium: 583mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 415IU | Vitamin C: 72mg | Calcium: 282mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in January 2020. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Cauliflower Cheese appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/feed/ 5
Traditional Tiramisu Recipe https://properfoodie.com/tiramisu/ https://properfoodie.com/tiramisu/#comments Wed, 03 Mar 2021 23:16:30 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4927 Tiramisu is a light and airy, no bake, Italian dessert made with layers of creamy mascarpone and coffee dipped ladyfingers. This traditional tiramisu recipe is made in the authentic Italian way with whipped, raw eggs and mascarpone cheese. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This tiramisu recipe is made in the traditional way using raw...

Read More

The post Traditional Tiramisu Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Tiramisu is a light and airy, no bake, Italian dessert made with layers of creamy mascarpone and coffee dipped ladyfingers. This traditional tiramisu recipe is made in the authentic Italian way with whipped, raw eggs and mascarpone cheese.

A small, square piece of tiramisu on a plate with the side view showing layers of sponge fingers and creamy mascarpone. The top is dusted with cocoa powder and a large dish of tiramisu is in the background.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This tiramisu recipe is made in the traditional way using raw eggs, mascarpone cheese and ladyfingers dipped in strong coffee. There is no cream, which helps to keep this recipe light and airy. I like to try and keep things as authentic as possible and this Tiramisu comes straight from Italy. The recipe is adapted from a chef who works at Tenuta Torciano; a little winery in Tuscany. We visited Torciano whilst on our Italian honeymoon in 2017.

Making tiramisu this way may not be to everyones taste. As this is a no bake dessert the eggs are actually raw when served. However, this is what makes this dessert so incredible and the best tiramisu always uses raw eggs and no cream. Below I will show you how to prepare the eggs and tiramisu dessert properly so that you feel confident about serving up this traditional tiramisu recipe.

Please note that young children, pregnant women and those who are clinically vulnerable should avoid foods containing raw eggs, including tiramisu. In general I recommend using fresh eggs that have a lion stamp (UK). If you are not UK based then you should try to use fresh, pasteurised eggs.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this traditional tiramisu recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make a traditional tiramisu recipe.

Ingredient notes

Ladyfingers: Use hard, crisp sponge fingers (not soft). The traditional tiramisu biscuits that are used in a traditional tiramisu are called Savoiardi. I used a deep dish (23x18x7cm) for this recipe and so needed 48 ladyfingers across 3 layers. You may need more or less depending on the size and depth of your dish.

Strong coffee: Freshly brew the coffee and if you can, use an espresso machine or ground coffee in a cafetiere. If you don't have access to these you can substitute for instant coffee.

Coffee liqueur: Optional - leave out if you prefer. I like to use Tia Maria, but any coffee liqueur will do.

Mascarpone cheese: Choose a good quality, full fat mascarpone cheese.

Eggs: As mentioned above, the eggs in this recipe will remain raw so make sure to use fresh eggs with the lion stamp (UK). Or if not in the UK use fresh, pasteurised eggs.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is essential in this recipe. It is added to the egg yolks and when whisked together the yolks become thick and creamy. This is known and a sabayon.

Cocoa powder: For dusting on the top of the finished dessert. Leave this off if you prefer and simply scatter with grated chocolate.

Cadburys flake: I love to top my tiramisu with both cocoa powder and crumbled bits of cadburys flake chocolate. If you can't get any flake, just substitute with normal milk chocolate and grate over the top.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by separating the eggs, placing yolks in one bowl and whites in another. Make sure no yolk is mixed in with the whites.
  2. Next set up a stand mixer with whisk attachment or use an electric hand whisk. Place the egg yolks and caster sugar into the mixer and whisk together on high for 5 minutes until the yolks are pale and creamy. 
  3. Change the attachment on the mixer to the paddle (or use a spatula). Add the mascarpone to the creamed yolks and mix together until well combined and thick and creamy.
  4. Transfer the mascarpone to separate large mixing bowl and clean out the stand mixer bowl. Reattach the whisk attachment (or use a clean mixing bowl and electric whisk). Add the egg whites to the mixer and whisk until stiff white peaks form.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Next add the whisked egg whites to the mascarpone mixture one third at a time. Use a spatular to gently fold the whites into the mixture in between each addition.
  6. Now its time to build the tiramisu. Have the creamy mascarpone mixture ready to use along with a large rectangular dish for the tiramisu. In a smaller bowl mix together the coffee and coffee liqueur. Briefly dip each lady finger into the coffee mix then place in the bottom of the rectangular dish. Repeat until the base is covered with a lager of ladyfingers.
  7. Next spoon about a third of the mascarpone mixture over the sponge fingers and smooth out to cover all the sponge using the back of a spoon. Add a second and then third layer of coffee dipped sponge fingers and mascarpone mixture. TIP: The layers in order from the bottom should be: ladyfingers, mascarpone, ladyfingers, mascarpone, lady fingers, mascarpone. If you prefer you can use a shallower dish and just do two layers.
  8. Finish the tiramisu by dusting over cocoa powder and scattering over crumbled or grated chocolate.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Finally, wrap the tiramisu dish in cling film and place into the fridge to chill overnight. Tiramisu is best eaten the next day when the whole thing has chilled completely, the mascarpone cream has set and the sponge has softened.

💭 Expert tips

  • This is a no bake dessert with raw eggs so make sure you use fresh, lion stamped (or pasteurised) eggs.
  • Make absolutely sure no yolk goes into the egg whites, as this will stop the whites from whipping up into stiff peaks.
  • Fold the mascarpone into the yolks using the paddle attachment on the stand mixer or using a spatula. Whisking may cause the mascarpone to curdle.
  • Use hard, crisp sponge fingers (not soft sponge).
  • Don't soak the ladyfingers for too long in the coffee. They literally just need a quick dunk in and out. If the sponge is too soggy the excess liquid will leak into the rest of the dessert.
  • Once made, chill over night and eat the next day. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day when it has set and the sponge has softened.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does tiramisu have raw eggs?

Traditional Italian tiramisu uses raw eggs as does this recipe. For safety it is advised that young children, pregnant women and those who are clinically vulnerable should avoid foods containing raw eggs, including tiramisu. In general, I recommend using fresh eggs that have a lion stamp (UK). If you are not UK based then you should try to use fresh, pasteurised eggs.

Can you substitute raw eggs in tiramisu?

If you would prefer to not use raw eggs you can replace the egg whites with whipping cream (500 ml / 2 cups) and lightly cook the yolk and sugar. To cook the yolks, place the yolks and sugar in a glass mixing bowl and balance this on the top of a pan with a small amount of simmering water in the bottom (double boiler). Whisk the yolks and sugar over the pan allowing the steam to gently cook the yolk. Do not let the water touch the bottom of the bowl.

Why is my tiramisu watery?

Watery tiramisu occurs when the sponge ladyfingers have been soaked in the coffee for too long. The excess coffee drains into the rest of the dessert during chilling and makes the whole thing watery. Remember to dunk the sponge fingers briefly in the coffee; in and out.

How to store?

Once made wrap the tiramisu dish tightly in cling film and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day after it has chilled overnight.

Can you freeze tiramisu?

Dairy does not freeze or defrost well so I don't recommend that you freeze this dessert.

A large rectangular dish of traditional tiramisu topped with cocoa powder and flake chocolate with a small bowl of chocolate in the foreground

🍨 Other dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A small, square piece of tiramisu on a plate with the side view showing layers of sponge fingers and creamy mascarpone. The top is dusted with cocoa powder and a large dish of tiramisu is in the background.
Print

Traditional Tiramisu Recipe

Tiramisu is a light and airy, no bake, Italian dessert made with layers of creamy mascarpone and coffee dipped ladyfingers. This traditional tiramisu recipe is made in the authentic Italian way with whipped, raw eggs and mascarpone cheese.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, party food, pudding, sweet, treat
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Chill in the fridge 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 People
Calories 627kcal

Equipment

  • Small bowls to separate eggs
  • Stand mixer or electric handheld whisk
  • Large mixing bowl
  • 23x18cm (9x7inch) rectangular serving dish (7cm/3inch depth)
  • Small bowl for coffee mixture
  • Sieve or duster for the cocoa powder
  • Cling film (plastic wrap)

Ingredients

  • 4 large fresh eggs with lion stamp or pasteurised
  • 150 g caster sugar
  • 500 g mascarpone cheese
  • 300 ml strong coffee
  • 100 ml Tia Maria or preferred coffee liqueur
  • 2 packs Ladyfingers (400g) (to keep it traditional use Savoiardi)
  • 1 teaspoon Cocoa powder
  • 25 g Cadbury flake or milk chocolate broke up or grated

Instructions

  • Start by separating the eggs, placing yolks in one bowl and whites in another. Make sure no yolk is mixed in with the whites.
  • Next set up a stand mixer with whisk attachment or use an electric hand whisk. Place the egg yolks and caster sugar into the mixer and whisk together on high for 5 minutes until the yolks are pale and creamy.
  • Change the attachment on the mixer to the paddle (or use a spatula). Add the mascarpone to the creamed yolks and mix together until well combined and thick and creamy.
  • Transfer the mascarpone to separate large mixing bowl and clean out the stand mixer bowl. Reattach the whisk attachment (or use a clean mixing bowl and electric whisk). Add the egg whites to the mixer and whisk until stiff white peaks form.
  • Next add the whisked egg whites to the mascarpone mixture one third at a time. Use a spatular to gently fold the whites into the mixture in between each addition.
  • Now its time to build the tiramisu. Have the creamy mascarpone mixture ready to use along with a large rectangular dish for the tiramisu. In a smaller bowl mix together the coffee and coffee liqueur. Briefly dip each lady finger into the coffee mix then place in the bottom of the rectangular dish. Repeat until the base is covered with a layer of ladyfingers.
  • Next spoon about a third of the mascarpone mixture over the sponge fingers and smooth out to cover all the sponge using the back of a spoon. Add a second and then third layer of coffee dipped sponge fingers and mascarpone mixture. TIP: The layers in order from the bottom should be: ladyfingers, mascarpone, ladyfingers, mascarpone, lady fingers, mascarpone. If you prefer you can use a shallower dish and just do two layers.
  • Finish the tiramisu by dusting over cocoa powder and scattering over crumbled or grated chocolate.
  • Finally, wrap the tiramisu dish in cling film and place into the fridge to chill overnight. Tiramisu is best eaten the next day when the whole thing has chilled completely, the mascarpone cream has set and the sponge has softened.

Video

Notes

Does tiramisu have raw eggs? Traditional Italian tiramisu uses raw eggs as does this recipe. For safety it is advised that young children, pregnant women and those who are clinically vulnerable should avoid foods containing raw eggs, including tiramisu. In general, I recommend using fresh eggs that have a lion stamp (UK). If you are not UK based then you should try to use fresh, pasteurised eggs.
Can you substitute raw eggs in tiramisu? If you would prefer to not use raw eggs you can replace the egg whites with whipping cream (500 ml / 2 cups) and lightly cook the yolk and sugar. To cook the yolks, place the yolks and sugar in a glass mixing bowl and balance this on the top of a pan with a small amount of simmering water in the bottom (double boiler). Whisk the yolks and sugar over the pan allowing the steam to gently cook the yolk. Do not let the water touch the bottom of the bowl.
Why is my tiramisu watery? Watery tiramisu occurs when the sponge ladyfingers have been soaked in the coffee for too long. The excess coffee drains into the rest of the dessert during chilling and makes the whole thing watery. Remember to dunk the sponge fingers briefly in the coffee; in and out.
How to store? Once made wrap the tiramisu dish tightly in cling film and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day after it has chilled overnight.
Can you freeze tiramisu? Dairy does not freeze or defrost well so I don't recommend that you freeze this dessert.
Expert tips:
  • Make absolutely sure no yolk goes into the egg whites, as this will stop the whites from whipping up into stiff peaks.
  • Fold the mascarpone into the yolks using the paddle attachment on the stand mixer or using a spatula. Whisking may cause the mascarpone to curdle.
  • Use hard, crisp sponge fingers (not soft sponge).
  • Don't soak the ladyfingers for too long in the coffee. They literally just need a quick dunk in and out. If the sponge is too soggy the excess liquid will leak into the rest of the dessert.
  • Once made, chill over night and eat the next day. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day when it has set and the sponge has softened.

Nutrition

Serving: 1eighth | Calories: 627kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 255mg | Sodium: 142mg | Potassium: 117mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 1272IU | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in September 2017. Updated in March 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

If you would like to access the original recipe you can do so here: Original Tiramisu recipe 2017

The post Traditional Tiramisu Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/tiramisu/feed/ 17
Italian Pasta Salad https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/#respond Fri, 24 Sep 2021 14:19:24 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10857 A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and...

Read More

The post Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and enjoy topped with fresh basil and a homemade Italian dressing.

Large bowl filled with cooked fusilli pasta, colourful tomatoes, cucumber, mozzarella pearls and topped with basil leaves and grated pecorino.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Italian Pasta salad is one of those recipes that literally has everything going for it. Its easy to make, easy to store, great for meal prep and really useful for using up any leftovers.

The best thing about pasta salad is the variety of ingredients that can be used; from different types of pasta to numerous different fruits, vegetable and cheeses. Also, as its a cold dish, its easy to store in the fridge keeping everything lovely and fresh and crisp.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a large bowl of Italian pasta salad at home you will need:

Italian pasta salad ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pasta: This recipe uses wholegrain fusilli, but any type of small pasta will work well.

Tomatoes: Use fresh, vine ripened tomatoes. For an extra vibrant salad look for different colours of tomatoes (heritage/heirloom).

Mozzarella: A soft Italian cheese is essential for making this Italian pasta salad. Use small pearls of mozzarella or alternatively tear up a larger ball. Burrata is also a great option. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.

Pecorino cheese: This is optional and can also be substituted with parmesan. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.

Fresh basil and parsley: Fresh herbs are just the best taste in salads and I highly recommend using fresh basil at the very least. Especially in this Italian salad as it pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and mozzarella

Cannellini Beans: Beans are an optional extra and are used here to bulk out the salad and boost the protein content without adding meat.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Cook the pasta in boiling water for 10 minutes until al dente (or according to packet instructions). Place the cooked pasta and pasta salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and toss together well.
  2. In a small bowl mix together 2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon honey, 1 teaspoon wholegrain mustard, juice of half a lemon and 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning.
  3. Pour the dressing over the pasta salad and mix in.
  4. Top with freshly grated pecorino and basil leaves.Step by step images of how to make Italian pasta salad.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra colour use green, red and yellow tomatoes. Heritage or heirloom tomatoes are usually the best option.
  • Make sure the cooked pasta is fully cooled before adding to the salad. To do this, drain into a sieve then rinse in cold water until the pasta is cold to the touch. There are 2 reasons for doing this. Firstly, to stop the cooking process and ensure the pasta doesn't go soggy. Secondly, to make sure that the rest of the ingredients stay crisp and fresh.
  • If you are cooking pasta for a warm dish, then it is not necessary to rinse the pasta. Instead add straight to the sauce like in this salmon pasta recipe or this salmon and prawn linguine.
  • To boost the protein content of this salad, without adding meat, add in a tin of drained cannellini beans.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Pasta salad will last 3 to 4 days if covered with a sealable lid or cling film and kept in the fridge. This recipe a great option for meal prep and will easily provide meals for 3 or 4 days.

How to you stop cooked pasta from sticking together?

To ensure the pasta doesn't stick together make sure the cooking water is boiling and stir the pasta well as soon as its placed into the water. After cooking rinse under cold water. If you aren't using the pasta right away it may eventually start to stick together. All you need to do is rinse the pasta under cold water again and toss until the pieces separate.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Yes pasta salad can be made up to 3 days in advance then covered and stored in the fridge until ready to serve.

Large bowl filled with Italian Pasta Salad with a serving spoon and small bowl of grated pecorino cheese in the background.

🥗 Other delicious salad recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Large bowl filled with cooked fusilli pasta, colourful tomatoes, cucumber, mozzarella pearls and topped with basil leaves and grated pecorino.
Print

Italian Pasta Salad

A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and enjoy topped with fresh basil and a homemade Italian dressing.
Course Dinner, lunch, party food
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 450kcal

Equipment

  • Large pan to cook pasta
  • Large mixing bowl for the pasta salad
  • Small bowl to make the dressing

Ingredients

For the Pasta Salad

  • 250 g Wholewheat fusilli pasta dried uncooked
  • 500 g heritage and/or baby tomatoes roughly chopped
  • 100 g cucumber chopped into small cubes
  • 80 g Red bell pepper chopped into small cubes
  • 60 g Black olives halved
  • 100 g Mozzarella pearls or large ball torn up
  • Handful of basil leaves roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh parsley finely chopped
  • Half tin of cannellini beans optional

For the Italian Dressing

  • 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or any alternative cider vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard
  • ½ a lemon
 juiced
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning

Toppings

  • 25 g Freshly grated pecorino cheese or alternative hard cheese
  • Extra basil leaves

Instructions

  • Cook the pasta in boiling water for 10 minutes until al dente (or according to packet instructions). Place the cooked pasta and pasta salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and toss together well.
    250 g Wholewheat fusilli pasta dried, 500 g heritage and/or baby tomatoes roughly chopped, 100 g cucumber chopped into small cubes, 80 g Red bell pepper chopped into small cubes, 60 g Black olives halved, 100 g Mozzarella pearls or large ball torn up, Handful of basil leaves roughly torn, Handful of fresh parsley finely chopped, Half tin of cannellini beans
  • In a small bowl mix together olive oil, apple cider vinegar, honey, wholegrain mustard, lemon juice and Italian seasoning.
    2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Honey, 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard, ½ a lemon
 juiced, 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • Pour the dressing over the pasta salad and mix in.
  • Top with freshly grated pecorino and basil leaves.
    25 g Freshly grated pecorino cheese, Extra basil leaves

Video

Notes

How to store? Pasta salad will last 3 to 4 days if covered with a sealable lid or cling film and kept in the fridge. This recipe a great option for meal prep and will easily provide meals for 3 or 4 days.
How to you stop cooked pasta from sticking together? To ensure the pasta doesn't stick together make sure the cooking water is boiling and stir the pasta well as soon as its placed into the water. After cooking rinse under cold water. If you aren't using the pasta right away it may eventually start to stick together. All you need to do is rinse the pasta under cold water again and toss until the pieces separate.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Yes pasta salad can be made up to 3 days in advance then covered and stored in the fridge until ready to serve.
Pasta: This recipe uses wholegrain fusilli, but any type of small pasta will work well.
Tomatoes: Use fresh, vine ripened tomatoes.
Mozzarella: A soft Italian cheese is essential for making this Italian pasta salad. Use small pearls of mozzarella or alternatively tear up a larger ball. Burrata is also a great option. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.
Pecorino cheese: This is optional and can also be substituted with parmesan. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.
Fresh basil and parsley: Fresh herbs are just the best taste in salads and I highly recommend using fresh basil at the very least. Especially in this Italian salad as it pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and mozzarella.
Cannellini Beans: Beans are an optional extra and are used here to bulk out the salad and boost the protein content without adding meat.
Tips:
  • For extra colour use green, red, orange and yellow tomatoes. Heritage or heirloom tomatoes are usually the best option.
  • Make sure the cooked pasta is fully cooled before adding to the salad. To do this, drain into a sieve then rinse in cold water until the pasta is cold to the touch. There are 2 reasons for doing this. Firstly, to stop the cooking process and ensure the pasta doesn't go soggy. Secondly, to make sure that the rest of the ingredients stay crisp and fresh.
  • If you are cooking pasta for a warm dish, then it is not necessary to rinse the pasta. Instead add straight to the sauce like in this salmon pasta recipe or this salmon and prawn linguine.

Nutrition

Serving: 296g | Calories: 450kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 417mg | Potassium: 553mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2061IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 250mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Aug 2019. Updated in Sept 2021 with an improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/feed/ 0
Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/ https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/#respond Thu, 27 Oct 2016 14:07:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=18017 Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe With autumn comes the changing of the weather and leaves and...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes.

celery apple and walnut pesto in a bowl.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

With autumn comes the changing of the weather and leaves and the need for more comforting and warming dishes comes about. So its out with the basil and in with the celery leaf, out with the pine nuts and in with the walnut to create this delicious autumnal pesto. Celery and walnut pesto is less aromatic than a basil pesto recipe, with more of an earthy flavour. Its perfectly balanced to go with autumnal dishes such as roasted root veggies, baked sweet potatoes, warming and creamy lasagnas and even plump, little ravioli parcels.....there's plenty of ideas to go at.

The celery leaf is also great to use up in soup recipes: celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup post 

Celery, apple and walnut pesto drizzled over circles of baked sweet potato.

The autumnal vibe of this recipe was inspired by our latest trip to Italy. Did we eat a lot whilst we were there?.... Yes, of course, we ate a tonne. Did we care that we were meant to be there to plan our wedding and not eat all of Italy's pasta in one sitting? No, not one bit.

italy in autumn
Autumn sunrise, Peschiera del Garda

🥘 Ingredients

To make this walnut pesto recipe you will need:

  • Celery leaves roughly chopped
  • Walnut oil
  • Garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • Walnuts
  • Green apples cored and diced
  • Mint leaves
  • Edamame beans
  • Parmesan grated
  • Salt
  • Cider vinegar

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Celery leaves: can be replaced with celery stems but make sure to peel the outer edge to remove any stringy bits first.

Edamame beans: are optional but will add extra protein and give the pesto a more robust texture.

Walnuts: are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be pecans.

Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the celery leaves, garlic cloves, walnuts, chopped apples, mint leaves, beans, salt and cider vinegar into a blender or food processor. Add half of the water and half of the walnut oil.
  2. Pulse into a paste adding more water or oil if needed.
  3. Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
  4. Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Our wedding

But yes......our wedding!! Thats right - this massive thing that seems to be gobbling up my time at the moment, but something that I've failed to talk about on here. So next year, Ben and I will be married in the beautiful surroundings of the Italian countryside, following on from our engagement last year whilst we were in Pienza!

italy-in-autumn
Our wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Negrar.

Of course the plans so far for the wedding are lots of pasta, risotto, wine and a good bunch of laughter and happy times. Excited doesn't even begin to describe where I am at with this right now. There's still lots of planning to be sorted, and I'm sure a great deal of stress to cope with but I can't wait to get back to Italy next year and become Mrs Jones :-O

italy-in-autumn2
Our wedding hotel: Delsa, Verona

🍹Autumn holiday

But back to the trip we've just had: A holiday abroad in autumn is just simply magical. All the trees are changing and brandishing fiery reds or warming oranges, the mornings have a slight chill which brings a mysterious mist and subtle sunrises. The birds are also aware of the changes and migrate above the skies or dance in pretty patterns through the trees.

Grapevines are usually harvested for their annual fruits at this time of year, but some vineyards have vines that flower a little later so are still flush with huge bunches of juicy grapes. A glorious site and I really do hope that next year we can get wedding pictures amongst grapevines with cascading bunches of grapes 🙂

italy in autumn
Italian grapevines in Autumn at Peschiera del Garda
italy-in-autumn
Salo, Lake Garda, Italy in autumn
italy-in-autumn3
Peschiera del Garda, Italy in Autumn

The autumnal produce of Italy from peaches and beetroot to truffles and cabbage, meant that we had some stunning plates of food. Of course there was the usual mountain of cheese and cold cuts, but there was also plenty of inspiration for me with dishes like: sea bream baked with paprika and radicchio; suckling pig with apples, raisins and cabbage; shredded beetroot chutney; fresh pappardelle pasta with a creamy mushroom sauce and fresh truffle; the glorious and ubiquitous apricot breakfast tart; sea bream and lime tortelloni with burrata cheese; and of course walnut pesto. I just had to have a go at making my own version of this incredible pesto! 

💭 Expert tips

  • Only add half of the liquid ingredients (oil and water) to begin with. Blend and then check the consistency before adding more water or oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan separately then stir in to the blended pesto. This improves the texture and gives more control over the taste and amount of parmesan

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.

What to serve with walnut pesto?

This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery apple and walnut pesto in a bowl.
Print

Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto

Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes.
Course Appetizer, condiment, dip, party food, side, Snack
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 10 portions
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • 100 g Celery leaves roughly chopped
  • 150 ml Walnut oil
  • 100 ml water
  • 2 Garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • 50 g Walnuts
  • 85 g Green apples cored and diced
  • 10 g Mint leaves
  • 50 g Edamame beans
  • 75 g Parmesan grated
  • Pinch of Salt
  • Teaspoon Cider vinegar

Instructions

  • Place the celery leaves, garlic cloves, walnuts, chopped apples, mint leaves, beans, salt and cider vinegar into a blender or food processor. Add half of the water and half of the walnut oil.
    100 g Celery leaves, 150 ml Walnut oil, 100 ml water, 2 Garlic cloves, 50 g Walnuts, 85 g Green apples, 10 g Mint leaves, 50 g Edamame beans, Pinch of Salt, Teaspoon Cider vinegar
  • Pulse into a paste adding more water or oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
    75 g Parmesan
  • Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Notes

How to store? Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.
What to serve with walnut pesto? This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.
Celery leaves: can be replaced with celery stems but make sure to peel the outer edge to remove any stringy bits first.
Edamame beans: are optional but will add extra protein and give the pesto a more robust texture.
Walnuts: are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be pecans.
Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 10portions | Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 12g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 143mg | Potassium: 97mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 158IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 100mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/feed/ 0
Raspberry and Lemon Muffins https://properfoodie.com/raspberry-and-lemon-muffins/ https://properfoodie.com/raspberry-and-lemon-muffins/#comments Tue, 27 Jul 2021 20:43:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3859 Raspberry and lemon muffins made in the traditional way for a perfectly light, crumbly and moist finish. Find out how to make the perfect muffin mix without splitting the mixture and get these delicious raspberry muffins made and baked in just 1 hour! Plus get the recipe for a zesty, lemon buttercream topping. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why...

Read More

The post Raspberry and Lemon Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Raspberry and lemon muffins made in the traditional way for a perfectly light, crumbly and moist finish.

Find out how to make the perfect muffin mix without splitting the mixture and get these delicious raspberry muffins made and baked in just 1 hour!

Plus get the recipe for a zesty, lemon buttercream topping.

Raspberry muffin topped with lemon butter cream sitting on a muffin case with the sides pulled away and surrounded a few other muffins.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These citrusy raspberry and lemon muffins are the perfect sweet treat for after dinner or for afternoon tea. Make up a batch over the weekend then store in a air tight container so you can enjoy over the next 3 or 4 days.

This really easy recipe can be whipped up in a stand mixer or with an electric whisk. Either way you'll have these delicious muffins baking in the oven within half an hour.

🥘 Ingredients

To make raspberry and lemon muffins with lemon buttercream you will need:

Ingredients for making raspberry muffins.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the muffins sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the raspberry muffins. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

Icing sugar and unsalted butter: These are required to make the butter cream. A squeeze of lemon juice is added to make lemon flavoured buttercream. However, the buttercream is completely optional and these muffins are just as good served on their own.

Raspberries: The fresh raspberries could be swapped for your preferred soft fruit/berry. Why not try with blueberries for delicious blueberry and lemon muffins.

Lemons: Optional, leave out if you would prefer to just make raspberry muffins without lemon. The zest of the lemons is added to the muffin mixture and is also sprinkled on the top once baked. For no lemon-raspberry muffins, just omit these steps from the recipe.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Preheat the oven to 150 degrees C, Fan. Cube 150g of soft butter and add to the stand mixer bowl (or a mixing bowl if using an electric whisk). Next add the caster sugar and use the beater blade attachment, or electric whisk, to cream together the sugar and butter. Mix for a few minutes on the highest setting until the mixture is light and creamy.
  2. Next whisk the three eggs together and whilst the mixer is still on high gradually add the eggs into the mix. Add a spoonful of flour from time to time if it looks like the mixture might split.
  3. Once all the egg is incorporated, removed the bowl from the stand mixer and add the sifted, self raising flour and lemon zest. Use a spatula to fold in gently.
  4. Place muffin cases in the muffin tray and spoon the mixture into each case. Leave plenty of space for the muffins to rise by filling each case halfway.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Next wash and halve the raspberries and carefully push 4 or 5 raspberry halves into the mixture of each muffin.
  6. Place the muffins into the centre of the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until the tops have turned golden brown all over. Remove from the oven and set on a wire rack to cool.
  7. Whilst the muffins are cooling, prepared the buttercream. Clean out your mixer bowl and set back on the stand (alternatively use a bowl and electric whisk). Cube 200g of soft butter and add to the mixer or bowl along with the icing sugar.
  8. Use the beater attachment again (or electric whisk) and start the mixer on a low setting. This gives the icing sugar chance to mix in without covering you in icing dust. Once the icing and butter have started to combine, turn the mixer to high and leave for a few minutes until light and creamy. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and mix again for 2 more minutes. Taste and add more lemon juice if desired.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Transfer the buttercream to a piping bag with star nozzle. Check the muffins are fully cooled then swirl on the buttercream. Serve with any leftover raspberries and with extra lemon zest sprinkled on top.

💭 Expert tips

  • For both the muffins and the buttercream bring your butter to room temperature and make sure it is nice and soft before you begin.
  • Adding the eggs can cause the muffin mixture to split. Make sure to add the eggs as slowly as you can particularly towards the end. If the mix looks like its split, add a spoonful of the flour to help bring it back together.
  • Mixing the flour too quickly into the muffin mix will remove the air and reduce the rise during baking. So use a spatula, fold the flour in gently and take your time.
  • Adding the raspberries to the mixture once its spooned into the cases helps to keep them intact and keeps them juicy and full of flavour. Mixing them in would cause the raspberries to break and the juice to run into the cake mix, so diluting their taste.
  • Check your muffins are fully cooled before adding the buttercream. If they are still warm the buttercream will melt and run.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to tell if the muffins are baked though?

The muffins will be done if they are gold brown on top and appear firm but springy on top. Or an inserted toothpick will come out clean.

How to store?

Once completely cooled the raspberry muffins (with or without buttercream) can be stored in an air tight container for 3-4 days.

What to serve with muffins?

If you aren't a fan of buttercream why not try these raspberry muffins with cream, ice cream, mascarpone, yogurt, honey or chocolate sauce.

What other ingredients could I add to these muffins?

To really boost the flavour of these muffins try adding to or substituting the raspberries or lemon zest with different ingredients. For example: chocolate chips, chocolate spread, poppy seeds, cinnamon, ground nutmeg, chopped nuts or other fruits such as banana, chopped mango, blueberries, dried apricot or glazed cherries.

Raspberry and lemon muffins on a wire rack viewed from above with bits of raspberry visible on the top of each muffin.

🍰 Other muffin recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Raspberry muffin topped with lemon butter cream sitting on a muffin case with the sides pulled away and surrounded a few other muffins.
Print

Raspberry and Lemon Muffins

Light and moist raspberry and lemon muffins. Made in the traditional way with fresh raspberries, lemon zest and lemon buttercream.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, party food, pudding, Snack, sweet, treat
Cuisine British
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 muffins
Calories 457kcal

Equipment

  • Muffin cases and muffin tray
  • Stand mixer or electric hand-held whisk
  • Piping bag and star-shaped metal nozzle for swirling on the buttercream

Ingredients

For the raspberry muffins

  • 150 g soft unsalted butter
  • 150 g light brown caster sugar
  • 3 medium eggs
  • 150 g sifted self raising flour
  • 2 lemons zested
  • 200 g fresh raspberries
  • Extra lemon zest for topping

For the lemon buttercream

  • 200 g soft unsalted butter
  • 400 g white icing sugar
  • Squeeze of lemon juice

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 150 degrees C, Fan. Cube 150g of soft butter and add to the stand mixer bowl (or a mixing bowl if using an electric whisk). Next add the caster sugar and use the beater blade attachment, or electric whisk, to cream together the sugar and butter. Mix for a few minutes on the highest setting until the mixture is light and creamy.
  • Next whisk the three eggs together and whilst the mixer is still on high gradually add the eggs into the mix. Add a spoonful of flour from time to time if it looks like the mixture might split.
  • Once all the egg is incorporated, removed the bowl from the stand mixer and add the sifted, self raising flour and lemon zest. Use a spatula to fold in gently.
  • Place muffin cases in the muffin tray and spoon the mixture into each case. Leave plenty of space for the muffins to rise by filling each case halfway.
  • Next wash and halve the raspberries and carefully push 4 or 5 raspberry halves into the mixture of each muffin.
  • Place the muffins into the centre of the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until the tops have turned golden brown all over. Remove from the oven and set on a wire rack to cool.
  • Whilst the muffins are cooling, prepared the buttercream. Clean out your mixer bowl and set back on the stand (alternatively use a bowl and electric whisk). Cube 200g of soft butter and add to the mixer or bowl along with the icing sugar.
  • Use the beater attachment again (or electric whisk) and start the mixer on a low setting. This gives the icing sugar chance to mix in without covering you in icing dust. Once the icing and butter have started to combine, turn the mixer to high and leave for a few minutes until light and creamy. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and mix again for 2 more minutes. Taste and add more lemon juice if desired.
  • Transfer the buttercream to a piping bag with star nozzle. Check the muffins are fully cooled then swirl on the buttercream. Serve with any leftover raspberries and with extra lemon zest sprinkled on top.

Notes

How to tell if the muffins are baked though? The muffins will be done if they are gold brown on top and appear firm but springy on top. Or an inserted toothpick will come out clean. How to store? Once completely cooled the raspberry muffins (with or without buttercream) can be stored in an air tight container for 3-4 days.
What to serve with muffins? If you aren't a fan of buttercream why not try these raspberry muffins with cream, ice cream, mascarpone, yogurt, honey or chocolate sauce.
What other ingredients could I add to these muffins? To really boost the flavour of these muffins try adding to or substituting the raspberries or lemon zest with different ingredients. For example: chocolate chips, chocolate spread, poppy seeds, cinnamon, ground nutmeg, chopped nuts or other fruits such as banana, chopped mango, blueberries, dried apricot or glazed cherries.
Top tips:
  • For both the muffins and the buttercream bring your butter to room temperature and make sure it is nice and soft before you begin.
  • Adding the eggs can cause the muffin mixture to split. Make sure to add the eggs as slowly as you can particularly towards the end. If the mix looks like its split, add a spoonful of the flour to help bring it back together.
  • Mixing the flour too quickly into the muffin mix will remove the air and reduce the rise during baking. So use a spatula, fold the flour in gently and take your time.
  • Adding the raspberries to the mixture once its spooned into the cases helps to keep them intact and keeps them juicy and full of flavour. Mixing them in would cause the raspberries to break and the juice to run into the cake mix, so diluting their taste.
  • Check your muffins are fully cooled before adding the buttercream. If they are still warm the buttercream will melt and run. 



Nutrition

Serving: 82g | Calories: 457kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 794IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Mar 2017. Updated in July 2021 with an improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Raspberry and Lemon Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/raspberry-and-lemon-muffins/feed/ 7
Roasted Cauliflower Salad https://properfoodie.com/roasted-cauliflower-salad-lemon-herb-dressing/ https://properfoodie.com/roasted-cauliflower-salad-lemon-herb-dressing/#comments Mon, 19 Jul 2021 21:21:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8196 Roasted cauliflower salad with a lemon herb dressing. Nutty quinoa mixed with roasted cauliflower and chickpeas. Great for batch cooking and making in advance. This cauliflower salad is packed full of nutrients and tasty ingredients, with everything you need to fill you up and keep you feeling satisfied for the rest of the day. 👩🏻‍🍳...

Read More

The post Roasted Cauliflower Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Roasted cauliflower salad with a lemon herb dressing. Nutty quinoa mixed with roasted cauliflower and chickpeas. Great for batch cooking and making in advance. This cauliflower salad is packed full of nutrients and tasty ingredients, with everything you need to fill you up and keep you feeling satisfied for the rest of the day.

Quinoa and roasted cauliflower salad with lemon & herb dressing, served in a small bowl sat on a blue napkin.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This roasted cauliflower salad is all about making a few healthy ingredients taste good together. The charred cauliflower and lemon infused quinoa mix together to create the base for a nutritious and full flavoured salad. Its easy to prepare and once made it can be stored in the fridge and used over several days.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this cauliflower salad recipe you will need:

Ingredients for making roasted cauliflower salad.

Ingredient notes

See recipe card at the bottom for full recipe and ingredients quantities.

Quinoa: Can be with your preferred grain. For a similar favour and nutrient content replace with brown rice. Or try with white rice, wild rice, couscous, barley buckwheat or bulgur wheat.

Chickpeas: Optional. Can be substituted for another pulse or bean.

Apple: Apple adds a sweet flavour to this citruses salad, which pairs perfectly with the crunchy hazelnuts and earthy quinoa. Can be substituted for your preferred fruit, try with dried cranberries, chopped mango or halved grapes.

Parsley: Optional but helps to brighten up the flavour and appearance of the salad

Hazelnuts: optional, leave out if your prefer or replace with another type of nut such as cashews, walnuts, almonds or peanuts.

Lemon, oil, dijon and creme fraishe: all of these are needed to make the salad dressing. If you prefer, swap for a salad dressing of your choosing.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat oven to 200 degrees C. Chop the florets off the main stem of the cauliflower then chop into smaller bitesized pieces.
  2. Place chopped cauliflower florets in a bowl along with the drained chickpeas, oil, salt and pepper and lemon juice.
  3. Toss together well with your hands then transfer to a baking tray and bake in the preheated  oven for 30 minutes, shuffling the mixture half way through.
  4. Whilst the cauliflower is cooking place the quinoa in small saucepan with a wedge of lemon and covered with double the amount water. Simmer on medium heat for 15 minutes.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. With the cauliflower in the oven and the quinoa cooking in the pan, the dressing can be prepared. In a small bowl or container mix together the oil, mustard, creme fraiche, parsley, salt and lemon juice. Chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  6. After the quinoa has been simmering for 15 minutes, take off the heat but do not remove the lid. Set to one side and leave with the lid on for 10 minutes.
  7. When the cauliflower is cooked remove from the oven and transfer to a large bowl. Remove the lid from the quinoa and discard the wedge of lemon. Fluff up the quinoa with a fork and then add to the bowl alongside the cauliflower. Next add the chopped apple, hazelnuts, fresh parsley and half of the dressing.
  8. Mix together well then serve with the remaining dressing.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

  • Cut cauliflower up on the tray that you intend to roast it on so that the bits of cauliflower are caught on the tray (makes it quicker and easier when cleaning up).
  • Roughly chop the cauliflower into bit size chunks. Try not to chop into tiny pieces as these can become mushy upon cooking.
  • Chop the apple up just before mixing into the salad to keep it fresh and prevent any browning.
  • The dressing for this recipe takes seconds to put together and really does transform the salad. The more you make - the better!! Place all the dressing ingredients into a small dish and mix together with a spoon...... Super easy and very tasty. I like to mix half of the dressing directly into the salad and leave the other half to drizzle on top.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you eat raw cauliflower?

Yes you can eat cauliflower raw if you prefer. However, its not always advised as our digestives systems aren't able to breakdown the sugars as well as when its cooked. - You can read more about eating raw vegetables here.

Why should I roast the cauliflower?

This recipe makes the most of the roasted flavour of cauliflower. Boiling cauliflower will cook it, but it won't have the same flavour as roasted cauliflower. Roasting cauliflower not only locks in flavour but also lock in its nutrients.

How to store?

This roasted cauliflower salad is excellent for a bit of meal prep. Once made, place in one large bowl and cover or divide up into sealable containers. Keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. Great for making up on a Sunday and having ready for weekday lunches or as a side for your evening meals.

Roasted Cauliflower salad with quinoa and lemon and herb dressing served in a small bowl with part of the larger mixing bowl visible

🍲 Other salad recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Quinoa and roasted cauliflower salad with lemon & herb dressing, served in a small bowl sat on a blue napkin.
Print

Roasted Cauliflower Salad

Roasted cauliflower salad with a lemon herb dressing. Nutty quinoa mixed with roasted cauliflower and chickpeas. Great for batch cooking and making in advance. This salad is packed full of nutrients and tasty ingredients, with everything you need to fill you up and keep you feeling satisfied for the rest of the day.
Course lunch, Main Course, Salad
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 286kcal

Ingredients

For the roasted Cauliflower:

  • 1 large cauliflower 700g
  • 1 Small tin of chickpeas 210g tin, 130g drained
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • Salt and pepper
  • ½ a lemon juiced

For the Quinoa:

  • 160 g dried Quinoa
  • ¼ of a lemon

For the Dressing:

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoon Creme Fraiche
  • 15 g Freshly chopped parsley
  • Pinch of salt
  • ½ a lemon juiced

For the salad:

  • 1 red apple chopped into cm cubes
  • 50 g chopped hazelnuts
  • 15 g freshly chopped parsley
  • Extra lemon wedges to serve

Instructions

  • Pre heat oven to 200 degrees C. Remove the outer green leaves from the cauliflower and use a large knife to chop the florets off the main stem and then chop into smaller bitesized pieces.
  • Place chopped cauliflower florets in a bowl along with the drained chickpeas, oil, salt and pepper and lemon juice.
  • Toss together well with your hands then transfer to a baking tray and bake in the preheated oven for 30 minutes, shuffling the mixture half way through.
  • Whilst the cauliflower is cooking place the quinoa in small saucepan with a wedge of lemon and covered with double the amount water. Place the pan on a medium heat and bring to the boil, then place on a lid and simmer for 15 minutes.
  • With the cauliflower in the oven and the quinoa cooking in the pan, the dressing can be prepared. In a small bowl or container mix together the oil, mustard, creme fraiche, parsley, salt and lemon juice. Chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • After the quinoa has been simmering for 15 minutes, take off the heat but do not remove the lid. Set to one side and leave with the lid on for 10 minutes.
  • When the cauliflower is cooked remove from the oven and transfer to a large bowl. Once the quinoa has been sitting for 10 minutes, remove the lid and discard the wedge of lemon. Fluff up the quinoa with a fork and then add to the bowl alongside the cauliflower. Next add the chopped apple, hazelnuts, fresh parsley and half of the dressing.
  • Mix together well then serve with the remaining dressing.

Video

Notes

Why should I roast the cauliflower? This recipe makes the most of the roasted flavour of cauliflower. Boiling cauliflower will cook it, but it won't have the same flavour as roasted cauliflower. Roasting cauliflower not only locks in flavour but also lock in its nutrients.
How to store? This salad is excellent for a bit of meal prep. Once made, place in one large bowl and cover or divide up into sealable containers. Keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. Great for making up on a Sunday and having ready for weekday lunches or as a side for your evening meals.
TIPS:
  • Cut cauliflower up on the tray that you intend to roast it on so that the bits of cauliflower are caught on the tray (makes it quicker and easier when cleaning up).
  • Roughly chop the cauliflower into bit size chunks. Try not to chop into tiny pieces as these can become mushy upon cooking.
  • Chop the apple up just before mixing into the salad to keep it fresh and prevent any browning.
  • The dressing for this recipe takes seconds to put together and really does transform the salad. The more you make - the better!! Place all the dressing ingredients into a small dish and mix together with a spoon...... Super easy and very tasty. I like to mix half of the dressing directly into the salad and leave the other half to drizzle on top.

Nutrition

Serving: 300g | Calories: 286kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 693mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 451IU | Vitamin C: 69mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Jan 2019. Updated in July 2021 with improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Roasted Cauliflower Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roasted-cauliflower-salad-lemon-herb-dressing/feed/ 3
Healthy Banana Bread https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/ https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/#respond Mon, 10 May 2021 15:06:52 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10739 Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost...

Read More

The post Healthy Banana Bread appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost in healthy fats.

Banana bread loaf on brown crumpled paper with 2 pieces sliced and falling down from the front of the loaf.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

With a simple method that requires only 10 minutes of prep time, this is a great dessert for when you have mouths to feed and time to save! Theres no need for any mixers and theres certainly no concerns over adding eggs too quickly or mixtures splitting. Just mix together the ingredients, pour into a lined loaf tin and bake. Super simple.

The ingredients in this recipe are also super healthy and include honey instead of refined sugar, oil instead of butter, and a mix of ground almonds and organic wholegrain spelt flour instead of plain white flour. This healthy banana bread also has an extra egg white and a teaspoon of organic apple Cider Vinegar. The end product: a wholesome, flavourful, nutritious and no mess banana bread treat.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy banana bread recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Banana Bread.

Ingredient notes

Bananas: Use bananas that are ripe and soft. Bananas that are underripe will be harder to mash up and less sweet

Ground cinnamon and nutmeg: spices work wonderfully well in banana bread and add a warming sweet and woody flavour. However, you can leave these out or replace with your preferred spices.

Apple cider vinegar: If you can't get hold of any replace with lemon juice.

Wholegrain spelt flour: Any type of wholegrain flour will work here. If you prefer you can replace with your preferred type of flour (gluten free, rye, almond). For a standard banana bread loaf opt for plain flour.

Ground almonds: If you don't have ground almonds or would prefer not use, then replace with the same amount of flour.

Toppings: Topping options could include nuts and seeds, dried banana chips, pieces of fresh banana or a whole banana sliced in half length ways and positioned on top with the inside facing upwards. Place all topping on the top of the cake mix before being baked.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by pre-heating the oven to 165 degrees C. Then lightly grease a loaf tin and line with strip of greaseproof paper (should be as wide as the length of the tin) (Paper just needs to cover the base and the 2 long inner sides). Peel the bananas and place in a large mixing bowl. Use a fork to mash the bananas to a rough pulp (no need for the banana to be pureed as a few lumpy pieces adds to the texture and flavour).
  2. Next add in all the other wet ingredients: 6tbsp honey, 2 eggs and one egg white, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice), and 3 tablespoon of olive oil. Whisk together until fully combined.
  3. Next add all the dry ingredients, apart from the flour, to the wet mixture: 50g ground almonds, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda. Use a rubber spatula or wooden spoon to gently stir together.
  4. Lastly add the wholegrain spelt flour (or other variety of wholegrain flour) to the bowl and fold in gently using the spatula.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Carefully pour the banana bread mixture into the lined loaf tin and sprinkle over the flaked almonds and chopped walnuts. Alternative fold the nuts into the mixture before transferring to the tin. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre-heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes until golden brown and a inserted skewer comes out clean.
  6. Remove from the oven and allow to stand for a minute or two before removing from the tin and placing on a cooling rack. When completely cool, remove the greaseproof paper, slice and serve.Collage of 2 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

  • For gluten free banana bread replace the wholegrain flour with gluten free flour and check the labels of all other ingredients for any traces of gluten.
  • Use the nuts as a topping or stir into the cake mixture before pouring into the tin. Or if you prefer leave out altogether.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can bananas be too ripe to use in this recipe?

If the banana skins are completely black they may well be off. In which case its probably not worth using them. I have used bananas that have skins ranging from pale yellow to brown spotty and find that these always work well. Bananas with brown spotty skins will be softer and so will mash up easier, but the taste isn't really affected.  Bananas with green skins are too underripe and will be very hard and less sweet. To speed up the ripening process, loosely wrap the bananas in a brown paper bag.

What nuts go well with banana bread?

My favourite nut to go with banana is the walnut. Banana and walnut is a classic combination of sweet vs bitter and smooth vs crunchy, which is often found in the banana loaf recipe. Peanut butter and banana is obviously another well know classic combination. This salty nut-butter can be used to spread onto a slice of the finished loaf. Other nuts you could try: chopped hazelnuts, pistachio nuts or pecan nuts.

What else can you add to banana bread?

To make this recipe your own, try adding different toppings or mix the toppings into the banana bread mixture. Or why not try mixing in nutella or other nut butters. If you're not a massive fan of nuts you could try blueberries, chopped dates, chocolate chips, dried banana, sultanas, black sesame seeds, sunflower seeds, orange peel or lime zest.

How to store?

Banana bread will keep well and stay moist for at least 3-4 days if stored correctly. Wrap the banana bread in two layers of cling film or foil. Then store in a sealed, container at room temperature.

Loaf of healthy banana bread being sliced in to.

🍨 Other fruity dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Print

Healthy Banana Bread

Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost in healthy fats.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, Dessert, party food, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 slices
Calories 238kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Rubber spatula or spoon
  • Loaf tin lined with greaseproof paper
  • Cooling rack

Ingredients

  • 2 Large ripe bananas or 3 small
  • 6 tablespoon Honey
  • 2 Large eggs
  • 1 Egg white
  • 1 teaspoon Vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon Apple cider vinegar or lemon juice
  • 3 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 50 g Ground almonds
  • 1 teaspoon Ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon Bicarbonate of soda
  • 175 g Wholegrain spelt flour or any other variety of wholegrain flour
  • 10 g Flaked almonds Topping - optional
  • 25 g Chopped walnuts Topping - optional

Instructions

  • Start by pre-heating the oven to 165 degrees C. Then lightly grease a loaf tin and line with strip of greaseproof paper (should be as wide as the length of the tin) (Paper just needs to cover the base and the 2 long inner sides). Peel the bananas and place in a large mixing bowl. Use a fork to mash the bananas to a rough pulp (no need for the banana to be pureed as a few lumpy pieces adds to the texture and flavour).
  • Next add in all the other wet ingredients: 6 tablespoon honey, 2 eggs and one egg white, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice), and 3 tablespoon of olive oil. Whisk together until fully combined.
  • Next add all the dry ingredients, apart from the flour, to the wet mixture: 50g ground almonds, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda. Use a rubber spatula or wooden spoon to gently stir together.
  • Lastly add the wholegrain spelt flour (or other variety of wholegrain flour) to the bowl and fold in gently using the spatula.
  • Carefully pour the banana bread mixture into the lined loaf tin and sprinkle over the flaked almonds and chopped walnuts. Alternative fold the nuts into the mixture before transferring to the tin. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre-heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes until golden brown and a inserted skewer comes out clean.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to stand for a minute or two before removing from the tin and placing on a cooling rack. When completely cool, remove the greaseproof paper, slice and serve.

Video

Notes

Bananas: Use bananas that are ripe and soft. Bananas that are underripe will be harder to mash up and less sweet
Ground cinnamon and nutmeg: spices work wonderfully well in banana bread and add a warming sweet and woody flavour. However, you can leave these out or replace with your preferred spices.
Apple cider vinegar: If you can't get hold of any replace with lemon juice.
Wholegrain spelt flour: Any type of wholegrain flour will work here. If you prefer you can replace with your preferred type of flour (gluten free, rye, almond). For a standard banana bread loaf opt for plain flour.
Ground almonds: If you don't have ground almonds or would prefer not use, then replace with the same amount of flour.
Gluten free banana bread: For gluten free banana bread replace the wholegrain flour with gluten free flour and check the labels of all other ingredients for any traces of gluten.
What other ingredients you can add to banana bread? To add a boost of flavour to your banana bread try topping with or mixing in walnuts, chopped hazelnuts, pistachio nuts or pecan nuts. Or why not try mixing in nutella or peanut butter. If you're not a massive fan of nuts you could try blueberries, chopped dates, chocolate chips, dried banana, fresh banana sliced in half, sultanas, black sesame seeds, sunflower seeds, orange peel or lime zest.
How to store? Banana bread will keep well and stay moist for at least 3-4 days if stored correctly. Wrap the banana bread in two layers of cling film or foil. Then store in a sealed, container at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 37mg | Sodium: 131mg | Potassium: 143mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 73IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 26mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in July 2019. Updated in May 2021 with improved step by step instructions and expert tips.

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to products I am recommending (apple cider vinegar and wholegrain spelt flour), which means if you click this link and then go on to purchase the product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

The post Healthy Banana Bread appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/feed/ 0
Thai Red Curry Paste https://properfoodie.com/thai-red-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-red-curry-paste/#comments Sat, 17 Apr 2021 08:24:38 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9485 Homemade Thai red curry paste, full flavoured and whipped up in just 10 minutes. Use this easy Thai paste recipe in the base of a lovely homemade Thai red curry or jar it up and keep it in the fridge or freezer until its needed. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Most curry recipes will...

Read More

The post Thai Red Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Homemade Thai red curry paste, full flavoured and whipped up in just 10 minutes. Use this easy Thai paste recipe in the base of a lovely homemade Thai red curry or jar it up and keep it in the fridge or freezer until its needed.

A small jar filled with homemade Thai red curry paste with a spoonful of paste in the foreground and a chopped up red chilli at the side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Most curry recipes will call for some kind of curry paste, whether thats homemade or out of a jar grabbed off the supermarket shelf. Theres nothing wrong with the latter if you're short on time and ingredients. However, you just can't beat fresh homemade curry paste. Not only does it taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.

This paste takes just 10 minutes to make and its the best base for making a tasty, Thai red curry. Its also the starting point for making Thai yellow paste, Massaman curry paste, Massaman curry, Panang curry and Jungle curry. So all the more reason to make plenty of this amazing Thai red curry paste.

This recipe is adapted from the Thai recipes I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this easy Thai red curry paste recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Thai red curry paste.

Ingredient notes

Red chillies: The chillies used here will ultimately determine how hot your curry is. So if you like it spicy then use hotter chillies. For Thai red Curry paste, red chillies are required. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger red chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with red bell pepper (capsicum).

Ginger: If you can get hold of galangal (Thai ginger) then definitely use that here. If not, ginger paste, jarred ginger or standard fresh ginger is just fine.

Ground Coriander: Coriander is a great flavour in Thai paste and so I don't recommend that you substitute or leave it out. This recipe uses just ground coriander but feel free to add a bit of fresh coriander as well for a bit of extra flavour and a burst of colour.

Garlic: Use garlic paste or 2 cloves of garlic, if preferred.

Lemongrass: You can substitute this for jarred lemongrass if preferred.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by preparing the ingredients: Roughly chop the shallots, red chillies (seeds removed), and lemongrass, and peel and slice the garlic and ginger (if using fresh).
  2. Set up a small blender or smoothie maker. Then add all of the ingredients plus 1 tablespoon of water.
  3. Start the blender and blend until a thick, smooth paste has formed. If the blender has trouble getting going add another tablespoon of water. Make sure to only add small amounts of water otherwise your paste will be too thin.
  4. Use the paste to make a Thai red Curry or transfer to a jar or sealable containers and refrigerate for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.

💭 Expert tips

  • Blending the paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai red paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going. Only add small amounts (1 tbsp) of water or oil each time. Too much and the paste will become thin and runny.
  • Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers. Each container has enough to make one curry for 2-4 people (3-4 tbsp). These can be stored in the fridge or freezer and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or two and can then be used right away.
  • Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of Thai red curry paste. To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients. Doubling the ingredients will produce 12 tablespoons.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is this curry paste hot?

Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. But in general the smaller the chilli (red or green) the hotter it becomes. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the type of chillies used and the amounts.

If you like it spicy add plenty of small red chillies. If not, add less and go for a bigger sized chilli pepper or for no head use bell peppers (capsicum). If a milder curry is much more your thing then try Panang curry, or Massaman curry, or even a Thai yellow curry.

What is the difference between Thai red and Thai green curry paste?

The main difference between Thai red and Thai green curry paste is the colour and the heat, both of which come from the type of chillies used. Substituting one paste for other will ultimately dictate the type of curry you end up making.

How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?

2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.

How to store?

Once made, Thai red curry paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

A small jar filled with home Thai red curry paste with teaspoon of paste being held above the jar.

🍛 Other curry paste recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Small jar of Thai red curry paste with a teaspoonful of paste in the foreground.
Print

Thai Red Curry Paste

Homemade Thai red curry paste, full flavoured and whipped up in just 10 minutes. Use this easy Thai paste recipe in the base of a lovely homemade Thai red curry or jar it up and keep it in the fridge or freezer until its nee
Course Main Course, meal prep, paste
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 tablespoon
Calories 39kcal

Ingredients

  • 100 g Shallots
  • 1 tablespoon garlic paste or 2 garlic cloves
  • 10 g jarred ginger pieces or 10g piece of fresh ginger
  • 2 large red chillies
  • 1 stalk lemongrass
  • 5 kaffir lime leaves
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon fish sauce
  • 1 or 2 tablespoon of water if needed for blending

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the ingredients: Roughly chop the shallots, red chillies (seeds removed), and lemongrass, and peel and slice the garlic and ginger (if using fresh).
  • Set up a small blender or smoothie maker. Then add all of the ingredients plus 1 tablespoon of water.
  • Start the blender and blend until a thick, smooth paste has formed. If the blender has trouble getting going add another tablespoon of water. Make sure to only add small amounts of water otherwise your paste will be too thin.
  • Use the paste to make a Thai red Curry or transfer to a jar or sealable containers and refrigerate for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.

Video

Notes

Is this curry paste hot? Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. But in general the smaller the chilli (red or green) the hotter it becomes. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the type of chillies used and the amounts.
If you like it spicy add plenty of small red chillies. If not, add less and go for a bigger sized chilli pepper or for no head use bell peppers (capsicum). If a milder curry is much more your thing then try Panang curry, or Massaman curry, or even a Thai yellow curry.
How much curry paste is needed to make a curry? 2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.
How to store? Once made, Thai red curry paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 1 month.
Blending the paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai red paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going. Only add small amounts (1 tbsp) of water or oil each time. Too much and the paste will become thin and runny.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers. Each container has enough to make one curry for 2-4 people (3-4 tbsp). These can be stored in the fridge or freezer and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or two and can then be used right away.
Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of Thai red curry paste. To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients. Doubling the ingredients will produce 12 tablespoons.

Nutrition

Serving: 48g | Calories: 39kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 83mg | Potassium: 155mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 144IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in March 2019. Updated in April 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step photos and expert tips.

The post Thai Red Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-red-curry-paste/feed/ 1
Apple Crumble https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/ https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/#respond Mon, 15 Mar 2021 22:51:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11689 Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard. - This is what Sundays are made for! This easy crumble recipe is made with crisp, Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes; from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden crumble out...

Read More

The post Apple Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard. - This is what Sundays are made for! This easy crumble recipe is made with crisp, Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes; from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden crumble out of the oven.

A portion of apply crumble on a small plate with custard drizzled over and the rest of the crumble in a larger dish with a spoon.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This apple crumble recipe is traditional, homemade and one the easiest yet most satisfying desserts I know. With a simple method that requires only 30 minutes, this is a great dessert for when you have mouths to feed and time to save!

Theres no need for any fancy equipment and no special skills required to make it look good. Just layering the apples and then crumble into a baking dish and popping into the oven until bubbling. Super simple.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this traditional apple crumble recipe you will need:

  • 100g plain flour
  • 75g ground almonds
  • 100g golden caster sugar
  • 100g cold, cubed, unsalted butter
  • pinch of salt
  • 500g peeled and chopped cooking apples
  • 2 tablespoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon (optional)
  • 25g roasted chopped hazelnuts (optional)

Ingredient notes

Ground almonds: These are used to give extra flavour to the crumble, However, if you would rather not use almonds then just replace with the same amount of plain flour. Meaning the total flour would be 175g.

Apples: Use cooking apples.

Cinnamon: This warming spice goes fantastically well with the stewed apples. But if you prefer you can leave this out or substitute with nutmeg or allspice.

Hazelnuts: Optional - leave out if you prefer. I like to use chopped hazelnuts to add to the crunch and the flavour of the topping.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
    Prepare the crumble: Add 100g plain flour, 75g ground almonds, 100g golden caster sugar, 100g cubed unsalted butter and a pinch of salt to a mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the rest of the ingredients until like breadcrumbs. Then place to one side while you prepare the apples. 
  2. Peel the apples, remove the core and then cut the flesh into rough 1cm cubes. Transfer the cubed apple to a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish and then add 2 tablespoon honey and 1 teaspoon cinnamon. Mix together well until the apple is fully coated in the honey and cinnamon
  3. Next take the crumble mix and evenly scatter over the apple until the entire surface is covered. 
    For extra crunch sprinkle over some chopped hazelnuts (optional).
  4. Place the pie dish in the preheated oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the crumble is golden and the apple is bubbling.
    Serve with custard.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.

💭 Expert tips

  • Crumble topping: Crumble is usually a mixture of flour, butter and sugar. For this recipe I've also added ground almonds for extra flavour and chopped hazelnuts for extra crunch. However, both of these ingredients are optional. If you would prefer a nut-free option just replace the ground almonds with the same amount of flour and leave out the hazelnuts.
  • Filling: The filling in this recipe is a chunky filling. This means that the cubed apples hold their shape. For a smooth filling stew the apples before placing in the pie dish. To do this add the apples to a pan with butter and cook gently until soft. Mash up until smooth then transfer to the pie dish and add the crumble.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What apples are best for crumble?

Bramley cooking apples are the best option for using in a crumble. These deliciously, crisp, bright green apples are generally larger with a more sour taste than your standard eating apple. They are ideal for any kind of dessert as when baked they stew down almost immediately into a fluffy apple sauce perfect for using in crumbles, apple pies and apple turnovers.

Cooking apples are also a great option for making homemade apple sauce to go with your roast beef dinner

Can the crumble be made with oats?

Using oats instead of flour is a great alternative, especially if you want to make this recipe gluten free (do double check the label to ensure that the oats you use are completely gluten free). To make this recipe with oats simply replace the flour with same amount of oats.

Is apple crisp and apple crumble the same thing?

In the UK apple crisp and and crumble are the same thing and in fact the term apple crisp isn't generally used. In the US 'apple crisp' is a crumble made out of sugar and oats only, and 'apple crumble', is the same as the standard UK crumble made with butter, flour and sugar.

How to store?

Once baked and cooled the crumble should be covered and then stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can briefly reheat the crumble in either the oven or microwave.

Can you freeze apple crumble?

Apple crumble is best frozen before it has been baked. Once you have made up the crumble in a pie dish, wrap in cling film and then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Throughly defrost in the fridge overnight before baking as instructed in this recipe.

Round baking dish filled with apple crumble and topped with chopped hazelnuts, and baking apples the background.

🍨 Other dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A portion of apply crumble on a small plate with custard drizzled over and the rest of the crumble in a larger dish with a spoon.
Print

Apple Crumble

Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard - this is what Sundays are made for! This easy apple crumble recipe is made with crisp Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden apple crumble out of the oven.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 407kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • 21cm (8 inch) pie dish

Ingredients

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 75 g ground almonds
  • 100 g golden caster sugar
  • 100 g cold unsalted butter (cubed)
  • pinch of salt
  • 500 g peeled and chopped cooking apples
  • 2 tablespoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 25 g roasted chopped hazelnuts (optional)

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Prepare the crumble in a large mixing bowl. Add 100g plain flour, 75g ground almonds, 100g golden caster sugar, 100g cubed unsalted butter and a pinch of salt to the bowl.
  • Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the rest of the ingredients until like breadcrumbs. Then place to one side while you prepare the apples.
  • Peel the apples, remove the core and then cut the flesh into rough 1cm cubes. Transfer the cubed apple to a pie dish and then add 2 tablespoon honey and 1 teaspoon cinnamon. Mix together well until the apple is fully coated in the honey and cinnamon
  • Next take the crumble mix and evenly scatter over the apple until the entire surface is covered. For extra crunch sprinkle over some chopped hazelnuts (optional).
  • Place the pie dish in the preheated oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the crumble is golden and the apple is bubbling. Serve with custard.

Video

Notes

Can the crumble be made with oats? Apple crumble made with oats instead of flour is a great alternative if you want to make this recipe gluten free (do double check that the oats you use are completely gluten free and not packaged alongside wheat containing products). To make this recipe with oats simply replace the flour with same amount of oats.
How to store? Once baked and cooled the crumble should be covered and then stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can briefly reheat the crumble in either the oven or microwave.
Can apple crumble be frozen? Apple crumble is best frozen before it has been baked. Once you have made up the crumble in a pie dish, wrap in cling film and then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Throughly defrost in the fridge overnight before baking as instructed in this recipe.
Expert tips:
  • Crumble topping: Crumble is usually a mixture of flour, butter and sugar. For this recipe I've also added ground almonds for extra flavour and chopped hazelnuts for extra crunch. However, both of these ingredients are optional. If you would prefer a nut-free option just replace the ground almonds with the same amount of flour and leave out the hazelnuts.
  • Filling: The filling in this recipe is a chunky filling. This means that the cubed apples hold their shape. For a smooth filling stew the apples before placing in the pie dish. To do this add the apples to a pan with butter and cook gently until soft. Mash up until smooth then transfer to the pie dish and add the crumble.

Nutrition

Serving: 155g | Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 145mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 32g | Vitamin A: 463IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in December 2019. Updated in March 2021 with expert tips.

The post Apple Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/feed/ 0
Thai Green Curry Paste https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry-paste/#respond Tue, 16 Mar 2021 23:09:46 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9071 A fragrant and spicy Thai green curry paste. Make your own Thai green paste at home with this simple and quick recipe that can be whipped up in 10 minutes. Use this Thai paste as a base for a fragrant, homemade Thai green curry recipe or jar it up and save for later. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳...

Read More

The post Thai Green Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

A fragrant and spicy Thai green curry paste. Make your own Thai green paste at home with this simple and quick recipe that can be whipped up in 10 minutes. Use this Thai paste as a base for a fragrant, homemade Thai green curry recipe or jar it up and save for later.

A small jar filled with homemade Thai green curry paste with a spoonful of paste and a chopped up green finger chilli at the side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Most curry recipes will call for some kind of curry paste, whether thats homemade or out of a jar grabbed off the supermarket shelf. Theres nothing wrong with the latter. Sometimes a jar of paste and a packet of microwave rice are just the ticket on a busy weekday night. That said, if I have the time and where-with-all to get out my blender and chop up a few ingredients, then I most certainly will. Not only does homemade curry paste taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.

This recipe is adapted from the Thai recipes I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this easy Thai green curry paste recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Thai green curry paste.

Ingredient notes

Green chillies: The chillies used here will ultimately determine how hot your curry is. So if you like it spicy then use hotter chillies. For Thai green Curry paste, green chillies are required. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with green bell pepper (capsicum).

Ginger: If you can get hold of galangal (Thai ginger) then definitely use that here. If not, standard fresh ginger is just fine. If you can't get hold of any type of fresh ginger than you can substitute for jarred ginger.

Coriander: Coriander is a great flavour in Thai paste and so I don't recommend that you substitute or leave it out. This recipe uses both fresh and ground coriander for full flavour and a burst of colour.

Garlic: You can substitute for 2 teaspoon of garlic paste, instead of cloves, if preferred.

Lime: this paste recipe uses both the juice and the zest

Lemongrass: You can substitute this for jarred lemongrass if preferred.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by preparing the ingredients: Roughly chop the shallots, lemongrass and green chillies, peel and slice the garlic and ginger, and zest the whole lime and juice half of it.
  2. Set up a small blender or smoothie maker. Then add all of the ingredients plus 1 tablespoon of water.
  3. Start the blender and blend until a thick, smooth paste has formed. If the blender has trouble getting going add another tablespoon of water. Make sure to only add small amount of water (1 tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.
  4. Use the paste to make a Thai green Curry or transfer to a jar or sealable containers and refrigerate for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.

💭 Expert tips

  • Blending the paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai green paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going. Only add small amounts (1 tbsp) of water or oil each time. Too much and the paste will become thin and runny.
  • Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers. Each container has enough to make one curry for 2-4 people (3-4 tbsp). These can be stored in the fridge or freezer and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or two and can then be used right away.
  • Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of Thai green paste. To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients. Doubling the ingredients will produce 12 tablespoons.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is this curry paste hot?

Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the ingredients used and the amounts. If you like it spicy add plenty of small green chillies. If not, add less and go for a bigger sized chilli pepper. If a milder curry is much more your thing then try Panang curry, or Massaman curry, or even a thai yellow curry.

What is the difference between Thai red and Thai green curry paste?

The main difference between Thai green and Thai red curry paste is the colour and the heat, both of which come from the type of chillies used. Substituting one paste for other will ultimately dictate the type of curry you end up making.

How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?

2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.

How to store?

Once made, Thai green curry paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

A small jar filled with home Thai green curry paste with teaspoon of paste being held above the jar.

🍛 Other curry paste recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A small jar filled with homemade Thai green curry paste with a spoonful of paste and a chopped up green finger chilli at the side.
Print

Thai green curry paste

A fragrant and spicy Thai green curry paste. Make your own Thai green paste at home with this simple and quick recipe that can be whipped up in 10 minutes. Use this Thai paste as a base for a fragrant, homemade Thai green curry recipe or jar it up and save for later.
Course Dinner, paste, sauce
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 tablespoon
Calories 42kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 100 g Shallots roughly chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • 10 g piece of fresh ginger peeled and sliced
  • 8 green finger small chillies
  • 1 large green chilli pepper
  • 1 stalk lemongrass
  • 20 g fresh coriander stems and leaves
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ lime juiced
  • 1 lime zested
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon fish sauce
  • 1 or 2 tablespoon of water if needed for blending

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the ingredients: Roughly chop the shallots, lemongrass and green chillies, peel and slice the garlic and ginger, and zest the whole lime and juice half of it.
  • Set up a small blender or smoothie maker. Then add all of the ingredients plus 1 tablespoon of water.
  • Start the blender and blend until a thick, smooth paste has formed. If the blender has trouble getting going add another tablespoon of water. Make sure to only add small amounts of water (1 tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.
  • Use the paste to make a Thai green Curry or transfer to a jar or sealable containers and refrigerate for 1 week or freeze for 1 month.

Video

Notes

Is this curry paste hot? Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with green bell pepper (capsicum).
How much curry paste is needed to make a curry? 2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.
How to store? Once made, Thai green curry paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.
Blending the paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai green paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going. Only add small amounts (1 tbsp) of water or oil each time. Too much and the paste will become thin and runny.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers. Each container has enough to make one curry for 2-4 people (3-4 tbsp). These can be stored in the fridge or freezer and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or two and can then be used right away.
Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of Thai green paste. To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients. Doubling the ingredients will produce 12 tablespoons.

Nutrition

Serving: 1tablespoon | Calories: 42kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 91mg | Potassium: 113mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 228IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in May 2018. Updated in March 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step photos and expert tips.

The post Thai Green Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry-paste/feed/ 0
Banana Birthday Cake (Recipe Video + Step-by-Step Guide) https://properfoodie.com/banana-birthday-cake/ https://properfoodie.com/banana-birthday-cake/#comments Tue, 07 Aug 2018 21:32:51 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7241 Banana Birthday Cake with creamy mascarpone filling. Banana cake is a simple recipe and a great birthday cake option for those looking to change up that classic Victoria sponge or over indulgent chocolate cake. Banana Birthday Cake This is Banana bread birthday cake sandwiched with thick vanilla mascarpone cream,  a drizzle of honey and a...

Read More

The post Banana Birthday Cake (Recipe Video + Step-by-Step Guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Banana Birthday Cake with creamy mascarpone filling. Banana cake is a simple recipe and a great birthday cake option for those looking to change up that classic Victoria sponge or over indulgent chocolate cake.

banana celebration cake

Banana Birthday Cake

This is Banana bread birthday cake sandwiched with thick vanilla mascarpone cream,  a drizzle of honey and a dusting of icing. Its a celebration cake I could definitely eat all to myself! - and if I'm honest - a lot of it did come my way 🙂 Theres just no way I could resist that moist, crumbly sponge intertwined with banana and topped with a lusciously, naughty mascarpone cream. JUST TOO GOOD. Theres no holding me back when it comes to a good old dessert. Some of my favourites, other than this fabulous cake are blueberry pancakes, Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats), apple crumble, chocolate muffins, peanut butter and chocolate biscuit squares and Bakewell tart.

That said, a banana cake recipe is perfect for birthdays or celebratory milestones - for me that milestone was my recipe videos! Unbelievably, in August 2018 I had been making recipe videos for a whole year! So in celebratory, Birthday style I made this tasty and moist, layered banana bread cake.

To add to the milestone I was also marking a year of working with Zoom Media. Zoom help to produce some of my videos and then display them on the TV screens they manage in UK gyms. (If your here after seeing one of my videos in a gym - thanks so much for stopping by 🙂 ). Its a working relationship that is still on going and I hope to be able to provide many more videos in the future.

Banana cake

This easy banana cake recipe isn't just good for celebrations but its pretty much good for whatever you fancy. Friends coming round? Need dessert for after your Sunday roast? Going to a party and want to show up with a homemade cake? - This easy bake is your answer. Whats more, its great for using up those slightly squishy, browned, leftover bananas. What once was fit for the bin can be revived into something fabulous.

Banana not your thing? Have a little look at my salted caramel popcorn cake!

banana birthday cake

Is banana cake and banana bread the same?

Banana cake and banana bread are pretty much the same thing. Banana bread isn't really a bread as it doesn't require yeast, or time to rise and contains plenty of sugar. However, when baked in a loaf tin and left naked, without any of the banana cake icing or frosting, then it automatically becomes banana bread. The banana cake on the other hand, is called a cake due to it not being a loaf shape and usually having frosted filling or toppings. Much like carrot cake, the banana cake almost always has to have a delicious frosting. But strangely enough carrot cake is always carrot cake, with our without frosting. Some people may also argue that the banana cake uses softer flour than the banana loaf, but this comes down to preference and generally the types of flours can be interchanged between these two recipes anyway.

Banana Cake ingredients

Banana cake and banana loaf recipes require just a few basic store cupboard ingredients and of course a few over ripe bananas:

  • Butter
  • light brown sugar
  • Cinnamon
  • Large eggs
  • Self raising flour
  • Ripe bananas
  • Vanilla extract
  • Extra banana and honey to decorate

Banana cake frosting ingredients

  • Double cream
  • Seeds from half a vanilla pod
  • Mascarpone cream cheese
  • Icing sugar

How to make banana cake at home

  1. Pre heat oven to 180 degrees C,  and line an 8 inch round baking tin wth baking paper. See how to line a baking tin here.
  2. By hand or in a stand mixer cream together the butter, sugar and cinnamon until light and soft. See recipe tip below
  3. Whisk together the eggs then add a little flour to the mix and gradually add the whisked eggs whisk continuing to mix.
  4. Once all the egg has been added to the cake mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer and add in the rest of the flour, the vanilla extract and 2 mashed bananas. Then use a spatula to gently fold together the banana cake mix.Add vanilla extract and carefully fold together the banana cake mix
  5. Next transfer the banana cake mix to the line cake tin and bake in the centre of the oven for 50 minutes. Check at 40 minutes. Cake is ready when an inserted skewer comes out clean.Transfer the banana cake mix to a lined cake tin

Recipe tip: Cream the butter and sugar for at least 5 minutes in the stand mix and at least 10 minutes by hand. A creamy and light cake mix will ensure a lighter and crumbly cake.

How to make the best creamy banana cake frosting

  1. Place the cream, vanilla pod seeds, mascarpone cream cheese, and icing sugar into a large mixing bowl and mix together well with a wooden spoon. The mix should be of a spreadable consistency but not overly whisked.in a bowl mix together the cream mascarpone and vanilla pod seeds
  2. taste test and add more icing or vanilla if required. Cover and place in the fridge until you are ready to assemble to cake.
  3. To assemble the cake, slice the cooled cake in half horizontally. Place the top half to one side.  bake and cool and then slice in half
  4. IMPORTANT TIP: Only add the mascarpone filling and topping once the cake is completely cool, otherwise the heat will melt the mascarpone cream.
  5. Spread half of the cream frosting over the bottom half of the cake, then carefully transfer the top of the cake onto the bottom half.spread half of the cream cheese filling onto the bottom layer
  6. Spread the remaining frosting over the top of the cake.Top the cake with the remaining half of cream cheese frosting
  7. Then decorate with freshly chopped banana, honey and a dusting of icing sugar.decorate with freshly sliced banana and honey

How long will banana cake keep?

Banana cake will keep and stay fresh for around 2 days at room temperature. Just ensure that the cake is stored in a air tight container. If stored in a container and then placed in the fridge the cake will last slightly longer and you may get 5-6 days out of it.

Can you freeze banana cake?

Banana cake without frosting or icing will freeze well. Once the cake has cooled completely, leave whole and wrap with 2 layers of cling film then place in the freezer. The cake will keep for up to 3 months in the freezer. When you're ready to use it, defrost over night at room temperature and then add the mascarpone cream cheese filling and frosting the following day.

birthday banana and cream cake

A delicious easy to make cake that is sure to have your guests coming back for more. Happy baking!!

 2 hours 15 minutes to makevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

banana celebration cake
Print

Banana Birthday Cake

Banana Cake with mascarpone frosting. Perfect for birthdays and for a change to that classic Victoria sponge or over indulgent chocolate cake
Course birthday, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine British
Prep Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 10 people
Calories 601kcal

Ingredients

For the cake

  • 150 g butter cubed and at room temp
  • 200 g light brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 3 large eggs
  • 250 g self-raising flour
  • 2 bananas peeled and mashed
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

For the mascarpone cream filling and topping

  • 300 ml Double cream
  • Seeds from half a vanilla pod
  • 250 g mascarpone cheese
  • 75 g icing sugar

Extra toppings

  • 1 sliced banana
  • 2 teaspoon runny honey

Equipment

  • 20 cm/8inch round cake tin lined with greaseproof paper
  • Stand mixer or mix by hand
  • Spatula
  • Serrated knife and Palette knife for cutting the cake into 2 layers and for adding the cream.

Instructions

To make the cake

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C Fan.
  • First line your cake tin with greaseproof paper (link: how to line a tin)
    preparing a baking tin with grease proof paper
  • Place the cubed butter, sugar and cinnamon in a large bowl or mixer stand. Cream together until light and soft – leave the mixer on high for at least 5 minutes to achieve a nice creamy consistency. Alternatively cream together by hand and mix for at least 10 minutes until light and creamy
  • Next whisk together the 3 eggs. The eggs are to be added to the butter mix gradually – I usually add a quarter at a time along with a little flour to help prevent the mixture from splitting.
  • Once all the egg has been combined into the mix, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Peel 2 bananas and mash with a fork.
    Mash bananas with a fork
  • Next add the remaining flour, mashed bananas and vanilla extract to the cake mix. Use a spatula to fold and gently combine together.
    Add vanilla extract and carefully fold together the banana cake mix
  • Transfer the cake mixture to the line cake tin and use the spatula to even out the top of the mix once it’s in the tin. Place the tin in the centre of a pre heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes but check after 40 minutes. Check if the cake is ready by inserting a metal skewer into the centre of the cake – the cake is done when the skewer comes out clean.
    Transfer the banana cake mix to a lined cake tin
  • Once the cake is baked, remove from the oven and leave on the side, in the tin to cool for at least 20 minutes. Meanwhile, make the mascarpone cream filling and topping:

To make the mascarpone cream

  • Place double cream, vanilla pod seeds, mascarpone and icing sugar in a large mixing bowl. Use a wooden spoon to combine together. Don't over mix as the mixture will become to stiff and won't spread easily over the cake.
    in a bowl mix together the cream mascarpone and vanilla pod seeds
  • Taste test and add more icing/vanilla if desired. Cover and place in the fridge until you’re ready to assemble the cake.

Building the cake

  • After 20 minutes the cake should be cool enough to remove from the tin. Place on a wire rack and leave for a further 30 minutes to ensure it has cooled right the way through.
    IMPORTANT TIP: If the cake is still warm the mascarpone cream will melt!
  • Once the cake is fully cool, use a large serrated knife to carefully slice into two layers. Move the knife around the cake to ensure an even cut. Place the top half of the cake on a plate and put to one side for the moment.
    bake and cool and then slice in half
  • Remove the mascarpone cream from the fridge. Use a palette knife to smoother half of the cream mix over the bottom layer of the cake. You don’t need to be too neat but do try to get the cream right the edges of the cake so that I will be visible when the top layer goes on.
    spread half of the cream cheese filling onto the bottom layer
  • Carefully place the top layer of the cake over the cream and then use the palette knife to smooth the remaining cream over the top of the cake.
    Top the cake with the remaining half of cream cheese frosting
  • Finally top the cake with sliced banana and drizzle of honey and serve. Keep in the fridge if not serving immediately.
    serving banana cake

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 161g | Calories: 601kcal | Carbohydrates: 53.8g | Protein: 6.5g | Fat: 41.6g | Saturated Fat: 25.8g | Sodium: 240mg | Sugar: 33.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Banana Birthday Cake with mascarpone cream and banana topping

The post Banana Birthday Cake (Recipe Video + Step-by-Step Guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/banana-birthday-cake/feed/ 18
American Blueberry Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/blueberry-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/blueberry-pancakes/#respond Sun, 17 Jan 2021 00:51:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9304 American blueberry pancakes recipe topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup.  Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step guide. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for pancake...

Read More

The post American Blueberry Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

American blueberry pancakes recipe topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup.  Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step guide. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for pancake day with an extra special blueberry twist. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

Stack of American style blueberry pancakes with a piece of butter on top and syrup being poured over

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Theres nothing half-hearted about these American blueberry pancakes. Everything from whipped egg whites and Greek yogurt to sticky syrup and juicy blueberries has been used. The results speak for themselves and whats more this recipe is super easy.

Wet and dry ingredients are simply whisked together in a bowl and for extra fluffiness the egg whites are separated and then whipped and folded into the mixture last. If you are looking for pancakes that are soft and spongy with blueberries that pop with juice as you bite into them, then this is your recipe.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Blueberry Pancakes recipe you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make Blueberry American style pancakes with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Baking powder: Blueberry pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy.

Eggs: This recipe suggests to separate the eggs. The yolks are added in with the other wet ingredients, whilst the whites are whipped up into soft peaks and folded in separately at the end. This helps to create extra fluffy pancakes.

However, if you are happy to forgo extra fluffiness in favour of ease and time, you can just add whole eggs along with the other wet ingredients. The pancakes will still be fluffy due to the baking powder.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.

Blueberries: Substitute with other berries if preferred such as raspberries or blackberries. Or try with chunks of mango or banana.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  2. In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  3. Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  4. Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the pancakes step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  6. Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  7. In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  8. Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the pancakes step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Finally add the blueberries to the batter.
  10. Fold in gently ensuring the 'fluffiness' from the egg whites is maintained.
  11. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  12. Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the pancakes step by step for instructions 9-12.
  13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For a simpler version, leave out the blueberries and make standard American Pancakes.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites and blueberries.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter to the pan and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I make pancakes fluffy?

American blueberry pancakes are made fluffy by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

What is the difference between British and American pancakes?

Unlike British pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.

What to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for blueberry pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

Other toppings you may want to use could include other types of berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, chocolate sauce, toffee sauce, lemon curd, nuts and seeds.

How do you know when to flip the pancakes?

The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

Stack of blueberry pancakes with butter melting on the top and a small glass jug of syrup in the background

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

🍌 Other fruity desserts

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Stack of American style blueberry pancakes with a piece of butter on top and syrup being poured over
Print

American Blueberry Pancakes

American blueberry pancakes recipe topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup.  Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step recipe. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for pancake day with an extra special blueberry twist.
Course Breakfast, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 pancakes
Calories 117kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 g plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon caster sugar
  • 2 large eggs (yolks and whites separated)
  • 250 ml Greek yogurt
  • 25 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 100 g blueberries (plus extra for serving)
  • Knob of butter for cooking

Instructions

  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  • In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  • Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  • Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  • Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  • In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  • Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.
  • Finally add the blueberries to the batter.
  • Fold in gently ensuring the 'fluffiness' from the egg whites is maintained.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  • Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 11 and 12 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour. Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy.
Eggs: If you want to save time and don’t mind about making your pancakes extra fluffy you can add eggs whole, along with the other wet ingredients, rather than separate.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.
Blueberries: Substitute with other berries if preferred such as raspberries or blackberries. Or try with chunks of mango or banana.
Expert tip 1: Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites and blueberries.
Expert tip 2: If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter to the pan and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.
How do I make pancakes fluffy? American blueberry pancakes are made fluffy by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.
What to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for blueberry pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey. Other toppings you may want to use could include other types of berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, chocolate sauce, toffee sauce, lemon curd, nuts and seeds.
How do you know when to flip the pancakes? The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly. More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

Nutrition

Serving: 240g | Calories: 117kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 89mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 66IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in March 2019. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post American Blueberry Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/blueberry-pancakes/feed/ 0
Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 30 Jan 2021 19:49:06 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16955 Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of...

Read More

The post Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of the week. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These soft and sweet scotch pancakes are perfect for breakfast, hot and dripping with butter. Make up a batch at the start of the week and then pop a couple in the toaster to warm for your breakfast each day. This recipe is really easy and requires just 5 minutes to whisk together the batter.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Scotch pancakes recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make Scotch pancakes recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.

Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess.

Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the pancakes sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the scotch pancakes. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by sifting flour and sugar into a large mixing bowl.
  2. Make a well in the flour mix and crack in 1 large egg.
  3. Add half of the milk then start to whisk the milk and egg into the flour.
  4. Slowly start to add more of the milk to the batter, whisking well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Add enough milk until the batter is the consistency of thick pouring cream.
  6. Place a frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Spread the butter around the pan using kitchen towel and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ½ of a ladleful of pancake mix into the pan.
  7. Cook for a minute or so, until bubbles start forming on top of the batter.
  8. Flip the pancake and cook for a further minute on the second side.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour and texture mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine.
  • If your pancakes are browning too much or are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the difference between Scotch and American pancakes?

Scotch pancakes, also known as drop scones, are made with self raising flour which does a similar job to the baking powder in American pancakes. Therefore, scotch and American pancakes are very similar, the only real difference being that the scotch pancakes recipe includes caster sugar. So scotch pancakes are sweeter and primed for salty, melted butter.

What toppings to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for scotch pancakes is butter. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Honey can also be added, but this isn't strictly necessary as scotch pancakes are already sweet.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively, you can pop the pancakes in a toaster briefly or pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top ad a small dish on honey in the background.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.
Print

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)

Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of the week.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 pancakes
Calories 96kcal

Equipment

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 225 g self raising flour
  • 40 g caster sugar
  • 1 egg
  • 250 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Start by sifting flour and sugar into a large mixing bowl.
  • Make a well in the flour mix and crack in 1 large egg.
  • Add half of the milk then start to whisk the milk and egg into the flour.
  • Slowly start to add more of the milk to the batter, whisking well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.
  • Add enough milk until the batter is the consistency of thick pouring cream.
  • Place a frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Spread the butter around the pan using kitchen towel and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ½ of a ladleful of pancake mix into the pan.
  • Cook for a minute or so, until bubbles start forming on top of the batter.
  • Flip the pancake and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.
Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the pancakes sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the scotch pancakes. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
Why are my pancakes browning too much? If your pancakes are browning too much or are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.
Can you reheat pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively, you can pop the pancakes in a toaster briefly or pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.
What toppings to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for scotch pancakes is butter. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Honey can also be added, but this isn't strictly necessary as scotch pancakes are already sweet. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pancake | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 15mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 41IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
English Pancakes Recipe https://properfoodie.com/english-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/english-pancakes-recipe/#comments Fri, 29 Jan 2021 15:46:25 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16888 Traditional English pancakes recipe made simply with eggs, flour and milk. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy perfectly thin and light, English style pancakes on Pancake day. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe In the UK, English pancakes...

Read More

The post English Pancakes Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Traditional English pancakes recipe made simply with eggs, flour and milk. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy perfectly thin and light, English style pancakes on Pancake day. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A plate of this flat pancakes stacked with the top four folded twice topped with a lemon wedge and a second wedge being squeezed over the top.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

In the UK, English pancakes are traditionally eaten on Shrove Tuesday at the start of lent. A tradition we all love, although pancake making can be seen as quite a tricky business. How to make the batter, how to make thin pancakes, how to stop pancakes sticking to the pan, how to toss without disaster......it can all be quite stressful.

Fear not, this recipe is all about making the most perfect English pancakes in the easiest way possible. No lumpy batter and no pancakes on the ceiling (or floor). This recipe ensures a super smooth batter in just 5 minutes and although flipping pancakes is all part of the fun, its definitely not required here.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making these British pancakes:

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

🥘 Ingredients

To make this English pancakes recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make English pancakes recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.

Flour: This recipe calls for plain or all purpose flour as the English pancake is thin and flat so doesn't require any rising agents.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Lemons and sugar: Lemon juice and sugar is the traditional topping for English pancakes. But feel free to substitute with your favourite pancake topping.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by sifting flour into a large mixing bowl.
  2. Make a well in the flour and crack in two eggs.
  3. Add a quarter of the milk to the eggs then start to whisk into the flour.
  4. Gradually add the rest of the milk to the batter and whisk well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.A collage of 4 images showing how to make English pancakes step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Once all the milk is whisked in, leave to stand for 30 minutes
  6. Place a 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Use kitchen towel to spread the batter around the pan base remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ¾ of a ladleful into the hot pan.
  7. Move the pan around to spread the batter all the way to the edges. (TIP: if you like frilly edges then take the batter ever so slightly up the sides of the pan).
  8. Keep the pan on a medium heat and cook for around 1 minute. Use a spatula to gently lift one side to check the pancake has browned and to help release it from the pan base. Its time to flip when you can shake the pan and the pancake slides and moves across the pan. Then, either take a chance and give it a flip or use a spatula to gently turn over the pancake.A collage of 4 images showing how to make English pancakes step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Cook on the second side for 30 seconds or so. Serve on a plate with lemon and sugar or transfer to foil and wrap to keep warm whilst you make more.
  10. Repeat steps 6-9 until all the batter is used up.

💭 Expert tips

  • As this is an English pancake recipe the batter should be thin and similar to the consistency of single cream.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then leave to rest for 30 minutes.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the difference between English and American pancakes?

Unlike English pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than English pancakes.

What is the difference between English pancakes and crepes?

The french version of pancakes are very similar to British pancakes except they are larger and thinner. A special tool is used for spreading the batter on a hot plate, which makes crepes very thin.

What topping to serve with pancakes?

The traditional topping for English pancakes is sugar and lemon - nice and simple. However, you could also top with strawberries, mango, banana, nutella, honey, syrup, chocolate sauce, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. This was always the tradition in my house. My mum would stand dutifully by the stove cooking off pancakes as fast as we could eat them.

However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

Plate of thin, flat English pancakes viewed from above with the top 4 folded into quarters ad 2 lemon wedges placed on top.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A plate of this flat pancakes stacked with the top four folded twice topped with a lemon wedge and a second wedge being squeezed over the top.
Print

English Pancakes Recipe

Traditional English pancakes recipe made simply with eggs, flour and milk. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy perfectly thin and light English style pancakes on Pancake day.
Course Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine British, English
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 Pancakes
Calories 111kcal

Equipment

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 110 g plain flour all purpose flour
  • 2 large eggs
  • 275 ml semi skimmed 2% milk
  • Knob of butter for cooking
  • Lemon juice and sugar for topping

Instructions

  • Start by sifting flour into a large mixing bowl.
  • Make a well in the flour and crack in two eggs.
  • Add a quarter of the milk to the eggs then start to whisk into the flour.
  • Gradually add the rest of the milk to the batter and whisk well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.
  • Once all the milk is whisked in, leave to stand for 30 minutes
  • Place a 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Use kitchen towel to spread the batter around the base of the pan and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ¾ of a ladleful into the hot pan.
  • Move the pan around to spread the batter all the way to the edges. (TIP: if you like frilly edges then take the batter ever so slightly up the sides of the pan).
  • Keep the pan on a medium heat and cook for around 1 minute. Use a spatula to gently lift one side to check the pancake has browned and to help release it from the pan base. Its time to flip when you can shake the pan and the pancake slides and moves across the pan. Then, either take a chance and give it a flip or use a spatula to gently turn over the pancake.
  • Cook on the second side for 30 seconds or so. Serve on a plate with lemon and sugar or transfer to foil and wrap to keep warm whilst you make more.
  • Repeat steps 6-9 until all the batter is used up.

Notes

Milk: Semi skimmed milk is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.
Flour: This recipe calls for plain or all purpose flour as the English pancake is thin and flat so doesn't require any rising agents.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Lemons and sugar: Lemon juice and sugar is the traditional topping for English pancakes. But feel free to substitute with your favourite pancake topping.
What is the difference between English and American pancakes?
Unlike English pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than English pancakes.
What is the difference between English pancakes and crepes?
The french version of pancakes are very similar to British pancakes except they are larger and thinner. A special tool is used for spreading the batter on a hot plate, which makes crepes very thin.
What toppings to serve with pancakes?
The traditional topping for English pancakes is sugar and lemon - nice and simple. However, you could also top with strawberries, mango, banana, nutella, honey, syrup, chocolate sauce, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.
Can you reheat pancakes?
In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan and this was always the tradition in my house. My mum would stand dutifully by the stove cooking off pancakes as fast as we could eat them.
However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pancake | Calories: 111kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 58mg | Sodium: 43mg | Potassium: 104mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 126IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 1mg

The post English Pancakes Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/english-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 2
Hot Cross Buns Recipe https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/#comments Mon, 25 Jan 2021 16:08:13 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16850 Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect...

Read More

The post Hot Cross Buns Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect for snacking on after a long walk on Easter Sunday.

Hot cross buns on a cooling rack with one sliced in half

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Making hot cross buns can be a fairly complex and daunting process. There are a number of steps involved but at the heart, its just a basic bread rolls recipe, and these rustic hot cross buns are actually really easy to make. With a foolproof method and 10 minute dough recipe these soft and fluffy buns will easily take centre stage this Easter.

You don't need a bread machine and theres no need to activate the yeast before adding it to the flour. This is a simple method of adding wet ingredients to dry and bringing it all together into the most perfect batch of homemade hot cross buns.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this hot cross buns recipe:

  • Large flat baking tray lined with greaseproof paper
  • Piping bag for piping on the crosses.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this hot cross buns recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make hot cross buns with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Sultanas: Any dried fruit will work well in this recipe. Try with currants, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricot pieces, orange peel or chocolate chips.

Mixed spice: This is a mixture of several sweet spices, including cinnamon, nutmeg and ginger. If you can't get hold of any mixed spice then you can use a mix of the above single spices.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  2. Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt and mixed spice (dry ingredients).
  3. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Whisk the 2 eggs and pour into the well along with a quarter of the heated milk mixture. Stir well.
  4. Gradually add the rest of the milk mixture stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Turn out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. 
  6. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  7. Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the roughly with your fingertips.
  8. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the sultanas to the centre of the strip of dough. A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Roll up into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit to be fully combined.
  10. Next, halve and then quarter the dough. Then halve each quarter, creating 8 pieces that will be similar in size. Shape each piece into a round ball. Then place on a lined baking tray. Space out well to leave room for rising in the oven. Cover lightly with cling film and leave in a warm place to rise for 30 minutes. At this point you can preheat the oven to 160°C (320°F).
  11. Whilst waiting for the second rise, make the paste for the crosses by mixing together 100g plain flour with 8 tablespoon whole milk. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe the crosses onto the buns.
  12. After 30 minutes remove the cling film from the dough balls. Whisk 1 egg with 1 tablespoon of whole milk and use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls all over. A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 9-12.
  13. Pipe crosses over the glazed buns then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 160°C (320°F) for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  14. Remove the baked hot cross buns from the oven. Heat up some apricot jam and paint over the buns whilst still hot.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 13-14.

💭 Expert tips

  • Time yourself when kneading and make sure you knead for the full 5 minutes.
  • Only allow the dough to rise until it has about doubled in size. In a warm kitchen this should take around an hour. If you leave it for longer the gas bubbles can become too big and the buns will then fail to rise when baked.
  • If your kitchen is quite cool the dough could take up to 2 hours to double in size. You can speed this up by standing on top of a pre heated oven. Alternatively place the dough in the fridge if you would prefer to leave it to prove over a few hours instead (e.g. overnight).
  • When making the paste for the crosses, add the milk a bit at a time in order to reach your desired consistency. A thicker paste will give a thiner and more defined cross. A thinner paste will create a wider and flatter cross.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should hot cross buns be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that they start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the dough is rolled into 8 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray, well spaced, then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can this recipe be reheated?

As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the buns in foil, then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.

Can you freeze hot cross buns?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months.

When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in a hot oven to warm for 5 minutes.

three homemade hot cross buns on a cooli rack with a small dish of sultanas in the background

Other Easter bakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

hot cross buns on a cooling rack with one sliced in half
Print

Hot Cross Buns Recipe

Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect for snacking on after a long walk on Easter Sunday.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine British, Easter
Prep Time 2 hours 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 8 Hot cross buns
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small saucepan
  • Small mixing bowl or jug
  • Large flat baking tray lined with greaseproof paper
  • Pastry brush
  • Piping bag for piping on the crosses

Ingredients

For the buns

  • 200 ml whole milk
  • 100 g unsalted butter
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 500 g strong white bread flour
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet of fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 150 g Sultanas

For the cross

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 8 tablespoon whole milk

For the egg wash

  • 1 egg beaten
  • ½ tbsp. whole milk

For the glaze

  • 150 g Apricot jam

Instructions

  • Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  • Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt and mixed spice (dry ingredients).
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Whisk the 2 eggs and pour into the well along with a quarter of the heated milk mixture. Stir well.
  • Gradually add the rest of the milk mixture stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  • Turn out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.
  • Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out roughly with your fingertips.
  • Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the sultanas to the centre of the strip of dough.
  • Roll up into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit to be fully combined.
  • Next, halve and then quarter the dough. Then halve each quarter, creating 8 pieces that will be similar in size. Shape each piece into a round ball. Then place on a lined baking tray. Space out well to leave room for rising in the oven. Cover lightly with cling film and leave in a warm place to rise for 30 minutes. At this point you can preheat the oven to 160°C (320°F).
  • Whilst waiting for the second rise, make the paste for the crosses by mixing together 100g plain flour with 8 tablespoon whole milk. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe the crosses onto the buns.
  • After 30 minutes remove the cling film from the dough balls. Whisk 1 egg with 1 tablespoon of whole milk and use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls all over.
  • Pipe crosses over the glazed dough balls then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 160°C (320°F) for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Remove the baked hot cross buns from the oven. Heat up some apricot jam and paint over the buns whilst still hot.

Notes

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Sultanas: Any dried fruit will work well in this recipe. Try with currants, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricot pieces, orange peel or chocolate chips.
Mixed spice: This is a mixture of several sweet spices, including cinnamon, nutmeg and ginger. If you can't get hold of any mixed spice then you can use a mix of the above single spices.
Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
How should hot cross buns be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that they start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the dough is rolled into 8 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray, well spaced, then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can this recipe be reheated? As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the buns in foil, then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.
Can you freeze hot cross buns? Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in a hot oven to warm for 5 minutes.
Expert tips:
  • Time yourself when kneading and make sure you knead for the full 5 minutes.
  • Only allow the dough to rise until it has about doubled in size. In a warm kitchen this should take around an hour. If you leave it for longer the gas bubbles can become too big and the dough will then fail to rise when baked. If your kitchen is quite cool the dough could take up to 2 hours to double in size. You can speed this up by standing on top of a pre heated oven. Alternatively place the dough in the fridge if you would prefer to leave it to prove over a few hours instead (e.g. overnight).
  • When making the paste for the crosses, add the milk a bit at a time in order to reach your desired consistency. A thicker paste will give a thiner and more defined cross. A thinner paste will create a wider and flatter cross.

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 92mg | Sodium: 52mg | Potassium: 182mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 508IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Hot Cross Buns Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/feed/ 4
Mini Hot Cross Buns (with Chocolate) https://properfoodie.com/mini-hot-cross-bun-tear-and-share/ https://properfoodie.com/mini-hot-cross-bun-tear-and-share/#comments Sat, 24 Mar 2018 21:56:11 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6405 Sweet and sticky mini hot cross buns served with chocolate sauce dip! Soft and fluffy and filled with chocolate chunks, sweet spices and dried mixed fruit. The recipe for these delightful chocolate chip hot cross buns is super easy and it takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook...

Read More

The post Mini Hot Cross Buns (with Chocolate) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Sweet and sticky mini hot cross buns served with chocolate sauce dip! Soft and fluffy and filled with chocolate chunks, sweet spices and dried mixed fruit. The recipe for these delightful chocolate chip hot cross buns is super easy and it takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine!

Small hot cross buns arranged in a tear and share style ring with melted chocolate dip at the side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

From afar, making hot cross buns can seem like a complex process. There is a fair number of steps involved in any hot cross bun recipe, but its basically just like making bread with a few extra fancy bits.

Baked to perfection in a tear and share style ring and served with an easy melted chocolate sauce, this recipe is a great way to enjoy a sticky bun or two this Easter!

🥘 Ingredients

To make these chocolate hot cross buns you will need ingredients for a standard hot cross bun recipe:

Plus some extra ingredients to make these mini hot cross buns extra special:

  • Chocolate chips or chunks
  • Ground ginger
  • Ground nutmeg
  • dried mixed peel
  • Milk and white baking chocolate for making a chocolate sauce dip.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  2. In a small jug whisk together the 2 large eggs and set to one side.
  3. Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt, mixed spice, nutmeg and ginger (dry ingredients).
  4. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Pour in the eggs and a quarter of the milk mixture. Stir well. Gradually add the rest of the milk stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  5. Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  6. Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the currants, peel and chocolate to the centre of the strip of dough. Roll up the dough into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit and chocolate to be fully combined into the dough.
  7. Divide the dough into small balls. This recipes makes approx. 32 small buns.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step.
  8. Lay out the dough balls into your tear and share design on a large baking tray. If you would like to serve with a small dipping dish in the middle place this into the centre now to measure a large enough gap. Also leave a small gap in-between each ball to leave room for further rising. Cover with cling film or a clean tea towel and leave for another hour to rise.
  9. Meanwhile mix together 100g flour with 8 tablespoon of milk to form a smooth paste. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe on the crosses.
  10. Pre heat the oven to 160 degrees C. Glaze the risen dough balls with egg wash (1 egg whisked with a splash of whole milk). Then pipe on the crosses.
  11. Place the buns in the oven for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.collage of 2 images showing how to arrange the dough balls and how to pipe on the crosses before baking
  12. Five minutes before the buns come out of the oven, melt the apricot jam in a small pan. As soon as the buns are removed from the oven paint over the heated jam and then leave to cool.
  13. Once the hot cross bun tear and share is fully cooled, place the chocolate in a microwaveable bowl and heat in 30 second bursts until melted. Mix the melted white and milk chocolate and serve with the tear and share.

💭 Expert tips

  • Gently heat the milk and melt in the butter the leave to cool to body temperature before adding to the dry ingredients.
  • For ease and to save time, add the fast action yeast to the dry ingredients. It will activate when the wet ingredients are mixed in. 
  • Divide the dough evenly by halving each piece until you have enough even pieces to make the 32 small balls.
  • Position the dough balls into a tear and share shape leaving enough space for a second rise and for a dipping bowl in the middle

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should mini hot cross buns be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the bun dough is rolled into 32 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can this recipe be reheated?

As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the rolls in foil then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.

Can you freeze mini hot cross buns?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. Its easier to freeze the buns loose rather than in the tear and share shape.

When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

mini hot cross buns bakes in a ring shape with melted chocolate dip.

🍰 Other Easter bakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Small hot cross buns arranged in a tear and share style ring with melted chocolate dip at the side.
Print

Mini Hot Cross Buns (With Chocolate)

Sweet and sticky mini hot cross buns! Soft and fluffy and filled with chocolate chunks, sweet spices and dried mixed fruit. The recipe for these delightful chocolate chip hot cross buns is super easy and it takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine!
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 3 hours 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
Servings 32 mini buns
Calories 155kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Baking tray
  • Piping bag for the crosses
  • Pastry brush for the egg wash and glaze
  • Small pan for the apricot glaze

Ingredients

For the buns

  • 200 ml whole milk
  • 75 g unsalted butter
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 450 g strong white bread flour
  • 80 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet of fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt
  • 1 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon ground ginger
  • 50 g dried mixed peel
  • 50 g currants
  • 70 g chocolate chunks/chips

For the cross

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 8 tablespoon whole milk

For the egg wash

  • 1 egg beaten
  • ½ tablespoon whole milk

For the glaze

  • 150 g apricot jam

For the chocolate dip

  • 100 g milk chocolate
  • 100 g white chocolate

Instructions

To make the buns

  • Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  • In a small jug whisk together the 2 large eggs and set to one side.
  • Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt, mixed spice, nutmeg and ginger (dry ingredients).
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Pour in the eggs and a quarter of the milk mixture. Stir well. Gradually add the rest of the milk stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  • Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the currants, peel and chocolate to the centre of the strip of dough. Fold all the sides in and then roll up the dough into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit and chocolate to be fully combined into the dough.
  • The dough can now be divided up into small dough balls. There is enough dough to make 32 small buns. I divided mine into 26 small buns for the tear and share and then made 4 separate larger buns.
  • Lay out the dough balls into your tear and share design on a large baking tray. If you would like to serve with a small dipping dish in the middle place this into the centre now to measure a large enough gap. Also leave a small gap in-between each ball to leave room for further rising. Cover with cling film or a clean tea towel and leave for another hour to rise.

To make the cross

  • Meanwhile mix together 100g flour with 8 tablespoon of milk to form a smooth paste. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe on the crosses.

Bake

  • Pre heat the oven to 160 degrees C. After an hour, remove the tea towel from the dough balls. Mix together the egg and ½ tablespoon milk to make the egg wash. Use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls with the egg wash.
  • Next pipe the crosses onto the buns, try to pipe in one line over multiple buns where possible, just to make it easier. With my circular design I piped around in one circle and then across in a star shape.
  • Place the buns in the oven for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.

To make the sticky apricot glaze.

  • 5 minutes before the buns come out of the oven, melt the apricot jam in a small pan. As soon as the buns are removed from the oven paint over the heated apricot jam and then leave to cool.

To make the chocolate dip

  • Once the hot cross bun tear and share is fully cooled, place the chocolate in a microwaveable bowl and heat in 30 second bursts until melted. Mix the melted white and milk chocolate and serve with the tear and share.

Notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.
Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
How should mini hot cross buns be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the bun dough is rolled into 32 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can this recipe be reheated? As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the rolls in foil then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.
Can you freeze mini hot cross buns? Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. Its easier to freeze the buns loose rather than in the tear and share shape. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 155kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 22mg | Sodium: 18mg | Potassium: 77mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 110IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in March 2018. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Mini Hot Cross Buns (with Chocolate) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mini-hot-cross-bun-tear-and-share/feed/ 18
Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/#comments Wed, 14 Feb 2018 01:05:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6026 Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less...

Read More

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less than 45 minutes.

Ribollita vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

I'm back dreaming of the those rolling Toscana hills again - I can't help it. I always seem to come back to Italy when I'm cooking from the heart. And this dish really is from the heart. Its a homemade vegetable and bean soup - plain and simple. But this recipe has so much depth, flavour and tradition, that you know it just has to taste amazing.

Why make this recipe?

Tuscan Bean soup comes from making simple foods go a long way and also making sure that those simple foods don't go to waste. Some leftover carrots or celery? chuck em in. Some stale bread? Yep that goes in too! Its all about making the most of what you have and turning leftovers into a meal fit for a king.

This is the perfect recipe for the end of the week when you may have leftovers or food that needs to be used up. Its also really easy to make and super healthy - whats not to like?

If you're after some more Italian flavour and flare have a quick peek at my Amarone Risotto, or my homemade tiramisu, or how about a salami ragu? or if you're feeling really adventurous why not have a go at making your own pasta?

Ingredients

For this Tuscan ribollita soup recipe you will need a few simple ingredients, many of which are cupboard staples or possible leftovers.

Ingredients needed to make this recipe displayed on a table with text labels

Kale: Traditionally this recipe is made with black kale but any kind of kale or cabbage will work well here. I usually add the kale or cabbage at the very end and gently warm for 5 minutes so allowing it to soften whilst maintaining its colour and nutrients.

Parmesan: Freshly grated parmesan or pecorino is simply wonderful in this recipe. It adds a great depth of flavour and lovely a creamy texture. However, if you want to keep this soup strictly vegetarian then make sure to replace with a vegetarian cheese. Or if you want a super healthy vegetable soup then just skip the cheese.

Beans: Cannellini beans work well here as they are white and pearly and stand out against the other ingredients. They are also easy to blend down and so help to create a creamy soup without adding cream, milk, yogurt or cheese. Any other kind of white bean will work just as well.

Vine tomatoes: For the tomatoes I like to use baby vine tomatoes, which are slightly sweeter than the larger version. However, either the baby or the large variety work just as well. Either use two large vine tomatoes sliced and deseeded or weight out around 140g of baby vine tomatoes.

Step-by-Step Instructions

  1. Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook.
  2. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  3. After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for a 2-3 minutes.
  4. Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth.A collage of 4 images showing how to make White bean soup step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well.
  6. Stir in the black kale or cabbage. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  7. Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.
  8. TIP: To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.A collage of 4 images showing how to make white bean soup step by step for instructions 5-8.
Is ribollita soup healthy?

Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!

What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?

You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Why does this recipe use stale bread?

To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens it.

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up a bowl and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

Other soup recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.
Print

Tuscan Ribollita Soup

Italian Ribollita soup is a creamy, healthy, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course, starter
Cuisine Italian, Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tbsp. Olive oil
  • 1 large onion 200g finely chopped
  • 1 Leek 80g chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 carrot 150g finely chopped
  • 2 celery 100g sticks finely chopped
  • 2 medium vine tomatoes deseeded and roughly cubed 140g
  • 600 ml vegetable stock plus extra water if required
  • 2 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tin cannellini beans 240g drained
  • 20 g freshly grated parmesan or vegetarian alternative
  • 100 g black kale or cabbage

Optional

  • Sea salt black pepper and extra parmesan to season
  • Ciabatta or stale bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  • After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well. Stir in the black kale. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  • Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.

Video

Notes

Recipe tip:
To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.
Is ribollita soup healthy?
Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!
What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?
You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 800mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 19g

This post was first published in February 2018. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/feed/ 42
American Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/#comments Thu, 14 Jan 2021 18:15:39 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3490 Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes recipe. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or...

Read More

The post American Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes recipe. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or even for dessert. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for pancakes that are thick, soft and spongy then this is your recipe. Unlike the British pancake, American style pancakes are small and stackable and have a thick spongy texture that is primed for soaking up lashing of syrup.

This is an easy recipe where wet and dry ingredients are simply whisked together in a bowl. For extra fluffiness the egg whites are separated and then whipped separately and folded into the mixture last. However, for speed and ease the eggs can be left whole if you prefer and simply mixed in with the other wet ingredients.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this American Pancakes recipe you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make American style pancakes with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy

Eggs: This recipe suggests to separate the eggs. The yolks are added in with the other wet ingredients, whilst the whites are whipped up into soft peaks and folded in separately at the end. This helps to create extra fluffy pancakes.

However, if you are happy to forgo extra fluffiness in favour of ease and time, you can just add whole eggs along with the other wet ingredients. The pancakes will still be fluffy due to the baking powder.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  2. In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  3. Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  4. Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  6. Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  7. In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  8. Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  10. Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute  on the second side.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 9-10.
  11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour and texture mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter. For example try these blueberry pancakes.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I make pancakes fluffy?

Fluffy American pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

What is the difference between British and American pancakes?

Unlike British pancakes American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.

What to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

How do you know when to flip the pancakes?

The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

A stack of pancakes on a small plate with butter melting on the top and a small glass jug of syrup in the background.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

📖 Alternatives to pancakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of American pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.
Print

American Pancakes

Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or even for dessert.
Course Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 110kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 g plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon caster sugar
  • 2 large free range eggs yolks and whites separated
  • 250 ml Greek yogurt
  • 25 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  • In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  • Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  • Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  • Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  • In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  • Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  • Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy
Eggs: If you want to save time and don’t mind about making your pancakes extra fluffy you can add eggs whole, along with the other wet ingredients, rather than separate.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.
How do I make pancakes fluffy? Fluffy pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.
What is the difference between British and American pancakes? Unlike British pancakes American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.
What to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Nutrition

Serving: 40g | Calories: 110kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 59IU | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in February 2017. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post American Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/feed/ 11
Creamy Mushroom Pasta (Step-by-Step Guide + Video) https://properfoodie.com/creamy-mushroom-pasta/ https://properfoodie.com/creamy-mushroom-pasta/#respond Tue, 11 Jun 2019 20:49:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10175 Creamy mushroom pasta is a one pan pasta recipe with white wine cream sauce, chestnut mushrooms, fresh parsley, and parmesan cheese! Try this vegetarian pasta recipe for lunch or dinner. Creamy mushroom pasta This easy mushroom pasta is for the evenings when we require nothing more than a scrumptious bowl of creamy pasta. Its for...

Read More

The post Creamy Mushroom Pasta (Step-by-Step Guide + Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy mushroom pasta is a one pan pasta recipe with white wine cream sauce, chestnut mushrooms, fresh parsley, and parmesan cheese! Try this vegetarian pasta recipe for lunch or dinner.

creamy mushroom pasta

Creamy mushroom pasta

This easy mushroom pasta is for the evenings when we require nothing more than a scrumptious bowl of creamy pasta. Its for the evenings when cooking is not high on the agenda and one pot dishes like easy pea pasta, healthy salmon and prawn linguine or spicy cajun chicken pasta are the answer to all our dinner questions.

Creamy mushroom pasta is as easy to make as it gets. The mouth-watering combination of chestnut mushrooms with white wine cream sauce, creme fraiche and parmesan makes this dish a real crowd pleaser.

For something a little meatier, try this equally as creamy fettuccini alfredo with chicken with homemade alfredo sauce recipe.

creamy mushroom pasta

Creamy mushroom pasta ingredients

To make this mushroom pasta with cream sauce, you will need:

  • Butter
  • Finely chopped onion
  • Garlic clove
  • Plain flour
  • Chestnut/shiitake mushrooms (or other type of mushrooms)
  • White wine
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Parmesan (or other choice of hard cheese)
  • Spaghetti (or other pasta)
  • Dijon mustard (optional)
  • Creme Fraiche
  • Freshly chopped parsley

mushroom pasta in white wine cream sauce

Creamy mushroom sauce

To make the ultimate creamy mushroom sauce, you will first need to make a soft and silky white sauce.

This requires 5 minutes of patience to slowly combine butter, flour and milk, and gently cook until thick and creamy. Making this sauce extra special and full of flavour requires some key ingredients, which pair fantastically well with the chestnut mushrooms.

The first is a few good glugs of white wine, which creates an incredible scent of pears and apples as soon as it hits the hot pan. Cook the wine gently for a few minutes to allow the alcohol to burn off before the milk is added.

Towards the end of cooking, the parmesan, dijon mustard and creme fraiche are stirred into the sauce to ensure a full flavoured, creamy and satisfying finish to the dish. White wine cream sauce adds so much flavour to this mushroom pasta recipe.

mushroom pasta

How to make creamy mushroom pasta

To make this simple pasta recipe, follow these steps:

  1. In large pan melt butter and fry garlic and onions until soft.
  2. Then add the mushrooms and cook for further 2 minutesstir fry onions an mushrooms
  3. Add flour and stir in before adding a splash of white wine and the gradually adding milk. Stir until the white wine cream sauce starts to to thicken add flour then wine and then gradually add milk
  4. Next add parmesan, dijon mustard, creme fraiche and seasoning to the sauce and stir in well.add dijon mustard
  5. Finally add cooked spaghetti and stir to coat in the sauce, then top with extra parmesan and fresh parsley. add cooked spaghetti and stir to fully coat in sauce

What to serve with this recipe

The best thing to serve with this creamy pasta recipe is warm sprouted grain bread, perfect for dunking and mopping up the mushroom sauce.  You could also pair this dish with a side of garlic parmesan roasted carrots or a fresh vegetable salad with creamy balsamic dressing.

And, for an extra special treat, why not make this mushroom pasta recipe with your own homemade pasta?

creamy mushroom pasta

What else can I cook with mushrooms?

Love mushrooms? Try this simple, yet incredible Hungarian mushroom soup. Or try this amazing truffle linguine dish and find out where you can buy fabulously, authentic truffle paste, straight from Italy. For more dinner inspiration check out my dinner ideas for two collection.

 30 minutes to produce recipehigh in nutrients recipe2 of 5 fruit and veg a day recipe

📖 Recipe

creamy mushroom pasta
Print

Creamy Mushroom Pasta

Creamy mushroom pasta cooked in one pan with a white wine cream sauce, served with fresh parsley and grated parmesan.
Course Dinner, evening meal, Main Course
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 734.1kcal

Ingredients

  • 15 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 100g
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 300 g Chestnut/shiitake mushrooms or other type of mushrooms
  • 100 ml White wine
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 30 g Grated parmesan or other choice of hard cheese
  • 300 g Uncooked Spaghetti 580g cooked
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard optional
  • 1 tablespoon Creme Fraiche
  • 30 g Freshly chopped parsley handful

Instructions

  • In large pan melt butter and gently fry garlic and onions until soft. Add mushrooms and stir fry for further 2 minutes or until just starting to soften.
    stir fry onions an mushrooms
  • Sprinkle flour over the mushrooms and stir in well. Some flour may start to stick to the base of the pan at this point.
  • Next add the wine and scrape up any bits of flour. As the wine reduces it will mix with the flour and start to thicken.
  • As the wine thickens start to add the milk a little at a time whilst continually staring. The gradual additions of milk and continual stirring will prevent any lumps forming and will create a silky smooth white sauce.
    add flour then wine and then gradually add milk
  • Once all the milk is added continue to stir and allow to simmer for a couple of minutes to ensure the flour is cooked out and the sauce is fully thickened.
  • Next add parmesan, dijon mustard, creme fraiche and seasoning to the sauce and stir in well.
    add dijon mustard
  • Finally add cooked spaghetti and stir to coat in the sauce, then top with extra parmesan and fresh parsley.
    add cooked spaghetti and stir to fully coat in sauce

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 742g | Calories: 734.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 115g | Protein: 27.3g | Fat: 18.2g | Saturated Fat: 10.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4.2g | Sodium: 240mg | Fiber: 7.6g | Sugar: 15.8g

I first shared this Creamy mushroom pasta recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

PIN FOR LATER

creamy mushroom pasta

The post Creamy Mushroom Pasta (Step-by-Step Guide + Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/creamy-mushroom-pasta/feed/ 0
Frangipane mince pies https://properfoodie.com/frangipane-mince-pies/ https://properfoodie.com/frangipane-mince-pies/#comments Tue, 15 Dec 2020 00:39:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5514 Easy frangipane mince pies made completely from scratch with a few basic store cupboard ingredients. The homemade frangipane topping is soft and spongy with a sweet almond flavour. This is surely one of the best ways to enjoy mince pies and amazing with a bit of brandy cream! The pastry can be mixed by hand...

Read More

The post Frangipane mince pies appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy frangipane mince pies made completely from scratch with a few basic store cupboard ingredients. The homemade frangipane topping is soft and spongy with a sweet almond flavour. This is surely one of the best ways to enjoy mince pies and amazing with a bit of brandy cream! The pastry can be mixed by hand in just 10 minutes and the pies themselves need just 20 minutes in the oven.

Single mince pie on a plate with a frangipane topping and sprinkles of icing sugar falling down on top.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The only thing better than mince pies is frangipane mince pies. With just a thin layer of pastry for the base and soft almond flavoured sponge for the lid these mince pies will definitely have you coming back for seconds.

The pastry is easy to mix together by hand and the frangipane can be whizzed up in a food processor in just 5 minutes. This simple, tried and tested recipe will ensure a perfect batch every time.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

🥘 Ingredients

To make 24 frangipane mince pies you will need:

2 images of ingredients. The first showing ingredients for making the pastry and filling and the second showing ingredients for making the frangipane

Ingredient notes for the pastry and filling

Butter: this should be as cold as possible, so leave in the fridge until the last minute. Cold pastry is easier to work with.

Orange zest: To make these mince pies extra festive, I like to flavour the pastry with orange zest. This could be substituted with clementine or tangerine zest or completely left out if preferred.

Cranberry sauce: Cranberry sauce can be added to the mincemeat filling for a mince pie with extra Christmas flavour. Again this is completely optional but if you would like to give this a go just stir a couple of tablespoons of cranberry sauce into the mincemeat.

Ingredient notes for the frangipane

Butter: This should be room temperature so it can be easily creamed with the sugar.

Ground almonds: This is essential for making frangipane, which has a distinctive almond flavour, so don't leave this out.

Flaked almonds: These are to add as a topping but are completely optional.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Add the flour and cold butter to a large mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the flour until a breadcrumb consistency is reached.
  2. Next add the ground almonds, icing sugar and orange zest to the bowl. Stir into the crumb until evenly mixed.
  3. Whisk one large egg then gradually add to the mixture. Mix well between each addition and stop adding the egg when the pastry starts to come together. TIP: If you have added all the egg and the pastry hasn't come together, add small spoonfuls of a second egg or cold water until it does come together.
  4. Turn the pastry out onto a clean, floured work surface and shape into a ball. Wrap in cling film and place into the fridge to chill for at least 30 minutes. The colder the better!four images showing how to make Easy Mince Pies, steps 1-4.
  5. Whilst the pastry is in the fridge, the frangipane can be made. Set up your food processor with the blade attachment and then add the butter and caster sugar.
  6. Turn on and blend together until creamy and lighter in colour.
  7. Next, crack one of the eggs into to processor and add a tablespoon of the ground almonds. Turn on and blend until the egg is fully combined. Repeat with the second egg.
  8. Remove the mixer bowl from the processor and take out the blade. Add the remaining ground almonds and the flour to the mixture. Fold in well using a spatula until fully combined. Store the frangipane in the fridge until ready to use.four images showing how to make frangipane for mince pies, steps 5-8..
  9. Once the pastry is well chilled, roll out on a floured work surface into a rough circle around 2-3mm thick. Use an 8cm round, fluted cutter to cut out circles for the base of each mince pie. TIP: use a size of round cutter that is slightly larger than the holes of your mince pie tray. 
  10. Lightly grease your mince pie tray and sprinkle with flour, tapping off the excess. Then carefully place the pastry circles into the holes of the tray and add a teaspoon of mincemeat filling to each one. (Optional: Stir cranberry sauce into mincemeat first for an extra festive twist).
  11. Add a teaspoon of frangipane on top of the mincemeat. No need to spread out the frangipane or make it look neat - it will spread and settle evenly during baking. TIP: only add a teaspoon of frangipane. More than this will be too much and will spill over the edges.
  12. Add a few flaked almonds to the top of the frangipane, if desired, then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 170℃/340℉ for 20 minutes or until the frangipane is golden brown around the edges.four images showing how to make frangipane mince pies, steps 9-12

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the best way to work with the pastry?

To make this recipe easier and to keep the pastry colder for longer I suggest making half to begin with. This means halving the chilled pastry and returning one half to the fridge and rolling out the second half to make 12 mince pies. Once these have been filled and placed in the oven the rest of the pastry can be rolled out to make the rest of the pies.

How to stop the pastry from breaking when placing in the tray holes?

Pastry is a lot easier to handle when cold. Once made, make sure it is well chilled for at least 30 minutes. Leave it for longer if you can. Then roll out quickly and try not to over handle the cut out circles before placing in the tray.

How should mince pies be stored?

Allow the mince pies to fully cool then wrap in foil or cling film and store in an air tight container for up to 1 week.

Can frangipane mince pies be frozen?

Freezing mince pies is a fantastic way to have homemade mince pies on hand whenever you want them. Allow the pies to fully cool then stack in a sealable container and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost, pop out as many pies as you need then leave on the side to fully defrost for a couple of hours. To reheat, place defrosted pies in a warm oven for 5 minutes.

What can I add to a jar of mincemeat?

This recipe suggests adding cranberry sauce to the mincemeat for a bit of extra Christmas flavour. Other additions could include orange zest, crushed hazelnuts, splash of rum or brandy, tinned cherries (chopped), dried apricots or some christmassy spices such as cinnamon or nutmeg.

Frangipane mince pies lined up on a wire cooling rack with more pies in background on a plate.

🎄 Other Christmas recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Single mince pie on a plate with a frangipane topping and sprinkles of icing sugar falling down on top.
Print

Frangipane Mince Pies

Easy frangipane mince pies made completely from scratch with a few basic store cupboard ingredients. The homemade frangipane topping is soft and spongy with a sweet almond flavour. This is surely one of the best ways to enjoy mince pies and amazing with a bit of brandy cream! The pastry can be mixed by hand in just 10 minutes and the pies themselves need just 20 minutes in the oven.
Course Christmas, Dessert, pudding, treat
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 24 mince pies
Calories 288kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For the Pastry and filling

  • 250 g plain flour
  • 50 g ground almonds
  • 150 g cold cubed butter
  • 50 g icing sugar
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 orange zested
  • 510 g jar of mincemeat
  • 2 tablespoon cranberry sauce
  • Extra flour for dusting pastry

For the frangipane

  • 150 g butter room temp
  • 150 g caster sugar
  • 125 g ground almonds
  • 80 g plain flour
  • 2 large eggs

Instructions

To make the pastry

  • Add the flour and cold, cubed butter to a large mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the flour until a breadcrumb consistency is reached.
  • Next add the ground almonds, icing sugar and orange zest to the bowl. Stir into the crumb until evenly mixed.
  • Whisk one large egg in a jug then gradually add to the mixture. Mix well between each addition and stop adding the egg when the pastry starts to come together. TIP: If you have added all the egg and the pastry hasn't come together, add small spoonfuls of a second egg or cold water until it does come together.
  • Turn the pastry out onto a clean, floured work surface and shape into a ball. Wrap in cling film and place into the fridge to chill for at least 30 minutes. The colder the better!

To make the frangipane

  • Whilst the pastry is in the fridge, the frangipane can be made. Start by setting up your food processor with the blade attachment and then add the butter and caster sugar.
  • Turn on the processor and blend together until creamy and lighter in colour.
  • Next, with the processor turned off, crack one of the eggs into to processor and add a tablespoon of the ground almonds. Turn the processor on and blend until the egg is fully combined. Repeat with the second egg.
  • Remove the mixer bowl from the processor and take out the blade. Then add the remaining ground almonds and the flour to the mixture. Fold in well using a spatula until fully combined. Store the frangipane in the fridge until ready to use.

Putting together the mince pies

  • Once the pastry is well chilled, roll out on a floured work surface into a rough circle around 2-3mm thick. Work quickly and don't over handle. Warm pastry is more likely to break. Use an 8cm round, fluted cutter to cut out circles for the base of each mince pie. TIP: use a size of round cutter that is slightly larger than the holes of your mince pie tray.
  • To prevent the mince pies from sticking during baking, lightly grease your mince pie tray and lightly sprinkle with flour, tapping off the excess. Then carefully place the pastry circles into the holes of the tray and add a teaspoon of mincemeat filling to each one. (Optional: Stir cranberry sauce into mincemeat first for an extra festive twist).
  • Then add a teaspoon of frangipane on top of the mincemeat. No need to spread out the frangipane or make it look neat - it will spread and settle evenly during baking. TIP: only add a teaspoon of frangipane, more than this will be too much and will spill over the edges of the pastry.
  • Add a few flaked almonds to the top of the frangipane, if desired, then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 170℃/340℉ for 20 minutes or until the frangipane is golden brown around the edges.

Video

Notes

Adding egg to pastry: Only 1 egg is required to make this pastry recipe. If the egg is particularly large you may not need all of it. So add the egg gradually and stop when the pastry starts to come together. Or if you don't have enough egg add small spoonfuls of a second egg or cold water until the pastry starts to come together. 
What is the best way to work with the pastry? To make this recipe easier and to keep the pastry colder for longer I suggest making half to begin with. This means halving the chilled pastry and returning one half to the fridge and rolling out the second half to make 12 mince pies. Once these have been filled and placed in the oven the rest of the pastry can be rolled out to make the rest of the pies.
How to stop the pastry from breaking when placing in the tray holes? Pastry is a lot easier to handle when cold. Once made, make sure it is well chilled for at least 30 minutes. Leave it for longer if you can. Then roll out quickly and try not to over handle the cut out circles before placing in the tray.
How should mince pies be stored? Allow the mince pies to fully cool then wrap in foil or cling film and store in an air tight container for up to 1 week.
Can mince pies be frozen? Freezing mince pies is a fantastic way to have homemade mince pies on hand whenever you want them. Allow the pies to fully cool then stack in a sealable container and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost, pop out as many pies as you need then leave on the side to fully defrost for a couple of hours. To reheat, place defrosted pies in a warm oven for 5 minutes.
What can I add to a jar of mincemeat? This recipe suggests adding cranberry sauce to the mincemeat for a bit of extra Christmas flavour. Other additions could include orange zest, crushed hazelnuts, splash of rum or brandy, tinned cherries (chopped), dried apricots or some christmassy spices such as cinnamon or nutmeg.

Nutrition

Calories: 288kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 47mg | Sodium: 216mg | Potassium: 25mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 344IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in December 2017. Updated in December 2020 with an improved recipe and new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Frangipane mince pies appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/frangipane-mince-pies/feed/ 8
Easy Mince Pie Recipe https://properfoodie.com/cranberrymincepies/ https://properfoodie.com/cranberrymincepies/#comments Sun, 06 Dec 2020 23:43:14 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1541 A deliciously festive and easy mince pie recipe made with crumbly, orange flavoured pastry and a sweet, mincemeat and cranberry filling. The pastry can be mixed by hand in just 10 minutes and the pies themselves need just 15 minutes in the oven and can be enjoyed immediately or frozen for another time. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳...

Read More

The post Easy Mince Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

A deliciously festive and easy mince pie recipe made with crumbly, orange flavoured pastry and a sweet, mincemeat and cranberry filling. The pastry can be mixed by hand in just 10 minutes and the pies themselves need just 15 minutes in the oven and can be enjoyed immediately or frozen for another time.

A stack of homemade mince pies with star shapes cut out of the pastry lids.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Made with a light and crumbly pastry and flavoured with orange and cranberry, these easy mince pies will be the perfect addition to your Christmas table.

Theres no need for a food processor or mixer machine and this simple, tried and tested recipe will ensure a perfect batch every time. For an alternative why not try Frangipane mince pies.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

  • To shape the mince pies: Deep cupcake tray (you can also use a shallow mince pie tray if you would prefer shallower mince pies with less filling)
  • For the pastry base: 8cm round cutter or one that is just slightly bigger than the holes in your baking tin (for the pastry base)
  • For the pastry lid: 7cm round fluted cutter or a round fluted cutter just slightly smaller than the holes in your baking tin. Plus a small star cutter if you wish to cut a star shape into the pastry lid.

🥘 Ingredients

To make 16 mince pies you will need:

A display of all the ingredients needed to make mince pies with text overlay labelling each ingredient.

Ingredient notes

Icing sugar: Using icing sugar in pastry, instead of caster sugar, is one of the best ways to ensure a light a crumbly pastry. The fine, powdery sugar will dissolve quickly and evenly into the pastry.

Orange zest: To make these mince pies extra festive, I like to flavour the pastry with orange zest. This could be substituted with clementine or tangerine zest or completely left out if preferred.

Cranberry sauce: Cranberry sauce can be added to the mincemeat filling for a mince pie with extra Christmas flavour. Again this is completely optional but if you would like to give this a go just stir a couple of tablespoons of cranberry sauce into the mincemeat.

Eggs: Only 1 egg is required to make this pastry recipe. If the egg is particularly large you may not need all of it. So add the egg gradually and stop when the pastry starts to come together. The second egg is for glazing the pastry.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Add the flour and cold, cubed butter to a large mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the flour until a breadcrumb consistency is reached.
  2. Next add the ground almonds, icing sugar and orange zest to the bowl. Stir into the crumb until evenly mixed.
  3. Whisk one large egg in a jug then gradually add to the mixture. Mix well between each addition and stop adding the egg when the pastry starts to come together. TIP: If you have added all the egg and the pastry hasn't come together, add small spoonfuls of cold water until it does come together.
  4. Turn the pastry out onto a clean, floured work surface and shape into a ball. Wrap the pastry in cling film and place into the fridge to chill for at least 30 minutes. The colder the better!four images showing how to make Easy Mince Pies, steps 1-4.
  5. Once the pastry is well chilled, roll out on a floured work surface into a rough circle around 2-3mm thick. Work quickly and don't over handle the pastry. Warm pastry is more likely to break.
  6. Use an 8cm round cutter to cut out 16 circles for the base of each mince pie. TIP: use a size of round cutter that is slightly larger than the holes of your muffin or mince pie tray. 
  7. Gather up the leftover pastry and reshape into a ball. Then roll out again and use a 7cm round fluted cutter to cut out 16 pastry lids. For extra detail use a small star cutter to cut out star shapes in the pastry lids. TIP: save the cut out stars and bake as they are for little extra pastry treats
  8. To flavour your mincemeat with cranberries: Transfer the mincemeat to a bowl then stir in 2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce (optional).four images showing how to make Easy Mince Pies, steps 5-8.
  9. To prevent the mince pies from sticking during baking, lightly grease your cupcake or mince pie tray and lightly sprinkle with flour, tapping off the excess. Then carefully place the larger pastry circles into the holes of the tray. Push the pastry gently into the corners using your finger tips or the rounded end of a champaign cork if you have long nails.
  10. Add a spoonful of mincemeat filling to each pastry base. Don't overfill and try to keep the filling just under the top of the pastry base.
  11. Place a lid on top of each pie and gently press down so the lid touches the top edges of the base.
  12. Brush the lids of the mince pies with whisked egg then place in the oven at 170℃/340℉ and bake for 15 minutes or until golden brown.four images showing how to make Easy Mince Pies, steps 9-12.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to stop the pastry from breaking when placing in the tray holes?

Pastry is a lot easier to handle when cold. Once the pastry has been made, make sure it is well chilled for at least 30 minutes. Leave it for longer if you can. Then roll out quickly and try not to over handle the cut out circles before placing in the tray.

How should mince pies be stored?

Allow the mince pies to fully cool then wrap in foil or cling film and store in an air tight container for up to 1 week.

Can mince pies be frozen?

Freezing mince pies is a fantastic way to have homemade mince pies on hand whenever you want them. Allow the pies to fully cool then stack in a sealable container and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost, pop out as many pies as you need then leave on the side to fully defrost for a couple of hours. To reheat, place defrosted pies in a warm oven for 5 minutes.

What can I add to a jar of mincemeat?

This recipe suggests adding cranberry sauce to the mincemeat for a bit of extra Christmas flavour. Other additions could include orange zest, crushed hazelnuts, splash of rum or brandy, tinned cherries (chopped), dried apricots or some christmassy spices such as cinnamon or nutmeg.

A single mince pie on a small plate with a stack of mince pies on a cooling rack in the background.

🎄 Other Christmas recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of homemade mince pies with star shapes cut out of the pastry lids.
Print

Easy Mince Pie Recipe

A deliciously festive and easy mince pie recipe made with crumbly, orange flavoured pastry and a sweet, mincemeat and cranberry filling. The pastry can be mixed by hand in just 10 minutes and the pies themselves need just 15 minutes in the oven and can be enjoyed immediately or frozen for another time.
Course afternoon tea, Christmas, Dessert, party food, pudding, Snack
Cuisine British
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 16 Mince pies
Calories 220kcal

Ingredients

  • 250 g plain flour
  • 50 g ground almonds
  • 150 g cold cubed butter
  • 50 g icing sugar
  • 1 large egg for the pastry
  • 1 orange zested
  • 1 egg for egg wash
  • 510 g jar of mincemeat
  • 2 tablespoon cranberry sauce
  • Extra flour for dusting pastry

Instructions

  • Add the flour and cold, cubed butter to a large mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the flour until a breadcrumb consistency is reached.
  • Next add the ground almonds, icing sugar and orange zest to the bowl. Stir into the crumb until evenly mixed.
  • Whisk one large egg in a jug then gradually add to the mixture. Mix well between each addition and stop adding the egg when the pastry starts to come together. TIP: If you have added all the egg and the pastry hasn't come together, add small spoonfuls of cold water until it does come together.
  • Turn the pastry out onto a clean, floured work surface and shape into a ball. Wrap the pastry in cling film and place into the fridge to chill for at least 30 minutes. The colder the better!
  • Once the pastry is well chilled, roll out on a floured work surface into a rough circle around 2-3mm thick. Work quickly and don't over handle the pastry. Warm pastry is more likely to break.
  • Use an 8cm round cutter to cut out 16 circles for the base of each mince pie. TIP: use a size of round cutter that is slightly larger than the holes of your muffin or mince pie tray.
  • Gather up the leftover pastry and reshape into a ball. Then roll out again and use a 7cm round fluted cutter to cut out 16 pastry lids. For extra detail use a small star cutter to cut out star shapes in the pastry lids. TIP: save the cut out stars and bake as they are for little extra pastry treats
  • To flavour your mincemeat with cranberries: Transfer the mincemeat to a bowl then stir in 2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce (optional).
  • To prevent the mince pies from sticking during baking, lightly grease your cupcake or mince pie tray and lightly sprinkle with flour, tapping off the excess. Then carefully place the larger pastry circles into the holes of the tray. Push the pastry gently into the corners using your finger tips or the rounded end of a champaign cork if you have long nails.
  • Add a spoonful of mincemeat filling to each pastry base. Don't overfill and try to keep the filling just under the top of the pastry base.
  • Place a lid on top of each pie and gently press down so the lid touches the top edges of the base.
  • Brush the lids of the mince pies with whisked egg then place in the oven at 170℃/340℉ and bake for 15 minutes or until golden brown.

Video

Notes

Adding egg to pastry: Only 1 egg is required to make this pastry recipe. If the egg is particularly large you may not need all of it. So add the egg gradually and stop when the pastry starts to come together. Or if you don't have enough egg add small spoonfuls of cold water until the pastry starts to come together. 
How to stop the pastry from breaking when placing in the tray holes? Pastry is a lot easier to handle when cold. Once the pastry has been made, make sure it is well chilled for at least 30 minutes. Leave it for longer if you can. Then roll out quickly and try not to over handle the cut out circles before placing in the tray.
How should mince pies be stored? Allow the mince pies to fully cool then wrap in foil or cling film and store in an air tight container for up to 1 week.
Can mince pies be frozen? Freezing mince pies is a fantastic way to have homemade mince pies on hand whenever you want them. Allow the pies to fully cool then stack in a sealable container and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost, pop out as many pies as you need then leave on the side to fully defrost for a couple of hours. To reheat, place defrosted pies in a warm oven for 5 minutes.
What can I add to a jar of mincemeat? This recipe suggests adding cranberry sauce to the mincemeat for a bit of extra Christmas flavour. Other additions could include orange zest, crushed hazelnuts, splash of rum or brandy, tinned cherries (chopped), dried apricots or some christmassy spices such as cinnamon or nutmeg.

Nutrition

Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 239mg | Potassium: 74mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 252IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in December 2015. Updated in December 2020 with an improved recipe and new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Easy Mince Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cranberrymincepies/feed/ 8
Easy Christmas Cake Recipe https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-christmas-cake/ https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-christmas-cake/#comments Mon, 16 Nov 2020 18:23:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2869 This easy Christmas cake recipe is full of festive fruits, zesty orange peel, and hints of vanilla and chocolate. With a slightly lower fruit to cake ratio than usual and with a couple of my secret ingredients, this cake will easily take centre stage this Christmas. Whats more, it only takes half an hour to...

Read More

The post Easy Christmas Cake Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

This easy Christmas cake recipe is full of festive fruits, zesty orange peel, and hints of vanilla and chocolate. With a slightly lower fruit to cake ratio than usual and with a couple of my secret ingredients, this cake will easily take centre stage this Christmas.

Whats more, it only takes half an hour to make the cake mixture, theres no need for a food processor or mixer and, with my handy tip, the fruit can be soaked for just 15 minutes rather than overnight.

Fruit Christmas cake without icing sitting on brown paper, on a bronze cooling rack, with a slice taken

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Baking a Christmas cake can be quite a challenge, especially if you don't often find yourself making cakes. But hopefully, this simple Christmas cake guide can ease the burden and walk you through what to do at each stage. From plumping up the dried fruit to feeding your fruit cake to help keep it nice and moist. I'll also share my top tips for:

  • How to give a little boost to the flavour, with my secret ingredients, so even fruit-cake-haters will be asking for seconds.
  • How to make both a smaller 6 inch (15cm) cake or larger 8 inch (15cm) cake
  • How to line a cake tin.
  • How to make sure the outer edges of your Christmas cake don't burn in the oven.
  • How to speed up the process of soaking the dried fruits.
  • How to make the cake mixture without a mixing stand or machine.
  • How to ice and decorate your cake.

⏰ When to make your cake

No need to panic if its already December and you have yet to make your Christmas cake. This easy Christmas cake recipe tastes amazing whether its made the week before or several weeks before Christmas.

Its usual to make Christmas cake at the start of November. Allowing time for the fruit cake to rest and for the flavours to really develop. The extra time means you can also feed your cake. This involves skewering the baked fruit cake all over and drizzling over extra alcohol each week. Not only does this boost the flavour but it also helps to preserve and results in a nice moist cake.

However, if you are making this cake last minute - fear not. Feeding with alcohol is not essential and your cake will still be full of flavour.

🍽 What equipment will I need?

Equipment for making the cake:

  • One 8 inch (20cm) cake tin or two 6 inch (15cm) tins (depending on if you want to make one big cake or two small Christmas cakes)
  • Baking paper to line the tin(s)
  • Large bowl to soak fruits
  • Large bowl to mix the cake mixture
  • Skewer to test if cake is cooked through
  • Wire rack to cool

Equipment for icing the cake

🥘 Ingredients

To make one 8 inch (20cm) cake or two 6 inch (15cm) cakes you will need the following:

A display of all the ingredients needed to make a Christmas cake with text overlay labelling each ingredient.

Ingredient notes

Dried mixed fruit: This recipe uses slightly less fruit than normal in order to allow room for more cake and for some of the other flavours. The fruit can be a general mix of currants, raisins, orange peel etc or you can pick fruits specific to your taste. I like to use dried cranberries and apricots.

Alcohol: In this recipe I chose to use spiced rum as I love the slight hint of vanilla and spiced favour it adds to the fruit cake. However, you can use other spirits depending on your taste. Brandy or whiskey will also add a spice flavour, whereas Amaretto or flavoured liqueurs will add sweeter notes.

If you would prefer to make an alcohol free cake then just replace the alcohol with orange or apple juice.

Oranges: Both the zest and the juice are used in this recipe and both are added to the dried fruits, along with the alcohol for soaking. Soaking plumps up the dried fruits adding moisture and flavour. See set by step instructions below for the quickest way to soak fruits if you don't have time to leave them over night.

Secret ingredients: To really boost the flavour of this recipe I like to add two special ingredients. Cocoa powder and black treacle (not pictured). Only a small amount of each is required to give a deep, chocolatey flavour, perfect for balancing out the fruit and rum.

Both are optional but its important to note that if you decide not to add these, the treacle can just be left out but the cocoa powder must be replaced with the same amount of plain flour. In short - this recipe will work just the same with or without the treacle but cocoa must be replaced.

🎂 How to line a cake tin

This recipe is enough for one 8 inch (20cm) cake tin or two 6 inch (15cm) tins. So you can have the option to make one large cake or two small 6 inch Christmas cake (half the recipe for one small cake). Lining a cake tin is always the same no matter what the size.

For a Christmas cake its usual to double line the inside of the tin with baking paper. This is due to the amount of baking time. The extra paper helps to prevent the edges from burning. For ease I fold the paper in half before measuring and cutting.....

  1. For the tin base; fold your paper in half and then draw around the tin. You can use the inside base if your tin is slotted. Cut out to create two circles of the same size. 
  2. For the tin sides; cut a length of paper that is a little longer than the circumference of your tin. Fold this in half length ways and then fold the edge up by 2-3 cm.
  3. On the 2-3cm folded edge cut diagonally up to the fold every 3cm:
  4. Place one of the base circles in the bottom of the tin and then insert the side paper with the cut edge facing down. The diagonal cuts will overlap each other. Then place the second paper circle over the top of this to complete the lining. Four images showing how to line a cake tin step by step.

Note: the above tin also has newspaper wrapped around the outside of the tin, secured with string. This is for an extra layer of insulation to make doubly sure that the cake doesn't burn. In most cases this isn't necessary but the option is there if you want to be absolutely sure that the edges won't burn.

🔪 Step by step instructions

Note: This recipe is enough to make one 8 inch cake. If you would like to make a smaller 6 inch cake then either divide this recipe between two 6 inch cake tins or half the recipe to make just one 6 inch cake.

  1. Add the dried mixed fruit to a large mixing bowl and pour over the spiced rum, and the juice and zest of two oranges. Cover and leave to soak overnight. If you don't have time to leave overnight then transfer to a large pan and heat to a very gentle simmer for 3-4 minutes. Then remove from the heat and leave to cool for 10 minutes.
  2. Meanwhile add the butter, muscovado sugar and black treacle (if using) to a small pan. Heat gently and stir until melted. Set to one side.
  3. In a second large mixing bowl add the flour, ground almonds, cocoa powder, mixed spice and bicarb of soda. Mix together well.
  4. Next pour the melted butter, sugar and treacle into the flour mixture and stir together well.four images showing how to make Christmas cake step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Next, whisk the eggs together and gradually add to the mixture. Don't add too much in one go as the mixture may split. Stir well in between each addition.
  6. Once all the egg is combined, stir in the soaked fruits.
  7. Transfer the cake mixture to your lined tin (either one 8 inch tin or two 6 inch tins). To bake, place in the centre of a preheated oven (150°C/300°F); the 6 inch cakes for 1hr 50 minutes and the 8 inch cake for 2hrs 10 minutes. Check your cake 15 minutes before the end of these baking times by inserting a skewer into the centre, If the skewer comes out clean then its done. If not, return to the oven and check every 10 minutes until the skewer comes out clean.
  8. Place the Christmas cake, still in the tin, on a wire rack to cool. Whilst cooling skewer all over and drizzle over 2 tablespoons of spiced rum (or your preferred spirit). After half an hour or so, carefully remove from the tin and leave on the wire rack to cool completely.four images showing how to make Christmas cake step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Once cooled, wrap the cake in cling film and store in a tin. Unwrap once a week and spoon over (feed) 2 tablespoon of spiced rum (or your preferred alcohol).

🍰 Icing your Christmas cake

To help keep the fruit cake preserved until Christmas and to stick with the traditional flavours I always cover my cake with a layer of ready to roll marzipan and then a layer of ready to roll white fondant icing. Both the icing and marzipan are held in place with melted apricot jam.

To make this process easier place a blob of melted apricot jam in the centre of a silver cake board and position your Christmas cake in the middle. A cake turntable can also be helpful, but not necessary.

If your cake has a slight rise in the middle; use a cake leveller or a serrated knife and your best judgement to slice off the top of the raised part. The whole cake can then be turned upside down and the flat bottom now becomes the top.

  1. Soften both the fondant icing and marzipan by kneading well. Roll both into circles, 2-3mm thick. Melt the apricot jam in a small pan and then allow to cool slightly. Use a pastry brush to paste the jam all over the surface of the cake. Lift the marzipan up with a rolling pin and then position over the top. Stretch the 'skirt' of the marzipan out slightly and then back in, to tuck in evenly. Then use a knife to score and remove the excess.
  2. Paint over a further layer of jam and repeat the process with the icing. At this stage an icing smoother can be used to remove any lumps and smooth off the icing.
  3. Decorate the cake. I like to make sugared pecans and chocolate stars. They are so simple to make but look so effective.
  4. Use icing sugar mixed with water to position the sugared pecans and then balance the chocolate stars in between and on top of the pecans.Four images showing how to ice and decorate a Christmas cake step by step for instructions 1-4

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you feed fruit cake?

Skewer the baked fruit cake all over. Be careful to only skewer ¾ of the way down the fruitcake and not right to the bottom. The use a tablespoon to carefully drizzle spoonfuls of spiced rum (or your referred spirit) over and into the skewered holes.

How often should I feed my cake?

This depends on how much time you have until Christmas and how boozy you want your cake. If you make your cake at the start of November or earlier you can feed it with 2 tablespoon alcohol once a week. If you make the fruit cake just before Christmas then feed every day or every other day until iced.

How do you keep fruit cake moist?

Soaking fruit overnight before starting this recipe ensures that the fruits are packed full of liquid. This means that the fruit won't suck any extra moisture out of the cake during and after baking. Feeding your Christmas cake regularly after baking will also help to keep it moist as well as building up the flavour.

How long does this cake last?

Christmas cake is one of those recipe that was designed to last a long time. Fruit cake is so dense and full of alcohol that it will keep itself well preserved for a good 3 months. And in fact the longer you leave it the better it gets, which is why you'll find some people baking their Christmas cake in October.

You should however, store the Christmas cake well during this time. Wrap in at least 2 layers of cling film or foil and then place in a cake tin with lid.
The icing however is a different story and is better left until the week before Christmas. This also means your can continue to feed your cake (see above) right up until a few days before Christmas.

Can you freeze fruit cake?

As Christmas cake keeps well for so long there is really no need to freeze it. The dense cake filled with fruit and alcohol will self preserve for at least 3 months. Just keep it well wrapped.

If you want to keep it longer than this, I would only freeze fruit cake if it has not yet been iced. The icing will not freeze and defrost well. If your cake is still un-iced then wrap well in two layers of cling film and place in the freezer for up to 6 months. To defrost leave out on the side over night.

Fruit Christmas cake without icing sitting on brown paper, on a bronze cooling rack, with orange zest and a gold spoon in background.

🍰 Other easy baking recipes

Not sure about taking on a full Christmas cake? Why not start small and try Christmas Cake muffins instead? Or how about something even more chocolatey and far less fruity: chocolate brownies recipe or brownie chocolate muffins. Or for a real Christmassy treat why not try roast chestnuts at home!

If you're looking for a bake that is completely different then why not try lemon drizzle cake, bakewell tart, apple crumble, plum and rhubarb crumble, banana bread, Banana cake, Yorkshire parkin or sticky apple treacle tart.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Fruit Christmas cake without icing sitting on brown paper, on a bronze cooling rack, with a slice taken
Print

Easy Christmas Cake Recipe

This easy Christmas cake recipe is full of festive fruits, zesty orange peel and hints of vanilla and chocolate. With a slightly lower fruit to cake ratio than usual and with a couple of my secret ingredients this cake will easily take centre stage this Christmas. Whats more, it only takes half an hour to make the cake mixture, theres no need for a food processor or mixer and the fruit can be soaked for just 15 minutes rather than overnight. See above for addition instructions on lining a cake tin and icing and decorating a Christmas cake.
Course christmas dinner, Dessert
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours 10 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 40 minutes
Servings 12 people (One 8 inch cake)
Calories 512kcal

Equipment

  • One 8 inch (20cm) cake tin or two 6 inch (15cm) tins (depending on if you want to make one big cake or two small Christmas cakes)
  • Baking paper to line the tin(s)
  • Large bowl to soak fruits
  • Large bowl to mix the cake mixture
  • Skewer to test if cake is cooked through
  • Wire rack to cool

Ingredients

  • 500 g dried mixed fruit
  • 200 ml spiced rum or your preferred spirit
  • 2 juiced and zested oranges
  • 250 g unsalted butter
  • 250 g light brown muscovado sugar
  • 2 tablespoon black treacle
  • 225 g plain flour
  • 75 g ground almonds
  • 25 g cocoa powder
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ¼ teaspoon bicarbonate of soda
  • 4 eggs

Instructions

  • Add the dried mixed fruit to a large mixing bowl and pour over the spiced rum, and the juice and zest of two oranges. Cover and leave to soak overnight. If you don't have time to leave overnight then transfer to a large pan and heat to a very gentle simmer for 3-4 minutes. Then remove from the heat and leave to cool for 10 minutes.
  • Meanwhile add the butter, muscovado sugar and black treacle (if using) to a small pan. Heat gently and stir until melted. Set to one side.
  • In a second large mixing bowl add the flour, ground almonds, cocoa powder, mixed spice and bicarb of soda. Mix together well.
  • Next pour the melted butter, sugar and treacle into the flour mixture and stir together well.
  • Next, whisk the eggs together and gradually add to the mixture. Don't add too much in one go as the mixture may split. Stir well in between each addition.
  • Once all the egg is combined, stir in the soaked fruits.
  • Transfer the cake mixture to your lined tin (either one 8 inch tin or two 6 inch tins). To bake, place in the centre of a preheated oven (150°C/300°F); the 6 inch cakes for 1hr 50 minutes and the 8 inch cake for 2hrs 10 minutes. Check your cake 15 minutes before the end of these baking times by inserting a skewer into the centre, If the skewer comes out clean then its done. If not, return to the oven and check every 10 minutes until the skewer comes out clean.
  • Place the Christmas cake, still in the tin, on a wire rack to cool. Whilst cooling skewer all over and drizzle over 2 tablespoons of spiced rum (or your preferred spirit). After half an hour or so, carefully remove from the tin and leave on the wire rack to cool completely.
  • Once cooled, wrap the cake in cling film and store in a tin. Unwrap once a week and spoon over (feed) 2 tablespoon of spiced rum (or your preferred alcohol).

Video

Notes

Secret ingredients: To really boost the flavour of this recipe I like to add two special ingredients. Cocoa powder and black treacle. Only a small amount of each is required to give a deep, chocolatey flavour, perfect for balancing out the fruit and rum.
Both are optional but its important to note that if you decide not to add these, the treacle can just be left out but the cocoa powder must be replaced with the same amount of plain flour. In short - this recipe will work just the same with or without the treacle but cocoa must be replaced.
How do you feed fruit cake?
Skewer the baked fruit cake all over. Be careful to only skewer ¾ of the way down the fruitcake and not right to the bottom. The use a tablespoon to carefully drizzle spoonfuls of spiced rum (or your referred spirit) over and into the skewered holes.
How often should I feed my cake?
This depends on how much time you have until Christmas and how boozy you want your cake. If you make your cake at the start of November or earlier you can feed it with 2 tablespoon alcohol once a week. If you make the fruit cake just before Christmas then feed every day or every other day until iced.
How do you keep fruit cake moist?
Soaking fruit overnight before starting this recipe ensures that the fruits are packed full of liquid. This means that the fruit won't suck any extra moisture out of the cake during and after baking. Feeding your Christmas cake regularly after baking will also help to keep it moist as well as building up the flavour.
How long does this cake last?
Christmas cake is one of those recipe that was designed to last a long time. Fruit cake is so dense and full of alcohol that it will keep itself well preserved for a good 3 months. And in fact the longer you leave it the better it gets, which is why you'll find some people baking their Christmas cake in October.
You should however, store the Christmas cake well during this time. Wrap in at least 2 layers of cling film or foil and then place in a cake tin with lid.
The icing however is a different story and is better left until the week before Christmas. This also means your can continue to feed your cake (see above) right up until a few days before Christmas.
Can you freeze fruit cake?
As Christmas cake keeps well for so long there is really no need to freeze it. The dense cake filled with fruit and alcohol will self preserve for at least 3 months. Just keep it well wrapped.

Nutrition

Serving: 265g | Calories: 512kcal | Carbohydrates: 67g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 99mg | Sodium: 61mg | Potassium: 443mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 605IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 136mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in November 2016. Updated in November 2020 with new images, an improved recipe, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips.

The post Easy Christmas Cake Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-christmas-cake/feed/ 27
Cinnamon Swirls https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/ https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/#respond Thu, 12 Nov 2020 22:18:57 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16341 Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post Cinnamon Swirls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea.

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows with icing on the top and one roll broken off with a bite taken.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These rather impressive looking cinnamon swirls are actually really easy to make. With a foolproof method and 10 minute dough recipe that produces soft and fluffy rolls every time.

You don't need a bread machine and theres no need to activate the yeast before adding it to the flour. This is a simple method of adding wet ingredients to dry and bringing it all together into the most perfect and fluffy cinnamon swirls.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a 9x9 inch tin of Cinnamon rolls (9 rolls in a tin) you will need:

Ingredients needed to make nine cinnamon swirls, all lined up side by side in individual bowls

Ingredient notes

Strong white bread flour: Its quite important that the right kind of flour is used for this recipe. Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy cinnamon roll.

Dark brown sugar: Soft dark brown sugar works best in this recipe as it easily mixes and dissolves into the butter. The brown sugar also has a lovely toffee flavour and the darker colour makes the swirl stand out more against the plain bread. Light brown muscovado sugar would also work well here.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

Icing - Topping the swirls with icing is completely optional, but I feel icing is a must when it comes to cinnamon swirls. Icing can be piped or drizzled on. Or if you prefer you can add more water to make a thinner icing and then brush over the swirls to create an icing glaze.

If you aren't a fan of icing you could create an apricot glaze instead. To do this heat half a jar of apricot jam in a small pan until its nice and runny. Then brush the jam over the cinnamon swirls after they have been taken out of the oven and whilst they are still warm.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Melt the butter and milk over a low heat in a small pan.
  2. In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt.
  3. Gradually pour the melted butter and milk into the dry ingredients. Stir well between each addition to eventually form a dough.
  4. Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 2-3 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.4 images showing steps 1-4 for making Cinnamon rolls: 1. Melt butter into milk in a pan, 2. mix flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt, 3. pour pan mixture into dry ingredients and form a dough, 4. Turn out and knead dough.
  5. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover.
  6. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  7. Meanwhile mix together the dark brown sugar and cinnamon. Put to one side.
  8. After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Then flour a rolling pin and roll into a rough rectangle 2-3mm thick.4 images showing steps 5-8 for making Cinnamon rolls: 5. Place dough in oiled bowl and cover, 6. leave to rise to double in size, 7. mix cinnamon and dark brown sugar, 8. roll out dough into rectangle 2-3 mm thick.
  9. Use the back of a spoon to spread the softened butter over the surface of the rolled out dough.
  10. Next sprinkle the cinnamon sugar over the buttered dough and gently push into the butter with your fingertips,
  11. Roll up the dough starting from the short side. Roll nice and tight.
  12. Slice off the rough edges at either side of the rolled up dough. Then roughly mark out nine pieces before slicing into nine rolls with a sharp knife.4 images showing steps 9-12 for making Cinnamon Swirls: 9. spread butter on rolled out dough, 10. sprinkle cinnamon sugar over butter, 11. Roll up, 12. slice into 9 even swirls.
  13. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper. Then place the 9 rolls into the tin, swirls facing up. Cover and leave to rise again for 30 minutes.
  14. Whisk up the egg. Uncover the cinnamon swirls and brush with the egg. Place the cinnamon swirls in the preheated oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.2 images showing steps 13 & 14 for making Cinnamon rolls: 13. Place swirls in baking tin, 14. Bake until golden brown

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should baked cinnamon swirls be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The rolls will keep well and stay soft for 3-4 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made ahead of time?

Theres nothing better than fresh cinnamon swirls first thing in the morning. However, you'd have to get up super early to achieve this if making from scratch. Thankfully this recipe can be made the night before, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn.

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the sliced rolls are placed into the baking tin. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The rolls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Glaze with whisked egg before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can you freeze cinnamon swirls?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the swirls in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months.

When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each roll for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows of three. Golden brown and lying on top of brown paper.

🍰 Other easy baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows with icing on the top and one roll broken off with a bite taken.
Print

Cinnamon Swirls

Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough, no dough hook or bread machine needed! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch
Cuisine Danish, Scandinavian, Swiss
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
dough rising time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 25 minutes
Servings 9 Swirls
Calories 440kcal

Equipment

  • Small saucepan
  • Large mixing bowl
  • cling film
  • Small mixing bowl
  • rolling pin
  • Sharp knife
  • 9x9 inch square tine lined with greaseproof paper
  • Pastry brush for egg wash

Ingredients

For the bread:

  • 200 ml Semi skimmed 2% milk
  • 100 g unsalted butter cubed
  • 500 g strong white bread flour US: Bread flour
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt

For the filling:

  • 75 g softened butter
  • 75 g dark brown sugar or muscovado sugar
  • 2 tablespoon ground cinnamon

Toppings:

  • 1 whisked egg to glaze
  • Icing sugar to ice or apricot jam for an apricot glaze

Instructions

  • Melt the butter and milk over a low heat in a small pan.
  • In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt.
  • Gradually pour the melted butter and milk into the dry ingredients. Stir well between each addition to eventually form a dough.
  • Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 2-3 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.
  • Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover.
  • Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • Meanwhile mix together the dark brown sugar and cinnamon. Put to one side.
  • After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Then flour a rolling pin and roll into a rough rectangle 2-3mm thick.
  • Use the back of a spoon to spread the softened butter over the surface of the rolled out dough.
  • Next sprinkle the cinnamon sugar over the buttered dough and gently push into the butter with your fingertips.
  • Roll up the dough starting from the short side. Roll nice and tight.
  • Slice off the rough edges at either side of the rolled up dough. Then roughly mark out nine pieces before slicing into nine rolls with a sharp knife.
  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper. Then place the 9 rolls into the tin, swirls facing up. Cover and leave to rise again for 30 minutes.
  • Whisk up the egg. Uncover the cinnamon swirls and brush with the egg. Place the cinnamon swirls in the preheated oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Once cooled ice with icing sugar or brush over heated apricot jam.

Video

Notes

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Substitutes: For perfect fluffy rolls its best to not substitute the bread flour. Bread flour has a higher protein content so gives a better rise.
How should baked cinnamon swirls be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The rolls will keep well and stay soft for 3-4 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made ahead of time? This recipe can be made the night before, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn for breakfast cinnamon swirls. Make the recipe as per the instructions, up to when the sliced rolls are placed into the baking tin. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The rolls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Glaze with whisked egg before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can you freeze cinnamon swirls? Once baked and fully cooled, place the swirls in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each roll for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 440kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 535IU | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cinnamon Swirls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/feed/ 0
Aubergine Parmigiana https://properfoodie.com/aubergine-parmigiana/ https://properfoodie.com/aubergine-parmigiana/#respond Fri, 11 Oct 2019 10:36:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11314 Aubergine parmigiana or melanzane parmigiana is one of the best recipes for getting the most out of your aubergines. The thinly sliced and pan fried aubergines are layered with a rich tomato sauce and freshly grated parmesan for a dish that is bursting with Italian flavour. Serve this simple aubergine parmigiana recipe as it is,...

Read More

The post Aubergine Parmigiana appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Aubergine parmigiana or melanzane parmigiana is one of the best recipes for getting the most out of your aubergines. The thinly sliced and pan fried aubergines are layered with a rich tomato sauce and freshly grated parmesan for a dish that is bursting with Italian flavour. Serve this simple aubergine parmigiana recipe as it is, or pad it out with an extra layer of cooked spaghetti added to the base of the baking dish.

aubergine parmigiana recipe

Easy Aubergine Parmigiana

For a rich and satisfying meal, full of flavour and packed full veg, the aubergine parmigiana is a clear winner. Its made by layering the aubergine with an Italian tomato sauce and then topping with sliced tomatoes, breadcrumbs and blobs of mozzarella. As soon as I pulled this incredible Italian bake out of my oven I knew that Aubergine parmigiana with crispy breadcrumbs and melted mozzarella was about to become a new favourite. Having said that, nearly all of my Italian recipes are my favourite - the Italians are just too clever 🙂

This aubergine recipe is also really easy to make, its all in the preparation. To ensure that your parmigiana is full of flavour and not full of water (from the aubergines) its best to fry off the aubergine slices and then allow them to cool and drain before layering up in the baking dish. I promise this is the only part that requires a bit of time and effort. After that its just a case of whipping up a quick tomato sauce, layering all the ingredients, adding a topping and then baking for 20 minutes.

Aubergine parmigiana also doubles up as a fantastic vegetarian lasagna. Just remember to use vegetarian parmesan cheese and for an added indulgence add in a couple of layers of bechamel white sauce. To keep this gluten free check the bechamel sauce for any flour and look for a gluten free alternative (or make your own). And either leave off the breadcrumbs or look for gluten free breadcrumbs.

Why is it called Aubergine Parmigiana?

Aubergine Parmigiana or eggplant parmigiana is the original parmigiana recipe that is said to have been created in southern Italy. However, the precise origins of the dish and how it got its name are widely debated. Many regions across Italy claim to have invented the dish and each produce their own classic and delicious variation of aubergine parmigiana (Melanzane alla parmigiana).

The word parmigiana translates to 'from Parma'. However, most believe that this is not the reasoning behind the name, as the dish is known to be from southern Italy and Parma is in Northern Italy.  Some believe that the dish may have originated from Sicily where 'Parmiciana' means slats of wood in the wooden shutters, which could be reminiscent of the overlapping aubergine in this recipe. Another more simple meaning to the name is the use of Parmesan cheese (Parmigiano-reggiano) in the dish.

aubergine bake

Ingredients for Aubergine Parmigiana Recipe

To keep this dish as simple as possible I've divided the ingredients up into 3 parts: the aubergine, the sauce, and the toppings. Prepare each part of the recipe in this order.

For pan frying the aubergine:

  • 3-4 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large aubergines (600g) sliced length ways and half a cm thick
  • Few pinches of salt

For the aubergine parmigiana sauce:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Clove garlic finely chopped
  • 1 Large onion (150g) diced
  • 1 teaspoon Dried oregano
  • 690g jar of Passata

For the topping:

  • 6 medium tomatoes (300g) finely sliced
  • 30g Breadcrumbs (or gluten free breadcrumbs)
  • 50g grated parmesan (or vegetarian parmesan)
  • 100g buffalo mozzarella roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves

Easy aubergine parmigiana

How to make Aubergine Parmigiana

Preparing the aubergine:

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat. Add a tablespoon of oil and allow to heat up. When the oil is hot carefully add the aubergine slices and fry on each side until golden brown. You will need to fry these off in batches as only 3 or 4 slices will fit in the pan at any one time. You can add more oil as required and season each batch with a bit of salt.frying aubergine slices
  2. After each batch of aubergine has finished cooking carefully remove from the pan and leave to drain on a plate lined with kitchen towel.

Preparing the aubergine parmigiana sauce:

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat (use same pan from previous step to save on washing up) then add half a tablespoon of oil and the finely chopped garlic. Fry for 10 seconds then add the diced onion and fry until soft. Next add a teaspoon of dried oregano and mix in well.cooking garlic onions and oregano
  2. Pour in a large 690g jar of passata and stir into the cooked onions.adding large jar of passata
  3. Season with black pepper and allow to simmer for 5 minutes.sauce simmering and black pepper being added

Putting together the aubergine parmigiana:

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
  2. For this next step you will need a medium sized square or rectangular baking dish. I used a 20x24cm rectangular dish.
  3. Begin by placing a layer of cooked aubergine in the based of the dish.adding first layer of aubergines to base of the baking dish
  4. Next add a layer of the tomato sauce and sprinkle over 1-2 tablespoons of grated parmesan, continue to layer like this until all the aubergine, sauce and parmesan has been used.continuing to layer aubergine with tomato sauce and parmesan
  5. Finish with a final layer of sliced tomatoes.adding a final layer of sliced tomatoes
  6. Then top with breadcrumbs, parmesan and torn pieces of mozzarella.topping with breadcrumbs parmesan and mozzarella
  7. Place the baking dish in the centre of the oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the mozzarella has turned golden brown and the sauce is bubbling.
  8. Remove from the oven, top with fresh basil leaves and serve.serving with fresh basil leaves

What to serve with Aubergine Parmigiana?

The the best thing to serve with aubergine parmigiana is a big bowl of spaghetti in a tomato sauce. If you have the time, make the spaghetti in tomato sauce first and then use a slightly deeper baking dish in order to add the spaghetti to the dish before layering on the aubergine and other ingredients. The whole lot can then be baked and served together. Delicious!!

This lovely bake can also be served with a simple salad or for a bit of protein add a layer of sliced chicken to the bake. For a proper chicken parmigiana, coat the chicken in flour, egg and breadcrumbs first.

Eggplant parmigiana

Can you freeze Aubergine Parmigiana?

For best results freeze the aubergine parmigiana without baking it. Once the parmigiana is layered up in an oven proof dish, allow to fully cool then seal with a lid or cling film and place in the freezer. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and defrost fully then bake at 180 degrees (fan) for 30 minutes or until piping hot throughout.

Can I prepare aubergine Parmigiana in advance?

If preparing in advanced once you have made up the parmigiana in the baking dish it can be placed in the fridge until you are ready to bake it. As the dish will now be chilled, add an extra 10 minutes to the baking time.

Baked aubergine parmigiana

What else can you do with Aubergines?

One of the most simple and satisfying recipes for aubergine is this Simon Hopkinson grilled aubergine and feta cheese recipe. I love to serve this as starter at a dinner party. To make this delicious starter you will need one aubergine per person. Start by scoring the skin with a knife in four places along the length of the aubergine then rub oil all over the skin. Then place on a baking tray and bake at 180 degrees for 20-30 minutes or until the skin is charred. Cool and then peel off the skin (the scoring should help with this). With the stem still in place slice the peeled aubergine in half with the top end held together by the stem. Lay the aubergine flat on a small plate with the two halves next to each other.  In a small dish mix together olive oil, chopped parsley and chopped garlic then drizzle over the aubergine. Finally crumble over some feta cheese and serve.

I also love to use aubergine to make my meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry - These are proper Italian pies!

 1 hour to produce recipeunder 400 calories recipe5 of 5 day in this recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

vegetarian lasagna
Print

Aubergine Parmigiana

Aubergine parmigiana or melanzane parmigiana is one of the best recipes for getting the most out of your aubergines. The thinly sliced and pan fried aubergines are layered with a rich tomato sauce and freshly grated parmesan for a dish that is bursting with Italian flavour. Serve this simple aubergine parmigiana recipe as it is, or pad it out with an extra layer of cooked spaghetti added to the base of the baking dish. 
Course Main Course, Side Dish
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 40 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 318.6kcal

Equipment

  • Large frying pan
  • medium baking dish (24x20cm)

Ingredients

For the aubergine:

  • 3-4 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large aubergines (600g sliced length ways and half a cm thick)
  • Few pinches of salt

For the sauce:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Clove garlic finely chopped
  • 1 Large onion diced (150g)
  • 1 teaspoon Dried oregano
  • 690 g jar of Passata
  • Black pepper

For the topping:

  • 6 medium tomatoes sliced (300g)
  • 30 g Breadcrumbs (or gluten free breadcrumbs)
  • 50 g grated parmesan (or vegetarian parmesan)
  • 100 g buffalo mozzarella roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves

Instructions

Preparing the aubergine:

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat. Add a tablespoon of oil and allow to heat up. When the oil is hot carefully add the aubergine slices and fry on each side until golden brown. You will need to fry these off in batches as only 3 or 4 slices will fit in the pan at any one time. You can add more oil as required and season each batch with a bit of salt.
    frying aubergine slices
  • After each batch of aubergine has finished cooking carefully remove from the pan and leave to drain on a plate lined with kitchen towel.

Preparing the aubergine parmigiana sauce:

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat (use same pan from previous step to save on washing up) then add half a tablespoon of oil and the finely chopped garlic. Fry for 10 seconds then add the diced onion and fry until soft. Next add a teaspoon of dried oregano and mix well.
    cooking garlic onions and oregano
  • Next pour in a large 690g jar of passata and stir into the cooked onions
    adding large jar of passata
  • Season with black pepper and allow to simmer for 5 minutes.
    sauce simmering and black pepper being added

Putting together the aubergine parmigiana:

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
  • For this next step you will need a medium sized square or rectangular baking dish. I used a 20x24cm rectangular dish.
  • Begin by placing a layer of cooked aubergine in the based of the dish.
    adding first layer of aubergines to base of the baking dish
  • Then add a layer of the tomato sauce and sprinkle over 1-2 tablespoons of grated parmesan, continue to layer like this until all the aubergine, sauce and parmesan has been used.
    continuing to layer aubergine with tomato sauce and parmesan
  • Finish with a final layer of sliced tomatoes.
    adding a final layer of sliced tomatoes
  • Then top with breadcrumbs, parmesan and torn pieces of mozzarella.
    topping with breadcrumbs parmesan and mozzarella
  • Place the baking dish in the centre of the oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the mozzarella has turned golden brown and the sauce is bubbling.
  • Remove from the oven, top with fresh basil leaves and serve.
    serving with fresh basil leaves

Video

Notes

Nutritional information for aubergine parmigiana

Can you freeze Aubergine Parmigiana?

For best results freeze the aubergine parmigiana without baking it. Once the parmigiana is layered up in an oven proof dish, allow to fully cool then seal with a lid or cling film and place in the freezer. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and defrost fully then bake at 180 degrees (fan) for 30 minutes or until piping hot throughout.

Can I prepare aubergine Parmigiana in advance?

If preparing in advanced once you have made up the parmigiana in the baking dish it can be placed in the fridge until you are ready to bake it. As the dish will now be chilled, add an extra 10 minutes to the baking time.

What else can you do with Aubergines?

One of the most simple and satisfying recipes for aubergine is baked aubergine and feta cheese. I love to serve this as starter at a dinner party. To make this delicious starter you will need one aubergine per person. Start by scoring the skin with a knife in four places along the length of the aubergine then rub oil all over the skin. Then place on a baking tray and bake at 180 degrees for 20-30 minutes or until the skin is charred. Cool and then peel off the skin (the scoring should help with this). With the stem still in place slice the peeled aubergine in half with the top end held together by the stem still. In a small dish mix together olive oil, chopped parsley and chopped garlic then drizzle over the aubergine. Finally crumble over some feta cheese and serve.
I also love to use aubergine to make my meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry - These are proper Italian pies! 

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 318.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 20.9g | Protein: 14.3g | Fat: 20.4g | Saturated Fat: 7.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9.9g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 3.9g | Sugar: 14.7g

PIN FOR LATER

Italian aubergine parmigiana with crispy breadcrumbs and melted mozzarella

The post Aubergine Parmigiana appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/aubergine-parmigiana/feed/ 0
Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/#comments Thu, 29 Oct 2020 01:37:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5236 No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to...

Read More

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a second bowl of soup in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasting a huge pumpkin and then turning it into soup is so, so satisfying, especially at this time of year when pumpkins are absolutely everywhere. With the nights drawing in and the weather turning colder its so nice to embrace the change and sit down to a warming bowl of homemade roast pumpkin soup.

Pumpkin and chestnuts are such a wonderful combination and it works so well here. Once the two ingredients have been roasted and then blended together they create a sweet and creamy flavour. A delightful earthiness comes from the pumpkin with a smokey taste in the background from the roast chestnuts.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this roast pumpkin soup for 4 people you will need:

The ingredients required to make spiced pumpkin soup, labelled with white text.

Ingredient notes

Pumpkin: The good old pumpkin is actually a type of winter squash and so any variety of winter squash will work well here. So if you're fresh out of pumpkins, substitute with butternut squash. Use either 2 small squash or 1 medium squash.

Alternatively, if you want to make this soup in double quick time, you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree.

Chestnuts: This recipe uses raw shelled chestnuts, which need to be roasted and the shells removed. See how to roast chestnuts for instructions. However, if you prefer you can buy and use pre cooked chestnuts with the shells removed (this will be quicker and easier, but I do enjoying roasting chestnuts myself at this time of year!)

If you can't get hold of any chestnuts, replace with nuts of a similar flavour such as hazelnuts or pecans.

Cream: The cream in this recipe is completely optional. I love to add it in right at the end to lighten up the soup and to make it super creamy. However, the chestnuts alone provide a creaminess to this soup. So if you want to keep things a little healthier, just remove the cream.

🔪 Step by step instructions

If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts.

  1. Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with a little oil
  2. Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  3. Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  4. Remove the roast pumpkin from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.A collage of four step by step images of how to make the first part of the pumpkin soup recipe. 1. prepare pumpkin, 2. roast pumpkin, 3. fry onions, 4. add roast pumpkin and chopped chestnuts to onions.
  5. Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  6. Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  7. Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth.
  8. Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.Second 4 step by step instruction images for making pumpkin soup: 5. add spices, 6. add stock, 7. blend, 8. add cream.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can this soup be frozen?

If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.

Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.

Why should I roast the pumpkin?

Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.

Can spices be added to this soup?

This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Pumpkin soup being ladled into a bowl

🍂 Other Autumn recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a sprinkle of pumpkin seeds and parsley.
Print

Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roasted pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Soup, starter
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 552kcal

Equipment

  • Baking trays for roasting pumpkin and chestnuts
  • Extra large pan for making soup
  • Hand blender or blending machine

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon oil
  • 2 small or 1 medium pumpkin or 2 tins of pumpkin puree
  • 2 onions peeled and diced
  • 400 g raw shells on chestnuts or 200g cooked de-shelled chestnuts
  • 1 teaspoon oregano
  • 1 teaspoon sage
  • 2 vegetable stock cubes
  • Salt and pepper
  • 800 ml boiling water
  • 250 ml single cream
  • Pumpkin seeds and chopped parsley to serve

Instructions

  • If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts. Roughly chop up roasted chestnuts before adding to the recipe.
  • Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with 1 tablespoon oil
  • Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  • Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in 1 tablespoon oil a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  • When the pumpkin is cooked, remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the pumpkin flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.
  • Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  • Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  • Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth. (Note: if soup needs reheating after blending, return to the pan and heat to a gentle simmer. Do not boil.)
  • Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.

Notes

Substitutions:
  • Pumpkins can be replaced with any kind of winter squash or if you’re in a rush and don’t have time to roast the squash you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree instead.
  • If you can’t get hold of raw chestnuts or don’t have the to roast them you an replace with re-cooked and shelled chestnuts. Or completely replace chestnuts with hazelnuts or pecans.
  • For a healthier version leave out the cream
 
Can this soup be frozen?
If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.
Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.
Why should I roast the pumpkin?
Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.
Can spices be added to this soup?
This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 552kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 2204mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 43218IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 192mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with an improved recipe, new images, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips & FAQs.

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/feed/ 8
How To Roast Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/ https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/#respond Sun, 25 Oct 2020 17:13:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16203 Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. This easy step by step guide will show you how to roast chestnuts at home without too much hassle or anguish. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post How To Roast Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. This easy step by step guide will show you how to roast chestnuts at home without too much hassle or anguish. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter.

Bowl of roasted and peeled chestnuts with autumnal leaves lining the bowl.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasted chestnuts are as traditional as you can get when it comes to Christmas and food. There is something so delightful and christmassy about the woody, smokey smell that only roasted chestnuts create.

If you have ever wanted to roast your own chestnuts or wondered how to roast chestnuts then this step by step, easy recipe is for you. And by the way....its super simple!

🥘 Ingredients

Theres is nothing complicated or fancy about roasting chestnuts. You just need.....raw chestnuts with their shells on and a pan of water.

Ingredients for roast chestnuts: Bowl of chestnuts with shells on.

Ingredient notes

Chestnuts: Select chestnuts that are firm with a nice rounded shape. Flatter chestnuts tend to be more difficult to cut and peel.

Amount of chestnuts: Once chestnuts are roasted and peeled and ones that won't peel or are bad have been discarded, you are left with around half the weight of what you started with. Therefore buy double the amount of what you like to end up with.

Water: Simmering the chestnuts in water before roasting will help to separate the shells from the nut and will allow the chestnuts to steam once in the oven.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. The most important step in this process, before you do anything, is to slice into the chestnut shells. Use a serrated knife and firmly hold the nut between your thumb and fingers (making a bridge over the knife). Slice one way and then the other to create a cross. Then turn over and do the same on the other side.
  2. Next place the prepared chestnuts into a small pan and cover with boiling water. Place on a medium heat and simmer gently for 5 minutes.
  3. Drain the nuts and transfer to a tray then place in a preheated oven (200°C/392°F) and roast for 15 minutes.
  4. Remove the nuts from the oven and transfer to a bowl. Cover with a towel and leave for 10 minutes to continue steaming.Images of how to roast chestnuts for steps 1-4: 1. slice a cross into the shells, 2. place chestnuts in a pan with boiling water and simmer for 5 minutes, 3. transfer nuts to a tray and roast for 15 minutes, 4. leave to steam in a bowl covered with a towel.
  5. Uncover the bowl after 10 minutes and check that the shells are starting to open.
  6. Peel and remove the shells, discarding any that won't peel or that appear to be bad.Images of how to roast chestnuts for steps 5-6: 5. Uncover chestnuts and check shells have started to open. 6. Peel and remove the shells discarding and that won't de-shell or that appear to be bad.

💭 Expert tips

  • Score a cross in both sides of the chestnut shell. This ensures that the water gets in all around the nut and fully steams once in the oven. This will help when peeling.
  • When scoring in the crosses make sure to cut all the way through the shell and reach the kernel.
  • Once roasted, transfer the chestnuts to a bowl and cover immediately to trap the heat and continue the steaming process.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to serve?

Roasted chestnuts are a fantastic snack and great to nibble on just as they are. Serve with the shells on or off and place in a brown paper bag for that extra touch of authenticity.

Do you have to soak chestnuts before roasting?

Strictly speaking you don't have to soak and simmer chestnuts before roasting. However, skipping this step will make it much harder to peel the nuts.

How long do chestnuts last?

Uncooked and unpeeled chestnuts will keep for 2-3 weeks when stored in a dry and well ventilated place. Cooked chestnuts should be stored in the fridge and will keep for 2-3 days.

What else can you do with roasted chestnuts?

Chestnuts can be a great addition to autumnal and winter dishes. Try in a salad or add to a stuffing mix. I also use roasted chestnuts in my roast pumpkin soup recipe.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of roasted and peeled chestnuts with autumnal leaves lining the bowl.
Print

How To Roast Chestnuts

Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter.
Course Snack
Cuisine British
Diet Diabetic, Gluten Free, Low Salt
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 392kcal

Equipment

  • Small sauce pan
  • Large bowl
  • Tea towel

Ingredients

  • 400 g raw chestnuts with shells on
  • Boiling water from the kettle

Instructions

  • The most important step in this process, before you do anything, is to slice into the chestnut shells. Use a serrated knife and firmly hold the nut between your thumb and fingers (making a bridge over the knife). Slice one way and then the other to create a cross in the shell. Then turn over and do the same on the other side. Repeat for all nuts.
  • Next place the prepared chestnuts into a small pan and cover with boiling water. Place on a medium heat and simmer gently for 5 minutes.
  • Drain the nuts and transfer to a tray then place in a preheated oven (200°C/392°F) and roast for 15 minutes.
  • Remove the nuts from the oven and transfer to a bowl. Cover with a towel and leave for 10 minutes to continue steaming. Uncover the bowl after 10 minutes and check that the shells are starting to open.
  • Peel and remove the shells, discarding any that won't de-shell or that appear to be bad.
  • Serve with the shells on or off and place in a brown paper bag for that extra touch of authenticity.

Notes

Chestnuts: Select chestnuts that are firm with a nice rounded shape. Buy double the amount of what you like to end up with.
(Once chestnuts are roasted and peeled and ones that won't peel or are bad have been discarded, you are left with around half the weight of what you started with).
Water: Simmering the chestnuts in water before roasting will help to separate the shells from the nut and will allow the chestnuts to steam once in the oven.
Do you have to soak chestnuts before roasting? Strictly speaking you don't have to soak and simmer chestnuts before roasting. However, skipping this step will make it much harder to remove the shells from the nuts.
Storage: Uncooked and unpeeled chestnuts will keep for 2-3 weeks when stored in a dry and well ventilated place. Cooked chestnuts should be stored in the fridge and will keep for 2-3 days.
What else can I do with roast chestnuts? Chestnuts can be a great addition to autumnal and winter dishes. Try in a salad or add to a stuffing mix. I also use roasted chestnuts in my spiced pumpkin soup recipe.

Nutrition

Serving: 150g | Calories: 392kcal | Carbohydrates: 88g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 968mg | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Roast Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/feed/ 0
Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/ https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/#comments Thu, 16 Jun 2016 12:41:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1920 Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from...

Read More

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup

This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from the tomatoes and the peppery anise from the basil. It really is a heavenly bowl of slurpful, deliciousness.

Rosted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup
Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup

I decided it was time to get back into soup-making a few weekends ago, as summer is now here and I can no longer get away with hiding under huge jumpers and saying that I need that extra layer of fat to keep me warm. Yes its definitely time to trim up. I always find the best way to do this is with soups and salads. But only with the best and most tastiest soups and salads, otherwise i'd be straight back on the chocolate and chips in no time. So I intend to make my next few posts all about the summer trim down. (With the exception of the wedding cake post - Coming soon!!).

So if, like me, you are feeling the need to transform from a fat waddling caterpillar into a bright, floating butterfly then this soup is a good place to start. Its a really easy recipe and can be made in bulk for the fridge or freezer for those "no time!!" days.

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)
Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)

Its also great to take to work or have as a snack if your feeling super peckish in between meals. And its more than likely a dish that will please everyone; from friends round for dinner to your children's mates starving after a long day at school.... lets face it most kids love tomato soup and this is the creme de la creme of tomato soups. Tomato soup was definitely my favourite as a child and I think the only thing thats changed is the topping, instead of grated cheese its now creme fraiche - so grown up 🙂

Right well I'm off to finish my sisters wedding cake - busy busy, hoping I can show the finished result soon!!

Happy soup making!!

📖 Recipe

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar
Print

Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup

Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 6 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 large onions roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 15 medium vine ripened tomatoes quartered and seeds removed
  • 3 large red peppers capsicum, de-seeded and roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried marjoram
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Natural yogurt/Creme Fraiche to serve optional

Instructions

  • Pre-heat oven to 200 degrees C. Fill kettle and boil.
  • Place the chopped tomatoes and peppers onto two separate trays, drizzle each tray with 2 tablespoon olive oil and season well. Place in the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until edges start to blacken.
  • Whilst the tomatoes and peppers are in the oven; heat up 2 tablespoon oil in a large pan, add the onions and fry slowly until soft. Add the garlic, dried herbs and stir. Once cooked, add the tomatoes and peppers to the onions along with all the cooking juices. Mix together well and add around 250ml of hot water from the kettle. Bring to the boil and then remove from the heat.
  • Transfer the vegetables and all juices to a blender or use an electric hand blender to create a smooth soup. Add more water if the soup appears to thick (should coat the back of a spoon. Tear up the basil leave, add to the soup and briefly blend again.  
  • Finally, pass the soup through a sieve to achieve a lovely smooth finish - use the back of a spoon to ensure all the soup is pushed through the sieve. - Get as much through as possible so to not take away any flavour. Reheat slightly if necessary (but don't boil). Season if required and serve.
  • Soup can be stored in the fridge for 5-7 days or if you want to keep it for longer; transfer to a container and freeze. 

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/feed/ 1
Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/#comments Thu, 28 Jul 2016 20:45:21 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2029 Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed...

Read More

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.

Butternut Squash soup

Roasted Butternut squash soup

Reasons to put this recipe to the top of your 'mid-week tea' list or even your 'recipes to make for the freezer' list, right now:

  • It’s chocker with lots of healthy vegetables.
  • It fills you up in next to no time.
  • And it looks amazing with all those vibrant greens shining through from the celery and sage. What’s not to love about this soup?

Butternut squash can also be used to pad out a creamy pumpkin pasta dish and is also great in a quinoa salad side dish, which I usually serve with my satay chicken recipe.

Do you peel butternut squash before cooking?

Theres no need to peel butternut squash before cooking. Not only is this incredibly difficult but it also takes a good while to peel when raw. Its definitely so much easier to peel the skin off a roasted butternut squash. My favourite thing about preparing this squash soup is the roasting of the butternut.

How do you roast butternut squash?

  1. Chop the butternut squash in half length ways
  2. Scoop out the seeds with a spoon.
  3. Seeds can be discarded or washed, dried and then turned into a lovely snack by roasting in the oven until crisp.
  4. Drizzle oil over the exposed flesh of the butternut squash. Place on a baking tray and pop in the oven for around an hour.
  5. The squash is cooked when the tip of a knife easily pushes into the flesh.
  6. Remove from the oven a cool before peeling off the skin.

Roasted Butternut squash

So delicious! Baking the squash without peeling it means that the skin comes away from the flesh with no hassle, so this really is an easy dish.

Can you eat the skin of butternut squash?

The skin of butternut squash can be quite tough and so generally its best to remove. However, the skin can be edible if you roast the squash until the skin starts to soften.

How do you make roasted butternut squash soup?

  1. First roast the squash as instructed above
  2. Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised.
  3. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  4. Chop the roasted squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  5. Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.

Recipe Tip: Transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.

How long will this recipe keep?

Once made store this soup in a sealed container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days

Can I freeze homemade squash soup?

Yes homemade butternut squash can be frozen. Make sure the soup is cooled before transferring to a sealable container, then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. Make sure reheated soup is piping hot all the way through.

serve the soup with feta and pistachios

How do you add cream to soup without it curdling?

To prevent curdling always take soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding cream. Adding cream or yogurt to a soup can really add to the flavour as well as help to thicken soup with a thinner consistency.

What should I serve with this recipe?

Every good soup deserves warm homemade mini bread rolls, perfect for dunking and moping up. If you're having this soup as a starter to a 3 course dinner then why not follow with a roast beef dinner or comforting fish pie. For more 3 course meal ideas have a look at my collection of romantic dinner recipes. Love soup? Have a look at all my soup recipes here.

 1 hour 15 minutes to make recipegluten free recipeunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

butternut squash soup
Print

Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage

Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.
Course aperitivo, Appetizer, lunch, starter
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 401.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large butternut squash (1600g - raw whole weight)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 large onions chopped (200g)
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 2 sticks of celery chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Black pepper
  • 750 ml vegetable stock
  • Fresh sage leaves (5 leaves, stalks removed and roughly chopped)
  • Water to add if required
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Pistachios and feta to top (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 180°C. Halve the butternut squash - you'll need a large knife for this and a little bit of patience. Scoop out the seeds, and either discard or roast in the oven and serve as a snack. Keep the skin on - we will remove this after cooking!
  • Place the halved squash on a baking tray and drizzle with olive oil. Use your fingers to spread the oil evenly over the flesh. Place the squash in the oven and bake for around 1 hour. Check regularly, the squash will be cooked when it starts to caramelise and the tip of a knife can be pressed easily in to the flesh. Once cooked remove from the oven and set to one side to cool.
    Roasted Butternut squash
  • Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  • Whilst the soup is simmering, remove the skin from the cooling squash. This can be done by either peeling the skin away or by scooping out the flesh with a spoon. Once the skin is completely removed chop the squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  • Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.
  • Recipe Tip: transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.
  • Finally pass the blended soup through a sieve, taste and add salt and pepper if required. If serving immediately reheat gently in a pan but do not boil. Serve in bowls and top with chopped pistachios and crumbled feta cheese if desired.
  • If storing for another day do not reheat. Transfer to sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 706g | Calories: 401.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 40.7g | Protein: 17.2g | Fat: 20.3g | Saturated Fat: 5.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.8g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 3.8g | Sugar: 23g

PIN FOR LATERButternut squash soup with celery and sage and topped with feta and chopped pistachios

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 2
Sticky Apple Treacle Tart and our Pizza oven https://properfoodie.com/sticky-apple-treacle-tart/ https://properfoodie.com/sticky-apple-treacle-tart/#comments Sun, 09 Oct 2016 19:07:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2613 Sticky apple treacle tart! This lovely autumnal tart is so good that I have no doubt I will making it every autumn. It’s the perfect mix of sticky treacle and caramelised apples, which sets the tone nicely for October and Halloween.  Why I have not thought to combine an apple pie with a treacle tart...

Read More

The post Sticky Apple Treacle Tart and our Pizza oven appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
a-jump-to-print-button

Sticky apple treacle tart! This lovely autumnal tart is so good that I have no doubt I will making it every autumn.

It’s the perfect mix of sticky treacle and caramelised apples, which sets the tone nicely for October and Halloween.  Why I have not thought to combine an apple pie with a treacle tart before now is a complete mystery to me. Its also a great shame that I’ve been missing out on this master piece of a dessert for all this time. It really is wonderful and I definitely need to make several more of these tarts and get a couple in the freezer.

Desserts are always a good thing to focus on in October as there’s still plenty of September fruit kicking about for apple crumble, plum and rhubarb crumble, spiced pumpkin muffins, rhubarb galette, Yorkshire parkin, plum and rhubarb crumble, fig and apple chutney ....the list goes on. And a nice warm dessert with ice cream or custard is just what is needed once the temperature starts to fall. When it comes to warming comfort food, this dessert does not disappoint. Check out my homemade, no churn ice creams if you want to make this tart extra special.

sticky apple treacle tart slice with vanilla ice cream

A little effort is required if the whole thing is going to be made from scratch.

However, this sticky apple treacle deliciousness becomes really quick and simple if you don’t mind using shop bought sweet pastry. If you do want to take on the challenge of making your own pastry, then there are a few simple rules that can help make it perfect:

  • Try and keep all the ingredients as cold as possible. chill everything first and when combining only use your finger tips and not your palms, which will introduce more heat.
  • Chill the pastry once its made and chill once again after its been rolled and lined in the tin.
  • Blind bake before adding the filling and always fill the baking beans or flour up to the top so the pastry at the sides of the tin is held firmly in place
  • Save any off cuts of pastry as they can be used later on to patch up any holes (no-one will know!!)

Once you have a pastry case ready to go, just pile in some stewed apples, followed by a treacle and breadcrumb filling and pop the whole thing into the oven. It usually takes around an hour to bake through, but it’s definitely worth the wait.

sticky apple treacle tart taking slice

Just before the recipe.....another pizza oven update.

Very exciting news; actual pizzas have been made!! I know that summer is over but we don't care - the summer has been spent with us lovingly building our fabulous cob oven and we can now enjoy our pizzas whilst huddled around the oven for warmth.

ben-at-the-pizza-oven

The oven itself still has a few bits to finish off; like a final outer layer to make it look pretty and a roof over the whole thing to provide a bit of protection from the winter weather. But as it stands, it can function and so we aren't going to let a last final layer and the lack of a roof stop us from making some proper pizzas!! and my goodness they are proper. I will be sharing everything about our cob oven build and pizza making recipes on here very soon!! There are so many uses for this oven and I can't wait to get cooking up some amazing wood fired meals. But for now we'll just be having fun practising our pizzas. First attempt wasn't too shabby:

margarita-just-gone-in

margarita-coming-out-of-pizza-oven

marinara-coming-out-of-pizza-oven

marinara-being-sliced

Best Sunday pizza afternoon ever!!

📖 Recipe

Print

Sticky Apple Treacle Tart

A delightful autumnal dessert with stewed apples, a treacle filling, warming syrupy flavours and a crumbly, sweet pastry base.
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 570kcal

Ingredients

For the pastry

  • 2 egg yolks
  • 2 tablespoon ice cold water
  • 100 g unsalted butter cubed
  • 100 g icing sugar
  • 220 g plain flour

For the stewed apple filling

  • 400 g baking apples peeled and chopped
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 20 g unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoon water

For the treacle filling

  • 425 g golden syrup
  • 425 double cream
  • 2 eggs
  • 110 g breadcrumbs
  • 75 g ground almonds

For the topping

  • 1 baking apple

Equipment

  • 10 inch tart/flan tin with loose base

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C

For the pastry

  • whisk together the 2 egg yolks and 2 tablespoon of water then place to one side. In a bowl soften the butter using your fingers and then sieve in the icing sugar. Still using your fingers mix the icing sugar and butter to form a paste. Next sieve in the flour and rub all the ingredients together with the tips of your fingers to create a breadcrumb consistency.
  • Gradually add the egg yolks to the flour mix using a "claw" shaped hand to combine. The pastry should start to come together and eventually form into a ball of pastry. Wrap the pastry in cling film and place in the fridge for 20-30 minutes.

For the stewed apples

  • Whilst the pastry is chilling make up the stewed apple filling.
  • In a large pan melt the butter then add the apple, sugar and water.Mix well and simmer on a medium heat for 5 minutes. After minutes check if the apples have begun to soften. Continue to simmer until they are soft enough to mash, add more sugar and water if it starts to look to dry. Once mashed continue to cook to ensure any larger lumps have softened. The finished product shouldn't bit too wet as this will cause the base of the tart to go soggy. Simmer for a little longer if necessary. Spoon the stewed apples into a dish and set to one side to cool.

Preparing the pastry case.

  • Before rolling out the chilled pastry, prepared the tart tin by rubbing a thin layer of butter over the inner surfaces and then dust with icing sugar.
  • Lightly flour your work surface and rolling pin then carefully roll out the pastry to around 3mm thick. As you are rolling move the pastry around by 90 degrees every few rolls and occasionally flip. This should ensure the pastry doesn't stick to the work surface and will create a more circular shape.
  • Once the pastry is rolled out, use the rolling pin to drape the pastry over the tin. Carefully push the pastry into the corners of the tin and into the sides of the fluted edges. Once you're happy trim using a knife and re wrap the excess in cling and save in the fridge for any patching up that might be needed later on.
  • In order to ensure the pastry is cooked through the pastry case must be blind baked before the filling is added. This can be done with baking paper and baking beans or by placing cling film over the pastry and then filling with flour up to the rim and wrapping the over hanging cling film over the top of the flour. Place the pastry in the oven and bake for 10-15 minutes. Watch that the pastry doesn't start to go too dark. Check under the flour or beans to see if the pastry has dried out, then remove from the oven, keep in the tart tin and set to one side. If any holes have appeared or if bits of pastry have broken off. Simply patch up with the saved pastry cut offs from earlier and pop back in the over for another couple of minutes.

For the treacle filling

  • In a small pan gently heat the heat the syrup to loosen up, then leave to one side for 5 minutes to cool slightly. While the syrup is cooling mix the cream and 2 eggs together in a bowl. Pour the syrup into the cream mixture and stir well. (NOTE: if the syrup is still too hot it will start to cook the eggs). In a separate bowl mix the breadcrumbs and ground almonds and then make a well. Pour the syrup mixture into the well and mix until smooth.

Putting together the tart

  • Spoon the cooled stewed apples into the middle of the pastry case and then spread evenly over the base. Next pour the treacle filling over the apples and fill to just below the rim of the pastry case. For the topping slice up another baking apple into segments and arrange carefully in the top of the treacle filling.
  • Place the tart in the middle of the oven and bake for 1 hour, checking at 40 and 50 minutes. The tart will be done when it appears to be just set, it may still have a slight wobble to t in the centre. Remove from the oven and allow to cool for 15 minutes before removing from the tin.
  • Serve with ice-cream, custard, or cream

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 570kcal | Fat: 33.3g

nutrition-info-sticky-apple-treacle-tart

**Estimated nutritional information per serving and per 100g of sticky apple treacle tart. Refer to my Nutrition Information Guide to find out more about how this is calculated and the sources used.

A delightful autumnal dessert with stewed apples, a treacle filling, warming syrupy flavours and a crumbly, sweet pastry base.

The post Sticky Apple Treacle Tart and our Pizza oven appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sticky-apple-treacle-tart/feed/ 2
Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/#comments Thu, 13 Oct 2016 12:48:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2643 With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had in our veg patch this year.

celery and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Why make this recipe?

Its rustic, its hearty and its a really properly homemade soup. The fresh taste from the celery leaves is nicely balanced here with the sweet apples and the bitter blue cheese. It really is a soup that has it all and is just what I want to come home to on a dark, rainy night.

Celery

Not something at the top of most people shopping lists and I know a lot of people would rather avoid celery. However, the humble celery stick is highly regarded in our household....more so since the creation of this great soup (and maybe a little more so by me than Ben, I could eat celery all day long).

Why is celery good for you?

  • Its super low in calories and fat (guilt free eating all the way)
  • It contains a good amount of fibre so is great for digestion.
  • Its shape, texture and strength make it perfect for chopping into crudites for dips. (check out my beetroot and red pepper dip for something sweet and zinging to dip your celery into).
  • Its ridiculously easy to grow. It really does take care of itself; as long as it has good soil and the room to grow to its full potential (a good 30cm between plants). The yield is also pretty good, especially in terms of leaves.
  • It can be used in all types of recipes and really gives a great boost to the flavour: salads, stews, soups, pesto. (watch out for my celery pesto post coming soon)
  • Its leaves, which are often over looked, usually have the most flavour and have a lovely deep green colour. As each plant supplies a large quantity of leaves; its more than likely that celery growers will find themselves over run. As the leaves are so bulky it can be extremely difficult to store them, so celery leaf soups, stews and pestos are the perfect solution. They look so pretty as well with the vibrant bright green shining through.

Ingredients

To make this celery, apple and blue cheese soup you will need:

  • Olive oil
  • Onions
  • Garlic cloves
  • Green apples
  • Celery stalks
  • Fresh sage leaves
  • Dried oregano
  • Celery leaves (optional)
  • Vegetable stock
  • Blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste
Celery leaves | ProperFoodie
onions | ProperFoodie
apples | ProperFoodie
celery apple and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Growing celery

  • Celery needs its space to grow fully and its surprising how much it will spread. So leave plenty of room between plants.
  • Celery is ready to harvest when the sticks are around 20cm or more in length.
  • Healthy celery has upright stems which snap. Stems should not be limp and bendy.
  • Leaves should be fresh, crisp and a darker green to the rest of the plant
  • When harvesting try to keep the stem connected at the base and store as a whole plant. This helps to keep its freshness. Celery can be kept in the fridge for several weeks.
  • The leaves are less easy to store as they are quite bulky and there can be a lot just on one plant. They are also at their freshest and tastiest just after being removed from the stems. Therefore, remove and use as soon as you can. If you can't use all the leaves place washed leftovers in a bowl, cover with cling film and keep in the fridge for up to a week.
  • If using the stalks in a recipe, use a peeler and scrape away the outer layer, which will remove the stringy bits which can be quite annoying if they get stuck in your teeth.
  • If you're making this soup in a big batch for freezing, leave the blue cheese out and add later. Defrost, reheat and then melt in the cheese before serving. The fresh cheese really adds to the taste of the soup and helps bring it back to life. It also means you'll have some cheese leftover for a pretty topping.
  • Not a fan of blue cheese? Then leave it out. Its still a very tasty dish with plenty of flavour. Or you could always replace with a different cheese - I imagine a cream cheese would work really well.

Other autumnal recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup | ProperFoodie
Print

Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Garden Soup

A hearty celery soup with sweet apples and blue cheese. Perfect for a cold, autumnal night.
Course Appetizer, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 223kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 Onions peeled and chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 300 g of sweet green eating apples core removed and roughly chopped
  • 450 g celery stalks peeled to remove the stringy bits and chopped
  • 10 fresh sage leaves
  • 5 g oregano leaves or half teaspoon dried oregano
  • 250 g celery leaves washed and roughly chopped
  • 700 ml vegetable stock
  • 100 g blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

  • In a large stock pan heat the olive oil, add the garlic and onions, then gently cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next add the apples, celery stalks, sage and oregano. Stir well before pouring in the stock.
  • Bring to a simmer and then add the celery leaves. Mix well to help the leave to wilt.
  • Pop on the lid and leave to simmer gently for 20 minutes, check occasionally.
  • Once the celery and apple have softened remove from the heat and ladle the soup into a blender. Blend on high for 5 minutes to ensure the soup in nice a smooth, then return to the pan. To create a perfectly smooth consistency; sieve the soup back into the pan (make sure you push as much through the sieve as possible, otherwise some flavour may be lost).
  • (if freezing your soup, stop at this point and ladle into seal-able containers - add blue cheese and seasoning when ready to defrost and reheat)
  • Put the blended, sieved soup back on a low heat and melt in the blue cheese. Taste and add more cheese if desired and season.

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 223kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 1241mg | Potassium: 702mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 1412IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 243mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/feed/ 4
Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/ https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/#comments Mon, 21 Nov 2016 09:00:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2857 Crunchy, sugared pecans with a sweet, crumbly layer of sugar. These amazing sugared pecans are perfect as Christmas gifts or are great as toppings on Christmas desserts alongside my chocolate stars and chocolate Christmas trees. This time of year can be so exciting with Christmas still far enough away not to panic or go on any...

Read More

The post Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
jump-to-recipe-button

Crunchy, sugared pecans with a sweet, crumbly layer of sugar.

These amazing sugared pecans are perfect as Christmas gifts or are great as toppings on Christmas desserts alongside my chocolate stars and chocolate Christmas trees. This time of year can be so exciting with Christmas still far enough away not to panic or go on any last minute shopping trips; but its still close enough to start thinking ahead and preparing a few little treats.

chocolate-christmas-cake-decorations

Both of these equally delightful and fun treats are really easy to make and add that personal touch, which is always nice at Christmas. The sugared pecans can be made up to one month in advance and store really well in jars, which can be transformed into lovely gifts with a little ribbon and a nice tag

sugared pecans in jars

The chocolate stars and Christmas trees are a little more delicate and serve better as toppings on Christmas cakes and puddings. See my Christmas cake recipe here.

properfoodie christmas cake with chocolate decor and sugared pecans

For the chocolate shapes I recommend using piping bags and practising your piping on a scrap bit of paper to check the consistency of the chocolate and to decide how you want to create your shapes. For the sugared pecans try to break them up whilst they are still warm and just out of the oven. Big bits of unwanted sugar can be easily broken off each nut later on.

white chocolate star decorations

For the perfect home made foodie gift this Christmas: Try making these along with some delicious cranberry mince pies 🙂


📖 Recipe

sugared pecans just out of the oven
Print

Sugared Pecan Nuts and Chocolate Stars

Sugared Pecan Nuts and Chocolate Stars; perfect for Christmas gifts or as toppings on Christmas desserts
Total Time 2 hours
Servings 2 medium jars of nuts and 2-3 trays of chocolate shapes

Ingredients

For the Sugared Pecan Nuts

  • 200 g pecan nuts
  • 1 medium egg white
  • 1 tablespoon tap water
  • 100 g white caster sugar
  • 100 g light brown muscovado sugar
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • Pinch crushed sea salt flakes
  • Silicon or grease proof paper

For the Chocolate Stars

  • 100 g milk chocolate baking
  • 100 g white chocolate baking
  • Silicon or grease proof paper
  • Piping bags

Instructions

For the Sugared Pecan Nuts

  • Pre-heat the oven to 160 degrees C (fan) and line a baking tray with silicon or grease proof paper.
  • Start by whisking together the egg white and water until frothy (1-2 mins) and set to one side.
  • In a bowl mix together the white sugar, muscovado sugar, allspice and salt.
  • Add the frothy egg white mixture to the sugar mix and combine, then mix in the nuts ensuring they are fully coated.
  • Transfer the coated nuts to the lined baking tray and spread out evenly across the surface.
  • Place in the oven for 30 minutes. Check at 15 mins, stir / un-stick and then re-spread across the tray.
  • After 30 minutes remove from the oven and break up using a spatula before allowing to fully cool.
  • Once cool use as cake decorations or transfer to jars for storage (can be stored for up to one month).

For the chocolate stars

  • Set up a bain marie on the hob: large pan with 1 cm of water in the bottom and a glass bowl balanced on top of the pan. Heat the pan until the water is boiling.
  • Break up the milk chocolate into 1-2cm pieces and place in the glass bowl. Ensure that the bowl is not touching the water. Leave the chocolate to melt and do not stir until it is fully melted. (Alternatively chocolate can be melted in a microwave - heat in 20 second bursts and stir in between until fully melted).
  • Once melted allow to cool a little and then transfer to piping bags.
  • Repeat this process with the white chocolate.
  • As the chocolate cools it will become slightly thicker and so easier to pipe out - however, left for too long it will solidify in the piping bags. Piping bags can be left near a warm oven to keep the chocolate in its melted state.
  • Lay out some silicon or grease proof paper and snip a small amount off the end of one of the piping bags. How much you snip off will depend on how thick you want the chocolate to be. I suggest having a scrap piece of paper and practising the piping, snipping more off the end of the piping bag if required.
  • Pipe out star shapes and Christmas tree shapes (or other shapes - but try to keep it simple) and then transfer to the fridge for 1 hour in order to set. Once set carefully peel the chocolate shapes off the paper and position on your cake or dessert.
  • Tip: Try to pipe out shapes that are well connected - shapes that are empty in the middle aren't as strong and will break as you try to remove them from the paper.

Nutritional information? For Christmas treats? No idea where I've put that 🙂

 

This post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

sugared-pecans-and-chocolate-stars

The post Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/feed/ 6
Chocolate Brownies Recipe https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/ https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/#comments Thu, 09 Feb 2017 15:37:34 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3401 Light and crumbly chocolate brownies dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chunks, finished off with a melted chocolate topping.  Incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness! Home baking The actual making and baking of these chocolate brownies is so simple and easy. There is no need for a food mixer and no waiting around for hours,...

Read More

The post Chocolate Brownies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Light and crumbly chocolate brownies dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chunks, finished off with a melted chocolate topping.  Incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness!

chocolate brownies with hazelnut

Home baking

The actual making and baking of these chocolate brownies is so simple and easy. There is no need for a food mixer and no waiting around for hours, patiently checking whether your baking-masterpiece has finished cooking. This is a straight forward recipe using just a couple of bowls, a whisk and plenty of love. For brownies that don't require any slicing up at the end, have a try of brownie chocolate muffins.

If you are looking for more baking inspiration there's plenty to have a go at in the dessert section of the website. I highly recommend my bakewell tart as it is one of my absolute favourites!

I am a nutritionist, and yes, some would say I am meant to promote lettuce and avocados, but sometimes we all need a little chocolate in our lives and so today I'm promoting homemade baking and 'everything in moderation'.

chocolate brownie fresh out of the oven

How to make chocolate brownies

Start by melting the chocolate. Whisk the eggs and sugar separately until pale, combine everything into a bowl and mix together. Pour mixture into a baking tin and place into a pre-heated oven (180°) and set the timer for half an hour.

Check to see if the brownie is fully cooked by inserting a skewer into the centre. If it comes out a little gooey after 30 minutes return to the oven for another 5 minutes, before checking again.

Leave to completely cool before removing from its tin. I've made the mistake of being super eager to get it out of the tin in the past, and that usually ends in disaster, with the top half of the cake on the cooling rack and the bottom half still in the tin. So take heed, and leave it for a good hour or even 2 hours if you can.

Run a knife around the edge of the tin and gently turn out onto a board or wire rack (as it will be completely cool by this point, I prefer to use a board).

Divide into 25 little squares.

The decoration for these chocolate brownies is even more chocolate: two types to be exact, which I simply melted in the microwave, transferred to a small piping bag and then roughly piped over each brownie.

You can of course decorate however you prefer, just leave plain or even whip up a bit of cream to pop on top if you like!

chocolate brownies with hazelnut

Chocolate brownies recipe ingredients

The ingredients you will need to make this recipe are:

  • 220g unsalted butter
  • 280g milk chocolate chips
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 300g golden caster sugar
  • 100g plain flour
  • 100g cocoa powder
  • 100g chopped hazel nuts
  • 100g white chocolate chips
  • Butter and icing sugar to line the tin
  • 100g milk chocolate 100g white chocolate for decoration

Why are my chocolate brownies dry?

This recipe is to achieve a light and crumbly brownie, however if your aiming to make your chocolate brownies gooey you will need to add more of the chocolate and butter elements to tip the balance towards fudgy rather than cakey. modify this recipe by increasing the unsalted butter to 250g and the milk chocolate chips to 300g.

Dry brownies are usually a result of a higher ratio of drier ingredients like the flour and cocoa powder as opposed to the butter and chocolate elements, also a reduced cooking time will help your cake to retain some of its moisture. Don't forget your brownies won't firm up until completely cool, so remove them from the oven in time to allow for this if required.

How do I know when my brownies are done?

To test whether your chocolate brownies are ready take a skewer or the tip of a knife and pierce the cake in the centre, as you draw the knife or skewer out notice whether there is any brownie sticking to the blade. If you are looking for a light and crumbly or 'cakey' brownie you want the knife/skewer to come out clean. If you want a gooey or 'fudge like' brownie you want a little of the inside to come with it, make sure the skewer is hot though as this indicates the brownie is hot to the centre and not under done.

Do you leave brownies to cool in the tin?

Yes! I leave my brownies to cool in the tin. In the past I have been too eager to get at my brownies and have disturbed them before they've had a chance to firm up enough to stay in one piece.  Brownies ideally should be removed from the oven just as the centre is firming up, this allows for them to finish on the worktop before they cool down. The result is a brownie that is easily turned out onto a board without being too dry in the middle.

📖 Recipe

Chocolate brownies chocolate on chocolate
Print

Hazelnut and White Chocolate Brownies

Hazelnut & white Chocolate brownies with chocolate decoration - perfect for keeping things sweet this valentines
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, pudding
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Calories 210kcal

Ingredients

  • 220 g Unsalted butter
  • 280 g Milk chocolate chips
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 300 g golden caster sugar
  • 100 g plain flour
  • 100 g cocoa powder
  • 100 g chopped hazel nuts
  • 100 g white chocolate chunks/chips

Equipment

  • 1 square 9 inch x 9 inch baking tin

Extras

  • Butter and icing sugar to line the tin and prevent sticking
  • 100 g milk chocolate and 100g white chocolate for decorating if desired

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Butter the baking tin and dust with icing sugar, this will prevent the brownie from sticking during baking.
  • Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with the 280g of chocolate chips. Microwave in 20 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted. (NB: with the butter mixed in, this won't take long to melt at all).
  • Place the melted chocolate and butter to one side.
  • In a mixing bowl whisk together the sugar and eggs. The mix of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon. However, to achieve a good sabayon there is no room for gentle mixing: get your muscles out and whisk well until the mixture goes paler and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.
  • Pour the melted chocolate and butter into the sabayon and stir in well. Then sieve in the flour and cocoa powder and use a spatula to gently fold in. It will appear quite dry at first, but keep folding and eventually the mixture will come together. Finally add the hazelnuts and white chocolate, and fold in again, before gently transferring to the prepared baking tin. use a knife or spatula to spread the mixture evenly in the tin.
  • Pop in the oven for 30 minutes, then check by inserting a skewer into the centre of the cake. If the skewer comes out gooey then put back in for a further 5 minutes. Check again and return to the oven if required, do not bake past 45 minutes as the edges of the brownie will begin to burn.
  • Once fully baked, leave on the side, in the tin, to completely cool. This usually takes 1-2 hours.
  • Only remove from the tin once you are satisfied that the brownie is complete cooled.
  • To remove, run a knife around the edge of the tin, then place a board over the top of the tin and gently turn over to release the brownie.
  • Cut up the slab into suitably sized square pieces: I usually cut off the edges first to remove any charring and to neaten up. Then divide into 20-25 small squares.

If you would like to decorate the brownies as in the pictures:

  • Melt 100g of white chocolate in the microwave (20 second bursts), then transfer to a piping bag, snip off the end and roughly pipe chocolate zig zags over each brownie. Repeat this with milk chocolate, then leave on the side to fully set.

Nutrition

Serving: 46g | Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.6g | Protein: 4.1g | Fat: 16.3g | Saturated Fat: 8.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5.9g | Fiber: 0.7g | Sugar: 8.8g

Pin for later

Imagine light, crumbly chocolate brownies, dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chucks, then finished off with zig zags of melted chocolate. Then imagine surprising that special someone with these incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness, made just for them, by you, with your own amazing baking skills!

The post Chocolate Brownies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/feed/ 16
Spiced Pumpkin Muffins https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pumpkin-muffins-dates/ https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pumpkin-muffins-dates/#comments Sat, 31 Oct 2020 01:11:38 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5064 Spiced pumpkin muffins made with fresh or canned pumpkin puree, soaked dates and warming spices. They are fluffy and moist and full of autumnal flavour, perfect for an afternoon treat on a cold and blustery day. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Pumpkin muffins are my favourite way to use up any pumpkin leftovers from...

Read More

The post Spiced Pumpkin Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Spiced pumpkin muffins made with fresh or canned pumpkin puree, soaked dates and warming spices. They are fluffy and moist and full of autumnal flavour, perfect for an afternoon treat on a cold and blustery day.

Pumpkin muffins on a round, bronze cooling rack with two of the muffins stacked one on top of the other.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Pumpkin muffins are my favourite way to use up any pumpkin leftovers from Halloween. I just half and deseed the pumpkin and then get it in the oven to roast for half an hour. The soft, caramelised pumpkin flesh can then be blended into a puree, ready to go into the muffin mix.

The muffin mixture itself takes just 10 minutes to whip together and doesn't require a machine. These moist, spiced pumpkin muffins will fill your house with the aroma of warming spices and sweet pumpkin. Great served warm out of the oven and extra special when served with a cinnamon cream cheese icing (mascarpone, cream, vanilla pod seeds and cinnamon).

🥘 Ingredients

To make 12 - 14 spiced pumpkin muffins you will need:

Ingredients to make pumpkins muffins with text overlay: plain flour, pumpkin, brown sugar, golden syrup, dates, ground ginger, egg, butter, cinnamon, bicarb of soda.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Pumpkin: I like to use a fresh pumpkin in this recipe but you can also use 1 tin of pumpkin puree if you prefer. If you do decide to use fresh pumpkin, pick a small one weighing around 1kg. In terms of the type of pumpkin any variety of winter squash will do. If you are struggling to get hold of a pumpkin you can use butternut squash instead.

Golden syrup: This is a UK based product and is best not substituted if it can be helped. Its thick and smooth with a golden colour and has a unique sweet, caramel, buttery taste. If you can't find it in your local store you can easily make your own golden syrup.

Bicarbonate of soda: This is the same as baking soda or sodium bicarbonate.

Spices: I use cinnamon and ginger in this recipe, but feel free to try with other spices such as nutmeg, cardamom, allspice, or, if you have it, pumpkin pie spice.

Dates: These are optional but I love the fibrous texture and intense caramel flavour that they give. They work best if they are soaked in a little warm water before going into the mix.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a muffin tray with muffin liners. Slice the pumpkin in half, remove the seeds and roast for 30 minutes or until soft and slightly caramelised.
  2. Meanwhile, roughly chop the dates and soak in 100ml of warm water, allowing them to slowly fall apart.
  3. In a large bowl mix together the flour, bicarb of soda, cinnamon and ginger.
  4. Melt the butter, brown sugar, and golden syrup over a low heat in a small pan.4 images showing steps 1-4 for making pumpkin muffins: 1. roast pumpkin, 2. soak dates, 3. mix dry ingredients, 4. melt butter, sugar and syrup.
  5. Remove the roasted pumpkin from the oven, peel or slice off the skin and roughly slice up the flesh.
  6. Use a hand blender or blending machine to blend the roast pumpkin into a puree.
  7. Next add the melted butter and sugar mixture to the flour and spices mixture, followed by the soaked dates (including water) and the pumpkin puree.
  8. Carefully mix and fold everything together until fully combined.4 images showing steps 5-8 for making pumpkin muffins: 5. slice roasted pumpkin, 6. blend pumpkin, 7. add wet to dry ingredients, 8. mix
  9. Next whisk up the egg and gradually add to the muffin mixture, stirring well between each addition.
  10. Finally, spoon the muffin mix into the muffin liners. Leave a small gap at the top (½ cm) to allow the muffins to rise in the oven. Bake at 180°C (350°F) for 30 minutes.2 images showing steps 9 and 10 for making pumpkin muffins: 9. add whisked egg to cake mix, 10. scoop mix into muffins liners

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should the muffins be stored?

Allow to fully cool then place in an air tight container. If you need to layer the muffins in the container, then place a paper towel between each layer. Muffins will keep well for 3-4 days.

Can the muffins be frozen?

Once baked allow to cool then either place in an air tight container or wrap in a double layer of cling film. Then freeze for up to 3 moths. To defrost leave on the side for a few hours or microwave in 30 second bursts until slightly warmed through.

Do you have to use liners for muffins?

Strictly speaking you don't have to use liners. You could just grease your muffin tray and pour the muffin mix straight into it.

However, liners do make life so much easier. No greasing required and the muffins come out of tray without any difficulty. The liners also make the muffins easier to handle and serve and they will also help to keep them fresher for longer.

Half of a round cooling rack visible, with pumpkin muffins resting on top in their liners

🍰 Other Autumn baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Pumpkin muffins on a round, bronze cooling rack with two of the muffins stacked one on top of the other.
Print

Spiced Pumpkin Muffins

Spiced pumpkin muffins made with fresh or canned pumpkin puree, soaked dates and warming spices. They are fluffy and moist and full of autumnal flavour, perfect for an afternoon treat on a cold and blustery day.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 14 muffins
Calories 249kcal

Equipment

  • Muffin tray and muffin liners
  • Roasting tray (to roast fresh pumpkin)
  • Blender or hand blender (to puree roasted fresh pumpkin)
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small pan

Ingredients

  • 1 small pumpkin/squash 1kg or 1 can Pumpkin puree
  • 100 g dates and 100ml of warm water
  • 250 g Plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda
  • 2 teaspoon Cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon Ginger
  • 150 g Butter
  • 150 g Brown sugar
  • 100 g Golden syrup
  • 1 large egg

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a muffin tray with muffin liners.
  • Slice the pumpkin in half, remove the seeds and roast for 30 minutes or until soft and slightly caramelised.
  • Meanwhile, roughly chop the dates and soak in 100ml of warm water, allowing them to slowly fall apart.
  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, bicarb of soda, cinnamon and ginger.
  • Melt the butter, brown sugar, and golden syrup over a low heat in a small pan.
  • Remove the roasted pumpkin from the oven, peel or slice off the skin and roughly slice up the flesh.
  • Use a hand blender or blending machine to blend the roast pumpkin into a puree.
  • Next add the melted butter and sugar mixture to the flour and spices mixture, followed by the soaked dates (including water) and the pumpkin puree.
  • Carefully mix and fold everything together until fully combined.
  • Next whisk up the egg and gradually add to the muffin mixture, stirring well between each addition.
  • Finally, spoon the muffin mix into the muffin liners. Leave a small gap at the top (½ cm) to allow the muffins to rise in the oven.
  • Bake at 180°C (350°F) for 30 minutes or until an inserted skewer comes out clean. Then transfer to a wire rack to cool

Notes

Substitutions:
  • Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
  • Pumpkin: Use 1 small (1kg) fresh pumpkin/squash or 1 can of pumpkin puree.
  • Golden syrup: This is a UK based product and is best not substituted if it can be helped. If you can't find it in your local store you can easily make your own.
  • Bicarbonate of soda: This is the same as baking soda or sodium bicarbonate.
  • Spices: Ginger and cinnamon can be replaced or added to with nutmeg, cardamom, allspice or pumpkin pie spice.
  • Dates: optional. Work best if they are soaked in a little warm water before going into the mix.
How should the muffins be stored?
Allow to fully cool then place in an air tight container. If you need to layer the muffins in the container, then place a paper towel between each layer. Muffins will keep well for 3-4 days.
Can the muffins be frozen?
Once baked allow to cool then either place in an air tight container or wrap in a double layer of cling film. Then freeze for up to 3 moths. To defrost leave on the side for a few hours or microwave in 30 second bursts until slightly warmed through.
Do you have to use liners for muffins?
Strictly speaking you don't have to use liners. You could just grease your muffin tray and pour the muffin mix straight into it.
However, liners do make life so much easier. No greasing required and the muffins come out of tray without any difficulty. The liners also make the muffins easier to handle and serve and they will also help to keep them fresher for longer.

Nutrition

Calories: 249kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 35mg | Sodium: 163mg | Potassium: 330mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 6365IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with new images, an improved recipe, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips.

The post Spiced Pumpkin Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pumpkin-muffins-dates/feed/ 22
Simple Guacamole Recipe https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/#respond Thu, 22 Feb 2018 14:02:15 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9285 A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh Simple guacamole recipe Homemade guacamole is a really easy and tasty dip made...

Read More

The post Simple Guacamole Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh

Mexican dip

Simple guacamole recipe

Homemade guacamole is a really easy and tasty dip made with avocado, chillies and lime juice. Perfect for nibbles at get togethers and partys along with other tasty dips such as beetroot hummus, celery, apple and walnut pesto or roasted red pepper dip.  It takes just 5 minute to make this guacamole recipe and its so much better than a shop bought version. Surprisingly, shop bought guacamole tends to include cream, but as avocado has quite a creamy texture already I find its not necessary to add any cream. So lets get to making a homemade, healthy guacamole recipe. For a proper Mexican guacamole recipe I always add chopped chilli, cubed tomato, lime juice and fresh coriander.

mexican guacamole recipe

What is guacamole made of?

  • Avocado flesh
  • Lime juice
  • Fresh red chilli
  • Cubed and deseeded tomatoes
  • freshly chopped coriander
  • Pinch of salt to taste

The main ingredient in a simple guacamole recipe is of course avocado, which is what gives guacamole its recognisable light green colour and creamy texture. The other usual ingredients in a guacamole are tomatoes, lime juice, salt and coriander. Fresh chilli can also be added for a spicy guacamole recipe. A little bit of chopping is required and of course the avocado needs to be cut, de-stoned and the skin removed. For this simple guacamole recipe I tend to mash the avocado flesh with a fork whilst its still in its skin. This just needs the avocado to be cut in half and the stone removed, then mash each half. This is so simple to do and means much less mess.

Guacamole recipe

Can you eat guacamole by itself?

Guacamole is usually used as a dip or topping and not usually eaten on its own. However, whole avocado can often be eaten by itself or in a salad.

How do you make guacamole? (Step-by-Step Guide)

  1. Start by cutting the avocado in half. Move the knife around the stone and then twist the two halves apart with your handshow to cut avocado cut and twist
  2. To remove the avocado stone carefully hit the stone with the blade of the knife then twist and pull out.how to cut avocado
  3. With the skin still on, use a fork to mash up the avocado flesh. The avocado skin acts as a sort of bowl. Then scoop the mashed flesh out and into a bowl.how to slice avocado
  4. Immediately squeeze lime juice over the flesh to prevent it from going brown.how to keep cut avocado fresh
  5. Next add the chopped chilli, cubed tomatoes and most of the chopped coriander to the avocado and mix well. Transfer to a serving bowl and top with the remaining coriander or fresh parsley if you prefer.guacamole recipe

Serving suggestion: serve with crisps and dips, chicken tacos, fajita chicken salad or on top of a smokey chilli con carne.

Can you make guacamole in advance?

Yes guacamole can be made in advance; up to a maximum of 2 days before you will need it. The tricky part is making sure the dip doesn't go brown. I have found the best way to keep guacamole fresh and green is to add the juice of 1 lime for every avocado used. Mix the juice directly into the dip and then place the dip in the fridge in a sealed container or dish wrapped well with cling film. A few more tips and tricks with avocados can be found here.

Do avocado pits keep guacamole from going brown?

No the avocado pit or stone has no use in stopping guacamole from going brown. - so don't be tempted to pop a stone in the middle of your dip - it really won't do anything. In my experience the lime juice and a sealed container method is the best.

Is guacamole vegan?

Yes, when made with just avocado, tomato and chilli, guacamole is suitable for vegans. This simple guacamole recipe and homemade recipes in general are all vegan. However, watch out for shop bought varieties which tend to have cream added to guacamole!!!

Is guacamole dip fattening?

If consumed in huge quantities, yes guacamole is fattening. The fat in guacamole is from the avocado, which is mainly good fats. So half an avocado everyday is a great way to maintain a healthy balanced diet and get in some of those healthy fatty acids. However, the calories and fat are high in avocados so over doing the guacamole isn't advised.

Avocado recipes

For more ideas on how to use avocados have a look at my easy avocado recipes post. Or why not make some paprika chicken wraps, which are great with guacamole added. If you fancy a guacamole dip with a twist why not try pumpkin guacamole?

Under 300 calories1 of 5 a dayLow Carb RecipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

guacamole recipe
Print

Simple Guacamole Recipe

A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh
Course dip, party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 118.8kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large avocado (120g flesh)
  • 1 Juice of a lime
  • ½ fresh red chilli (7g finely chopped)
  • 2 baby tomatoes (35g diced small)
  • Handful of fresh coriander (roughly chopped)

Instructions

  • Half the avocado by slicing the knife into the fruit and move around the stone. Then twist each half in opposite directions and pull apart. 
    how to cut avocado cut and twist
  • To remove the stone carefully hit the blade of the knife into the stone, then twist and pull. 
    how to cut avocado
  • Leave the avocado flesh in the skin and use a fork to carefully mash the flesh and then scoop out. 
    how to slice avocado
  • Add the lime juice to the avocado and mix well. (Lime helps to prevent browning). Then add the chopped chilli, diced tomato and most of the coriander. Mix together well then transfer to a serving bowl and sprinkle over any remaining parsley.
    guacamole recipe

Nutrition

Serving: 81g | Calories: 118.8kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.9g | Protein: 1.4g | Fat: 11.8g | Saturated Fat: 2.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.3g | Sugar: 1.1g

The post Simple Guacamole Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/feed/ 0
Beetroot Hummus https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/ https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/#comments Sat, 07 Jul 2018 15:42:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7013 AD FEATURE FOR ENGLISH PROVENDER Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever. Its been a good while since I've posted on here - mainly due to sunning myself in Sardinia (more about that soon), but...

Read More

The post Beetroot Hummus appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
AD FEATURE FOR ENGLISH PROVENDER

Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever.

Baby beetroot hummus

Its been a good while since I've posted on here - mainly due to sunning myself in Sardinia (more about that soon), but also because we've been busy finishing off our pizza oven build - and ......its nearly ready!! So exciting - I can't wait to get cooking in our little outdoor oven (named Alberto by the way, after the owner of our B&B in Verona, where we got married last year 🙂

Baby beetroot hummus

Outdoor cooking

In preparation for some downright, awesome, alfresco cooking I have been stock piling recipes that are perfect for any kind of outdoor feast, including steak and veggie BBQ skewers, roasted stuffed peppers with cous cous in cheese sauce and some lovely homemade mint ice cream lollies. This sweet and earthy beetroot hummus is another one of these recipes and will go with anything - in fact I have a little idea bubbling away involving beetroot hummus on a pizza - I really think it will work and I'm definitely doing this before the end of Summer.

beetroot hummus with shredded beetroot

Hummus

Hummus? Houmous? Tesco Hummus? Waitrose Hummus? Whatever you call it or where you buy it, hummus is the dip that really knows how to please all tastes a preferences. There are so many flavours now-a-days that its hard to keep up. I do love a nice harrissa-flavoured, Moroccan style hummus, but I also love hummus with peas and mint. Or just plain hummus - its all great.

sweet pickled beetroot hummus

Beetroot hummus

This being said, beetroot hummus (especially with some creamy horseradish) is by far my most favourite kind of hummus. But I do feel that making it from scratch is the only way to really appreciate this colourful little dip. And heres my top tip for the bestest, most smoothest homemade hummus ever . . .

beetroot hummus

Shelled Chickpeas

. . .shell your chickpeas!! And this isn't really that hard at all. It might be a little time consuming, but oh so worth it. If you haven't shelled chickpeas before all you need to do is drain the tinned chickpeas into a sieve and rinse under tap water. Then take each chickpea and gently rub your fingertips over the surface and loosen the outer skin. The inner pea should then pop out of the skin. Discard the skin and place the chickpea in a bowl. Continue until all your chickpeas are shelled. Easy.

These little chickpeas are the star of the show, so it really is worth the extra effort.

beetroot hummus with horseradish and creme fraiche dressing

The rest of the recipe is super easy - all the ingredient go into a blender and are blitz until smooth.

Happy dipping!

 15 minutes to make recipeunder 100 calories recipeVegetarian recipeGluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Baby beetroot hummus
Print

Beetroot Hummus

Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever.
Course party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Moroccan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 People
Calories 59.6kcal

Ingredients

For the Beetroot Hummus

  • 400 g tin of Chickpeas 120g drained
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped or ½ tablespoon Very Lazy Chopped Smoked Garlic
  • Pinch sea salt
  • .5 Juice of a lemon
  • 2 cooked baby beetroots
  • 2 tablespoon beetroot pickle I used English Provender beetroot pickle
  • 1 tablespoon tahini paste sesame seed paste

For the dressing

  • 1 tablespoon creme fraiche
  • 1 teaspoon horseradish sauce

Optional

  • Extra oil and black pepper for serving

Instructions

To make the Beetroot Hummus

  • Drain the chickpeas into a sieve and rinse well under the tap. Peel off the outer shell of the chickpeas by rubbing with your finger tips until the inner pea pops out. Discard the shell and place the chickpea in a bowl. Continue until all chickpeas are shelled.
  • Shelled chickpeas produces and smoother and more flavoursome hummus.
  • In a blender blitz together all the hummus ingredients until smooth: shelled chickpeas, oil, garlic, salt, lemon juice, 2 cooked baby beets, 2 tablespoon beetroot pickle, and 1 tablespoon tahini paste.
  • Transfer the hummus into a bowl and chill in the fridge.

For the horseradish dressing

  • In a small bowl mix together the creme fraiche and horseradish sauce - season if desired.

Serve

  • Spoon the horseradish dressing over the bowl of chilled hummus. Drizzle over oil and grind on some black pepper if desired, then serve.

Nutrition

Serving: 41g | Calories: 59.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 4.5g | Protein: 2.1g | Fat: 3.8g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 160mg | Sugar: 1.2g

PIN FOR LATER

beetroot hummus with horseradish creme fraiche dressing

The post Beetroot Hummus appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/feed/ 4
Pea Pasta https://properfoodie.com/pea-pasta/ https://properfoodie.com/pea-pasta/#comments Sun, 16 Sep 2018 17:41:15 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7521 Pea pasta is a simple summer spaghetti tossed in pea pesto and served with freshly grated parmesan and basil leaves. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 🥗 Peas I do love peas - they are such an easy veg to cook with. The fact that they store so easily and cook up so quickly, means that its rare to ever be...

Read More

The post Pea Pasta appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Pea pasta is a simple summer spaghetti tossed in pea pesto and served with freshly grated parmesan and basil leaves.

pea pasta made with a cream pea pesto served on a plate with pasta being lifted with fork

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥗 Peas

I do love peas - they are such an easy veg to cook with. The fact that they store so easily and cook up so quickly, means that its rare to ever be with out some green veggies for the side of our plates.

But every now and again I do like to make the little pea the star of the show like in this gorgeous pea pesto pasta. Pea soup is another great way to show off the humble pea. Its usually best when paired with a salty ingredient like in pea and ham soup or pea and samphire soup - so full of goodness and flavour 🙂

pea pasta made with spaghetti and a basil and pea pesto served up on 3 plates with extra parmesan and pesto at the side

🍜 Pasta with a pea puree pesto

We usually have a glut of peas up at the allotment in the summer and pea soup isn't necessarily the best option when the weather is warm (although pea soup is also great served cold!). However, another great recipe option for the wonderful petit pois, instead of soup, is pea pasta made with a creamy pea pesto.

To make the pea pesto I simply pureed peas with garlic, fresh basil and some grated parmesan. This is a perfect sauce for stirring through some al dente spaghetti to create this a lovely vibrant dish of green pea pasta. The perfect dish for those long summer evenings. For a pasta dish thats a little more traditional but still has that summer vibe, try my salmon and prawn linguine.

Summer pea pasta with pea puree piled onto a plate

🥘 What you will need to make this recipe

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: JUMP TO RECIPE

To make pea pesto pasta for 4 people you will need the following ingredients

For the pasta:

  • 350 g dried spaghetti
  • 200 ml Boiling water
  • 1 tsp salt for the water

For the pea pesto:

  • ½ tbsp olive oil
  • 150 g Onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves of garlic finely chopped
  • 400 ml of boiling water
  • 400 g of frozen peas or 500g fresh podded peas (300g with pods removed)
  • Handful fresh basil leaves
  • 15 g grated Parmesan (or vegetarian cheese for a veggie option)
  • Pinch of Sea salt and black pepper
  • Extra basil leaves, parmesan and olive oil to serve (optional)

🔪 Instructions

  1. Cook the spaghetti or preferred type of pasta in salted water and according to the packet instructions.
  2. Whilst the spaghetti is cooking place a large pan on a medium heat. Add the oil, chopped onions and garlic then fry until soft. Next pour in the boiling water and add the peas. Bring to the boil and simmer for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat and stir in the basil.
  3. Blend the onion and pea mixture whilst still in the pan using a hand blender or transfer to a blender machine. Blend until smooth. Next add the grated parmesan, salt and pepper and mix in well.
  4. Drain the cooked pasta and transfer to the pea pesto. Toss together well then serve with extra parmesan, basil leaves and a drizzle of oil.
pea pesto pasta

📖 Pesto recipes

Making pesto at home is super easy and you can even experiment with the ingredients to come up with your own favourite pesto recipe and then mix with pasta for a super quick evening meal. In general a standard basil pesto usual contains a cheese (usually parmesan), a nut (usually pine nuts), and a veg or fresh herb (usually basil).

In this pea pasta recipe I have replaced the basil with peas and left out the nuts. Another idea is to use celery like in this celery, apple and walnut pesto. Of course, there is also plenty of jarred pesto options available in the supermarkets, which is really handy for midweek dinners. I usually have a jar in the cupboard ready for making chicken and broccoli with pesto quinoa or for a simple chicken pesto pasta.

⏲️ Cooking time

Meals that take an age to prepare and cook are just not practical during the week. From pod to plate this pea pasta recipe takes just 30 minutes to make. To make it even more efficient the pea pesto can be prepared in advance (refrigerate or freeze!).

💭 Recipe tip

Save some of your pasta cooking water. Then, if you find that your pea pesto is too thick to evenly toss through the cooked pasta, add a couple of ladles of the pasta water to help loosen and combine. The starch in the water, left over from the pasta, will also ensure that the pesto doesn't become too watery.

Let me know what you think of this pea pesto pasta recipe by leaving and comment and rating below! You can also save pea pesto pasta on Pinterest: pea pesto pasta.

 under 500 kcal recipe30 minutes to produce recipe1 of 5 a day in this recipe

📖 Recipe

summer spaghetti with peas and parmesan
Print

📋 Pea Pasta

Simple summer spaghetti tossed in pea puree pesto and served with freshly grated parmesan and basil leaves
Course Main Course
Cuisine British, Italian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 412kcal

Ingredients

For the spaghetti:

  • 350 g dried spaghetti
  • 200 ml Boiling water
  • 1 teaspoon salt for the water

For the pea purée:

  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 150 g Onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves of garlic finely chopped
  • 400 ml of boiling water
  • 400 g of frozen peas or 500g fresh podded peas (300g with pods removed)
  • Handful fresh basil leaves
  • 15 g grated Parmesan (or vegetarian cheese for a veggie option)
  • Pinch of Sea salt and black pepper

To serve:

  • Extra fresh basil leaves, Parmesan and olive oil

Instructions

  • Start by cooking the spaghetti in salted water and according to the packet instructions.
  • Whilst the spaghetti is cooking place a large pan on a medium heat. Add the oil, chopped onions and garlic then fry until soft. Next pour in the boiling water and add the peas. Bring to the boil and simmer for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat and stir in the basil.
  • Blend the onion and pea mixture whilst still in the pan using a hand blender or transfer to a blender machine. Blend until smooth. Next add the grated parmesan, salt and pepper and mix in well.
  • Drain the cooked spaghetti and transfer to the pea puree. Toss together well then serve with extra parmesan, basil leaves and a drizzle of oil.

Notes

Recipe tip: 
Save some of your pasta cooking water. Then, if you find that your pesto is too thick to evenly toss through the cooked pasta, add a couple of ladles of the pasta water to help loosen and combine. The starch in the water, left over from the pasta, will also ensure that the pesto doesn't become too watery.
nutritional info pea pasta

Nutrition

Serving: 333g | Calories: 412kcal | Carbohydrates: 80.1g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 4.8g | Saturated Fat: 1.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Sodium: 80mg | Potassium: 441.8mg | Fiber: 6.1g | Sugar: 9.9g | Vitamin A: 19.6IU | Vitamin C: 23.5mg | Calcium: 108.8mg | Iron: 3.4mg

The post Pea Pasta appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pea-pasta/feed/ 7
Fig Jam https://properfoodie.com/fig-jam/ https://properfoodie.com/fig-jam/#comments Mon, 24 Sep 2018 10:52:33 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7565 Soft & delicate fig jam recipe with nutty, crunchy seeds & a squeeze of tangy lemon Tis the season for figs!! And to make the most of this lovely fruit I've made myself a few jars of sticky fig jam preserve. A simple fig jam recipe or easy fig and balsamic chutney recipe are favourites of mine....

Read More

The post Fig Jam appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Soft & delicate fig jam recipe with nutty, crunchy seeds & a squeeze of tangy lemon

Fig jam

Tis the season for figs!! And to make the most of this lovely fruit I've made myself a few jars of sticky fig jam preserve. A simple fig jam recipe or easy fig and balsamic chutney recipe are favourites of mine. You can't beat the amazing taste, texture and crunch of seeds that you only get from figs - its almost like popping candy, only a whole lot better for you.

Figs

September and November are amazing months for all kinds of fruits and berries. Apples, blackberries, apricots, plums, pears - just so many. But my favourite, making it to first place just ahead of stewed apples, is the lovely little fig. With its thin skin, soft texture, nutty flavour and a million crunchy seeds; the fresh fig really is a special treat.

figs

Seeds in figs

- The fig fruit is actually a false fruit or accessory fruit, which basically means that the flowers or seeds grow inside it rather than the fruit forming from the flower.

Fruit, flower, or false fruit it all makes for good jam.

Fig jam

How to make fig jam

This is a simple fig jam recipe is made with just 3 ingredients, in one pan, and simmered for no more than 30 minutes. As fresh figs have a borderline acid pH, its advised to add acid to the jam - usually lemon juice. The acid helps to preserve the fruit correctly.

Fig jam with no pectin

Many jam recipes suggest the addition of pectin to allow the jam to gel quicker and be jelly-like. Pectin reduces cooking time in jams where the fruit contains less natural pectin and so normally take a while to gel. Figs contain enough natural pectin for jam making and so no extra pectin is required in a fig jam recipe.

Once the figs have been simmering for 20-30 minutes the natural pectin will bind with the sugar and become jelly-like. In order to test if the jam is ready, spoon a little onto a cold plate. As the jam cools push slightly with your finger  - the jam should wrinkle showing that it has a jelly consistency.

Fig jam and croissants

Fig jam uses

I love fig jam on warm croissants, theres something so great about having really chunky pieces of jam on all that buttery croissant goodness. Fig jam is also fabulous in desserts or as toppings for desserts, I particularly like to add jam to my galette recipe. The galette recipe also includes instruction on how to make an amazing rhubarb jam recipe! For something a little different in the morning, try fig jam as a breakfast topping for yogurt or porridge.

Storing jams

The addition of lemon juice, as mentioned above, will help to preserve the fruit correctly. However, bacteria can still be present in the storage jars before the jam goes in. In order to prevent anything nasty getting into my jars I sterilise the jar and lid and ensure that my jam goes into the jar whilst still hot.

To sterilise my jars I usually wash them thoroughly and then place them on a baking tray in the oven for 5-10 minutes at 150 degrees C (alternatively put through the dishwasher on a hot wash).
I use a clean metal funnel to transfer the hot jam into the jars and then screw the lids on tightly. I use marigold gloves to enable handling hot jars and jam. Make sure your jam is still hot when you place it in the jars and screw on the lid. As the jam cools, a tighter seal will form between the jar and lid.

You can check if a tight seal has been formed by pressing down on the centre of the lid once cooled. - If sealed with a vacuum the lid shouldn't depress further. This seal check and the sterilising of the jars in the oven should be enough to ensure the jam keeps well.

Fig jam

Equipment for making jam and chutney

Please note that the below products are affiliate links, which means if you do click these links and then go on to purchase the products, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

I used the following products to make my jars of jam: Nutley's 110ml Hexagonal Glass Jam Chutney Preserve Jar (Pack of 12),  50 Buff Strung Tags 70mm x 35mmKitchenCraft Home Made Stainless Steel Adjustable Jam Funnel

What else can I preserve?

For more ideas on preserving fruit have a look at my chutney recipes, which are both fantastic at Christmas and as Christmas gifts: Fig, apple and balsamic Chutney and Spiced pear and cider chutney. If you're after a substitute for fig jam try this recipe with strawberries instead of figs.

Fig jam and croissants

30 minutes to makeunder 100 calories recipeVegetarian recipeGluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Fig jam
Print

Fig Jam

Soft & delicate fig jam preserve with nutty, crunchy seeds & a squeeze of tangy lemon
Course Snack
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 16 servings (50g/serving)
Calories 56.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 500 g figs (10-12 figs)
  • 175 g Granulated Sugar
  • Juice of 1 lemon
  • 100 ml water

Instructions

  • First place a small plate in the fridge to chill. 
    Then prepare the figs by chopping off the stems and slicing into quarters. 
  • Place a large pan on a medium heat. Add the figs, sugar and water to the pan and bring to the boil. Turn the heat down and simmer for 20 minutes. Stir regularly.
  • Squeeze in the lemon juice and mix well. Simmer for a further 5 minutes.
  • Test to see if the jam is ready by spooning a small amount onto the chilled plate from the fridge. As the jam cools on the plate, push it slightly with your finger. If ready the jam should wrinkle, indicating that it will become jelly-like as it cools. If not, simmer for a further 2 minutes and test again,  - repeat until ready.
  • If using immediately, transfer to a bowl, cool and then chill in the fridge before serving.

To tranfer and store jam in jars

  • Sterilise your jars and lids by washing thoroughly, then place on a baking tray and put into the oven at 150 degrees C for 5-10minutes. 
  • Remove the jars from the oven. Whilst the jars and jam are still hot transfer the jam into the jars using a clean metal funnel (see links above for the equipment that I use). Use marigold gloves to handle the hot jars and hot jam.
  • Make sure the edges of the jar are clean before tightly screwing on the lids - again use marigold gloves as the jars will still be hot. Allow to cool.
  • As the jam cools a tight vacuum seal will form. This can be tested by pressing in the centre of the lid once fully cool. If properly sealed the lid should not depress when pressed.
  • If the lid does depress the jars will need to be further processed by placing in a water bath: Place the jars into a high sided pan and fill the pan with hot water up to half way up on the jars (water bath). Process the jars by putting the pan over a medium heat and boiling the water for 5 minutes. 
  • Once a vacuum seal has been formed (pressing lid test) the jars can be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. Once opened, keep in the fridge and consume within 6 weeks
  • If ever in doubt about the seal, always store in the fridge and consume within 6 weeks. 

Nutrition

Serving: 50g | Calories: 56.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 14.5g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.1g | Sugar: 14.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Simple fig jam

The post Fig Jam appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fig-jam/feed/ 1
Bircher muesli with stewed apples https://properfoodie.com/bircher-muesli-with-stewed-apples/ https://properfoodie.com/bircher-muesli-with-stewed-apples/#comments Tue, 09 Oct 2018 21:32:51 +0000 http://www.properfoodie.com/?p=7696 The perfect Bircher muesli made slightly quicker than the original version and served with chilled, stewed apples and apple crisps Bircher Muesli This pretty little bircher dish is my new favourite breakfast, dessert, snack or even late night treat, all rolled into one. - It really does go down very well at any time of...

Read More

The post Bircher muesli with stewed apples appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
The perfect Bircher muesli made slightly quicker than the original version and served with chilled, stewed apples and apple crisps

love real food Bircher muesli

Bircher Muesli

This pretty little bircher dish is my new favourite breakfast, dessert, snack or even late night treat, all rolled into one. - It really does go down very well at any time of day and I'm happy to eat it whenever I can. I promise  - its that good. Its like an apple pie but loads better for you. - Whats not to love!!

What is Bircher muesli?

So what is bircher and why is it suddenly everywhere? Firstly - its more than likely that Bircher is so popular because its just so blimin' good. However, this is not a new recipe, its actually a dish thats been around for over 100 years.

Bircher muesli with stewed apples

The original Bircher Muesli

Muesli first came about in 1900 when Swiss Physician Maximilian Bircher-Brenner introduced the dish to his hospital patients as part of a healthy fruit and veg based diet. Bircher-Brenners recipe was based on a similar dish he had come across whilst in the Swiss-Alps. First, oats were soaked in water and lemon juice overnight  and then mixed with either cream or honey before adding in grated apple, nuts and yogurt.

spiced apple bircher

My quick cinnamon Bircher Muesli

Although similar, my version of this dish includes perfectly stewed apples rather than grated apples and serves the oat mix and apples separately. Why??!! . . . - because this dish is all about celebrating apples - in particular the apples that sprouted out of our first little apple tree up on our allotment / kitchen garden.

apple tree

Little apple tree

After last years lack of fruit on our apple tree we were over the moon to discover 3 perfectly, perfect, crunchy apples this September. So I just had to make something extra special and this lovely apple bircher recipe also happens to tie in perfectly with Apple day on the 21st October.

picking apples

Overnight oats

So admittedly my version does skip out the overnight soaking part. This was in attempt to come up with a quick and simple version of this fabulous recipe. And I will say, rather smugly, that this worked out pretty well. - Using porridge oats, apple juice and mixing in the yogurt straight away means that my Bircher requires just a quick 10 minute chill in the fridge. That said, overnight oats are super popular at the moment -  and I am just a tiny bit in love with my blueberry cheesecake overnight oats, which you can find in my free recipe ebook. So allowing the oats, in this Bircher recipe, some time to soak will do it the world of good. So feel free to chill overnight if you have the time.

Bircher muesli with homemade apple sauce

Stewed apples

So yes the stewed apple thing is my super, unique twist on this traditional, old school dish. I love apple pie and who doesn't love homemade apple sauce? So in order to still fully enjoy my stewed apples, but not feel like a complete pig after stuffing my face with a huge apple pie - and no doubt gallons of custard. - I topped the apples with my Bircher Muesli and apple crisps for the perfect healthy alternative. A sprinkle of nuts to finish it off and there you have my perfect breakfast and dessert and healthy 3pm treat.

Autumnal Bircher muesli with stewed apples

The best apple Bircher muesli

For further details on making the best original and traditional Bircher Muesli and to find out exactly what does and doesn't work, have a read of Felicity Cloakes article. Felicity has tried and tested several popular versions to come up with her perfect Bircher recipe.

Apple Bircher muesli

30 minutes to make recipeunder 500 calories recipevegetarian recipe1 of 5 a day recipe

📖 Recipe

Autumnal Bircher muesli with stewed apples
Print

Bircher Muesli with chilled stewed apples and apple crisps

The perfect Bircher muesli made slightly quicker than the original version and served with chilled stewed apples and apple crisps
Course Breakfast
Cuisine British, Swiss, Swiss-German
Prep Time 30 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 glasses/pots
Calories 322kcal

Ingredients

For the Cinnamon Apple Crisps:

  • 2 small red apples
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

For the Stewed Apples

  • 600 g baking apples (2 large apples)
  • 10 g butter
  • 100 g golden granulated or caster sugar

For the Cinnamon Bircher

  • 75 g porridge oats
  • 225 g natural yogurt
  • 25 ml Apple juice
  • 40 g Sultanas
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

To serve:

  • Chopped hazelnuts

Equipment:

  • Baking tray and greaseproof paper
  • Large pan
  • Mixing bowl
  • Piping bag optional
  • Serving glasses/jars/pots

Instructions

To make the cinnamon apple crisps:

  • Pre heat the oven to 160 degrees fan and prepare a baking tray lined with greaseproof paper.
  • Thinly slice the 2 red apples and remove all pips - the thinner they are the more crisp they will be after baking. Slice straight through removing any stalk or pips as you go. I slice mine at a 90 degree angle to the core, to allow for a star shape in the centre of the crisps where the pips were.
  • Place the sliced apple on the lined baking tray. Try not to overlap the slices as they will stick together during baking. Sprinkle over ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon then bake in the oven for 30 minutes or until crisp. Check them regularly as they will burn quicker than you think. Also as check and remove the smaller thinner ones as necessary as they will bake and crisp up quicker.
  • When crisp, remove from the oven and set to one side to cool. Do not refrigerate as they will go soggy.

To make the stewed apples:

  • Whilst the crisps are baking, start preparing the baking apples. Peel and core then slice into chunks (around 1 cm cubed in size). Place a large pan on a medium heat and add the butter. As the butter starts to melt add the chopped apple and golden sugar. Stir well until the sugar dissolves. Pop on a lid and allow to simmer for 5 minutes of so - check and stir regularly. As soon as the sugar starts to caramelise (turns darker brown) and the apples become soft, remove from the heat. Transfer to a bowl and set to one side to fully cool. Place in the fridge to chill until ready to serve.

To make the bircher:

  • While the crisps and stewed apples are cooling, prepare the bircher. Place the oats, yogurt, apple juice, sultanas and cinnamon into a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined. Add a little more yogurt or apple juice if the mix appears to dry or stiff. Chill in the fridge for at least 10 minutes or until ready to serve or overnight if you have time. (I usually transfer the bircher to a piping bag and secure with a peg before chilling. Piping the bircher on when serving is so much easier and neater)

Putting the dessert together.

  • Once the stewed apples are fully chilled the dessert can be put together. This only takes 5 minutes and so for the freshest of finishes I tend to build these desserts just before I serve them. Line up your serving glasses/pots. Spoon the stewed apples into the bottom of each glass - fill them to about half way. Next pipe or spoon the bircher onto the top of the stewed apples. Top each glass with a couple of apple crisps and sprinkle over the chopped hazelnuts. Serve with extra apple crisps on the side.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 260g | Calories: 322kcal | Carbohydrates: 63.2g | Protein: 6.3g | Fat: 6.7g | Saturated Fat: 2.8g | Sodium: 80mg | Sugar: 50g

PIN FOR LATER

Bircher muesli with stewed apples & apple crisps

I am linking this recipe to #cookblogshare hosted by peachickbakery, hijackedbytwins, recipesmadeeasyeverydayhealthyrecipes and Easypeasyfoodie. I am also linking to #cookonceeattwice by searchingforspice.

The post Bircher muesli with stewed apples appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/bircher-muesli-with-stewed-apples/feed/ 8
Baileys Coffee https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/ https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 19:58:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8166 Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top! [feast_advanced_jump_to] ☕ Why make this recipe? Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite...

Read More

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!

Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

☕ Why make this recipe?

Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite liqueurs to go into a coffee. Its particularly good if you prefer a creamier or milky coffee.

Baileys coffee is super easy to make and all you need is coffee, Baileys Irish Cream, honey and cream.

This particular recipe uses black coffee with Baileys added directly to this. However, a latte coffee (shot of coffee made up with milk) could be used so making a Baileys latte version instead.

Make for an afternoon treat in front of the fire on a colds winter day or whip up this warming baileys beverage for your guests after a festive dinner party.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Baileys coffee for 2 people you will need the following ingredients:

  • 400 ml freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (instant or ground)
  • 2 tsp Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 x 50ml measures of Baileys Irish Cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Coffee: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.

🔪 Instructions

  1. First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  2. Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
  3. Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
  4. Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  5. Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
  6. Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
  7. Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
Baileys coffee - properfoodie - Debbie Jones

💭 Frequently asked questions

How much baileys to add to a baileys coffee

The standard shot size for a measure of Baileys is 50ml (double measure), which is the amount used in this recipe. As Baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure.

When to have Baileys coffee

Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat.

Its also especially good at Christmas. Christmas wouldn't be Christmas without Baileys Irish Cream. I usually take mine on the rocks or even with crushed ice, whilst I'm busy wrapping presents or making one of my Christmas recipes.

Other Christmas recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baileys latte
Print

Baileys Irish cream with Coffee

Irish cream coffee! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!
Course aperitif, aperitivo, beverage, Dessert, digestif, Drinks
Cuisine British, Christmas, irish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 284kcal

Equipment

  • Coffee Glasses or mugs

Ingredients

  • 400 ml Freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (Instant or ground)
  • 2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Instructions

  • First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  • Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
    400 ml Freshly made black coffee
  • Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
    2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  • Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
    2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
    50 ml double cream
  • Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
    Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve

Notes

How much baileys to add to coffee: The standard shot for a measure of baileys is 50ml, which is the amount used in this recipe. As baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure. This amount will also allow for the baileys flavour to be distinguished against the coffee.
Substitutions: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.
When to have Baileys coffee: Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat. Its also especially good at Christmas.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 258g | Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 117mg | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 368IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/feed/ 2
Christmas soup: celeriac and potato https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/ https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 22:38:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8187 Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton Christmas soup Full of wintery veggies and topped with a toasted brie and cranberry crouton, this celeriac soup is perfect for Christmas. Be it a cosy Christmas Eve soup, a delectable starter on Christmas day, or even...

Read More

The post Christmas soup: celeriac and potato appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton

Celeriac soup

Christmas soup

Full of wintery veggies and topped with a toasted brie and cranberry crouton, this celeriac soup is perfect for Christmas. Be it a cosy Christmas Eve soup, a delectable starter on Christmas day, or even a freezer meal tucked away for those chilled out nights when no one wants to cook. The creamy potato and nutty celeriac are sure to bring smiles all round. If celeriac isn't your thing cauliflower soup is also a great option for Christmas.

Christmas soup - properfoodie

How to prepare celeriac

So the star of this Christmas recipe is of course Celeriac - the large bulbous root of the celery plant. Celeriac root is actually very easy to peel and chop up and once chopped it can be eaten raw or cooked, although in this case we are cooking it. To peel the celeriac use a large sharp knife and gently slice the skin off moving the knife around the edge of the root (see video below for a better visual of this). Next simply slice and dice the peeled celeriac, which can then be boiled or roasted - here we are simmering in our soup.

Celeriac and potato soup

Celeriac and potato soup

The base of this soup is chopped onion, diced potato and diced celeriac. Seasoned with bay and thyme and then blended until smooth. Its so quick and so easy to prepare and as we're all so terribly busy at Christmas, its also nice to know that this can be prepared in advanced and either refrigerated for up to 3 days or kept in the freezer for up to 3 months.
Celeriac and Potato Christmas Soup_Debra Jones

Cranberry and Brie Crouton

To make this soup extra festive I like to top mine with a brie and cranberry crouton, made simply by: slicing up a french stick, topping each round with a piece of brie and a blanched cranberry, and then grilling on high for 5 minutes or until the cheese is melted. Personally I love a truffle brie and it goes amazingly well with this celeriac soup.

Other soups you might like:

For more soup ideas have a look at my soup recipes collection

📖 Recipe

Celeriac soup
Print

Celeriac and Potato Christmas soup

Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton
Course Appetizer, Christmas, starter, supper
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For the soup

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large onions 325g peeled and finely chopped
  • 1 large clove of garlic 5g finely chopped
  • 2 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 small celeriac 750g peeled and cubed
  • 2 small baking potatoes 300g peeled and cubed
  • 500 ml Vegetable stock
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 2 tablespoon Creme Fraiche

For the topping


  • 1 small French stick
  • Chopped blanched hazelnuts
  • Brie cut into slices truffle flavoured if desired
  • Handful of fresh cranberries
  • Extra fresh thyme
  • Few drizzles of olive oil or truffle oil.

Instructions

To make the Soup

  • Heat the oil in a large pan and fry the chopped onion and garlic until soft. While the onions are cooking peel and chop the celeriac and potatoes. Next add the bay leaves, sprigs of thyme, celeriac and potatoes. Pour over the stock and bring to the boil. Then place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes.

To make the Brie and Cranberry Croutons

  • These are best prepared fresh - so if preparing soup in advance don’t make the croutons until you are ready for them. Place a handful of fresh cranberries into a small container or cup and cover with boiling water - set to one side for 2 minutes. Next slice 1 cm thick circles from a French stick. Each circle will be a crouton for the soup - prepare as many croutons as you need. Place the bread rounds on a baking tray and top each one with a slice of brie. Next carefully remove the cranberries from the hot water and push one or two cranberries into the cheese on each piece of bread. Heat the grill.

Finishing the soup and serving

  • After 20 minutes remove the lid from the soup pan. Find and remove the bay leaves and thyme. Use a hand or stand blender to blitz the soup until smooth. To make it extra smooth pass well blended soup through a sieve.
  • Finally, season and stir in the honey and creme fraiche.
  • To serve, reheat the soup and place the croutons under a high grill for 5 minutes or until the cheese is melted. Ladle out the soup, top with hazelnuts and truffle oil and place a grilled crouton on the top.
  • Or alternatively store the soup in sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 347g | Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 27.6g | Protein: 7.6g | Fat: 8.1g | Saturated Fat: 2.7g | Sodium: 360mg | Sugar: 7.6g

The post Christmas soup: celeriac and potato appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/feed/ 1
Bakewell Tart https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/ https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/#respond Thu, 18 Apr 2019 14:27:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9710 Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - a dessert that I will never tire of. I simply adore the soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. - Theres just no beating the flavour. Definitely served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still...

Read More

The post Bakewell Tart appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - a dessert that I will never tire of. I simply adore the soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. - Theres just no beating the flavour. Definitely served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still lingers in the air.

raspberry jam bakewell tarts

This sweet, crumbly traditional dessert is a fabulous option to finish off any meal. Its the perfect partner to classic main course like steak and ale pie, healthy fish and chips, minted lamb pie or fish pie.

Why is it called a Bakewell tart?

The Bakewell tart is closely associated with the small town of Bakewell in Derbyshire, England. Although theres no evidence to suggest the tart originated from here, it may well have taken its name from this quintessential town. The Bakewell tart is a variation of the original Bakewell pudding and the bakeries in Bakewell are often found to be selling Bakewell pudding rather than tart.

slices of bakewell tart

What is the difference between Bakewell tart and Bakewell pudding?

The Bakewell tart is made using sweet shortcrust pastry and a frangipane filling, the pudding uses puff pastry and a thicker custard-type almond paste for the filling.

raspberry and almond bakewell

What is frangipane made of?

  • Soft unsalted butter
  • Caster sugar
  • Medium eggs
  • Ground almonds
  • Plain flour

Adding icing sugar to bakewell slices

Please note that the below contains an affiliate link to a product I am recommending, which means if you click this link and then go on to purchase the product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

How do you make Bakewell tart?

  1. Set up the food processor and add to the mixing compartment: 125g flour, 50g ground almonds, 100g cold, cubed butter, 75g icing sugar and a pinch of salt. Pulse for a few seconds until the mixture resembles fine breadcrumbs.Ingredients in processor for making pastry

  2. whisk together 1 egg yolk, with 1 tablespoon cold water and 1tsp vanilla extract. Return to the breadcrumb mix in the processor and gradually add the egg mix whilst continuing to pulse. Add enough egg mix for the pastry to just come together.

  3. Flour your work surface then turn out the pastry and shape into a ball - then wrap in cling film and chill in the fridge.homemade sweet shortcrust pastry

  4. Place 230g soft butter and 230g caster sugar into the processor and blend for at least 5 minutes or until pale and creamy. Next whisk together the eggs and gradually add to the creamed butter and sugar whilst continuing to blend. Add the flour and ground almonds and continue to blend until smooth.making frangipane in a processor

  5. Take the pastry from the fridge, unwrap and start to carefully roll out. Try to roll the pastry to the shape of your tin. Carefully roll the pastry around the rolling pin and transfer to the tin. Roll back out and then gently shape the pastry to the base of the tin. I used a rectangular loose base fluted tin: MasterClass Non-Stick Fluted Rectangular Tart Tin / Quiche Pan With Loose Base, 36 x 13 cmpastry lining tart tin

  6. Place the raspberry jam in a bowl and mix to loosen it. Carefully spread the jam across the base of the pastry ensuring it goes all the way into the corners.Layer of jam added to the pastry

  7. Now take the frangipane filling and pour over the jam. Fill the tart tin up to about ¾ full. Scatter flaked almonds over the surface of the frangipane then place the tart in the centre of the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes.Franginpane poured over the top of the jam

How long will Bakewell tart keep?

This tart will keep well in an airtight container for up to one week.

Bakewell jam

The filling in a Bakewell tart is always jam but the type of jam can be completely of your choosing. I love this tart with raspberry jam but for something a little different why not try with fig jam or rhubarb jam.

Other traditional dessert recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

Bakewell tart
Print

Bakewell tart

Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - with soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. Served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still lingers in the air.
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 people
Calories 514kcal

Ingredients

For the pastry:

  • 125  plain flour
  • 50  ground almonds
  • 100  unsalted butter cold
  • Pinch  of sea salt
  • 75  icing sugar
  • egg yolk
  • tsp  vanilla extract
  • tbsp  cold water

For the Frangipane

  • 230  soft unsalted butter
  • 230  caster sugar
  • medium eggs
  • 130  ground almonds
  • 45  plain flour

For the filling:

  • 300 g seedless raspberry jam
  • 100 g flaked almonds

To make the Bakewell tart:

  • Extra flour for work surfaces
  • Fresh raspberries and icing sugar to serve

Equipment

  • Food processor
  • Rolling pin
  • Loose bottom fluted tart tin (I used a rectangular one - 36 x 13 cm)

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 200 degrees C. Before you begin make sure the butter for the pastry has been in the fridge is super cold and that the butter for the frangipane is soft and at room temperature.

To make the pastry:

  • Set up the food processor and add to the mixing compartment: 125g flour, 50g ground almonds, 100g cold, cubed butter, 75g icing sugar and a pinch of salt. Pulse for a few seconds until the mixture resembles fine breadcrumbs. (don’t pulse for two long as the pastry will form best when the ingredients stay as cold as possible). 

  • In a small jug whisk together 1 egg yolk, with 1 tablespoon cold water and 1tsp vanilla extract. Return to the breadcrumb mix in the processor and gradually add the egg mix whilst continuing to pulse. Add enough egg mix for the pastry to just come together and no more - you may not need all of it. As soon as the pastry starts to come together stop adding the egg.

  • Flour your work surface then turn out the pastry and shape into a ball. Work quickly and handle as little as possible to keep the pastry cool.
  • Next wrap the pastry ball in cling film and chill in the fridge for 20 minutes.
Clean out the processor ready for the frangipane.
(Tip: working with cold or chilled ingredients helps to keep the pastry light and crumbly. Resting pastry in the fridge for at least 20 minutes helps to prevent shrinking in the oven)

To make the frangipane

  • For the frangipane the butter needs to be at room temperature. Place 230g soft butter and 230g caster sugar into the processor and blend for at least 5 minutes or until pale and creamy.
  • Next whisk together the eggs and gradually add to the creamed butter and sugar whilst continuing to blend. Add a spoonful of ground almonds every now again to help prevent the mixture from splitting.

  • Once all the egg has been combined add the remaining ground almond and all the flour. Blend for a further minute until smooth. Set to one side ready to add to the pastry case later.

To make the Bakewell tart.

  • Prepare your tin by coating the surface with butter and sprinkling over icing sugar - Tap off any excess. Ensure the oven is on and up to temp at 200 degrees C.
  • Flour the work surface and rolling pin. Take the pastry from the fridge, unwrap and start to carefully roll out.
  • Try to roll the pastry to the shape of your tin. The pastry needs to be slightly bigger so that it can be placed up the sides of the tin.
  • When rolled out to size carefully roll the pastry around the rolling pin and transfer to the tin. Roll back out and then gently shape the pastry to the base of the tin. Any cracks or holes in the pastry can be easily repaired by pushing the pastry back together or filling gaps with excess bits of pastry. However, try not to over handle.
  • Next place the raspberry jam in a bowl and mix to loosen it. Carefully spread the jam across the base of the pastry ensuring it goes all the way into the corners.
  • Now take the frangipane filling and pour over the jam. Fill the tart tin up to about ¾ full and no more. The frangipane will rise in the oven and will spill over if too much is added.
  • Scatter flaked almonds over the surface of the frangipane then place the tart in the centre of the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Check at 25 minutes - the tart is done when a skewer comes out of the frangipane clean.
  • Once the Bakewell tart is cooked, leave to cool for a few minutes before removing from the tin.
  • Decorate with icing and serve with fresh raspberries.

Nutrition

Serving: 126g | Calories: 514kcal | Carbohydrates: 56.8g | Protein: 7.4g | Fat: 34.2g | Saturated Fat: 15.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 80mg | Sugar: 44.9g

The post Bakewell Tart appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/feed/ 0
Hungarian Mushroom Soup https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/#respond Sun, 19 May 2019 07:00:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10104 Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love! What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup? Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika. The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery...

Read More

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!

hungarian soup

What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup?

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika.

The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery paprika produces a robust, earthy and flavoursome soup that is just crying out for a dollop of sour cream!

What is in Creamy Hungarian mushroom soup?

This soup uses just a few common ingredients:

  • Butter
  • Onion 
  • Mushrooms (I use closed cup and shiitake mushrooms)
  • Plain flour
  • 2 ½ tsps. paprika (I use standard paprika, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it)
  • White wine
  • Good quality vegetable stock
  • Soy sauce
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Soured cream
  • Lemon juice
  • Dried or fresh dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley
  • Extra sour cream for topping

RECIPE TIP: Although the dish is titled Hungarian Mushroom Soup, it is not essential to use Hungarian paprika. Standard paprika will work fine. However, the use of authentic Hungarian paprika, which has a deep red colour and sweeter flavour, would undoubtedly produce a richer, sweeter soup.

Ingredients for hungarian mushroom soup

How to prepare Hungarian mushroom soup

  1. In a large pan, fry the onions in butter until soft, then add the mushrooms and cook for another 2 minutes.how to make hungarian soup
  2. When the mushrooms start to soften, sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.add flour and paprika to mushrooms
  3. Next, add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika stuck to the base of the pan. Then gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually, until the soup starts to boil and thicken.add soy sauce to the soup
  4. Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the sour cream, then stir in well. (IMPORTANT NOTEadding the sour cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle!)add sour cream
  5. Add the lemon juice, dill, and seasoning to taste.add lemon juice and dill
  6. Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra dollops of sour cream.season and serve with fresh parsley

Can you freeze this soup?

Yes, Hungarian mushroom soup can be frozen. Allow to fully cool before transferring to an airtight container. Freeze for up to 3 months and defrost thoroughly before reheating. Reheat in a pan and ensure the soup is piping hot throughout before serving.

STORING TIP: Freshly made soup will also keep in the fridge, in a sealed container, for 2 days.

mushroom soup

What to Serve with this recipe?

An indulgent dish like this definitely requires an indulgent pairing and something that you can dunk into all that creamy, mushroomy goodness!

Without a doubt, this soup pairs well with fully loaded sandwiches. Any kind of grilled cheese will work well, and in particular, a Mushroom grilled cheese sandwich would pair up amazingly. You could also try this soup with Paprika chicken wraps or a fully loaded Beef brisket burrito!

mushroom soup with paprika and soured cream

Grab yourself a massive bowl and get ready for a delicious creamy and simple soup recipe like you’ve never tasted before! Enjoy!

Other soups you might like:

📖 Recipe

hungarian mushroom soup
Print

Hungarian Mushroom Soup

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine hungarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 214.5kcal

Ingredients

  • 30 g butter
  • 150 g Onion finely chopped
  • 500 g mushrooms I used closed cup and shiitake
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 2 ½ teaspoon paprika I used standard, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 300 ml good quality vegetable stock
  • 3 tablespoon light soy sauce
  • 200 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 3 tablespoon soured cream
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • 3 teaspoon dried dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • 20 g chopped parsley
  • Extra soured cream for topping

Instructions

  • In a large pan melt the butter and fry the onions until soft. Next add the mushrooms and stir fry for a further 2 minutes.
  • When the mushrooms start to soften sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.
  • Next add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika that are stuck to the base of the pan. Once the wine has reduced by half, gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually until the soup starts to boil and thicken.
  • Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the soured cream then stir in well. (Note - adding the soured cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle).
  • Finally, stir in the dill and lemon juice and season to taste.
  • Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra blobs of soured cream.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 363g | Calories: 214.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.9g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11.9g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.6g | Sodium: 880mg | Sugar: 9.9g

I first shared this Hungarian Mushroom Soup recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/feed/ 0
How to make Sushi Rice https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-sushi-rice/ https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-sushi-rice/#respond Thu, 23 May 2019 23:03:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14173 This simple guide will show you how to make sushi rice; cooked and mixed to perfection ready for making your very own sushi rolls. A quick sushi rice recipe, which will ensure the best start to making sushi at home. [feast_advanced_jump_to] In order to make perfect sushi rolls you first need to make perfect sushi...

Read More

The post How to make Sushi Rice appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This simple guide will show you how to make sushi rice; cooked and mixed to perfection ready for making your very own sushi rolls. A quick sushi rice recipe, which will ensure the best start to making sushi at home.

nori and rice being rolled with a bamboo mat

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

In order to make perfect sushi rolls you first need to make perfect sushi rice. Rice that is specifically prepared for sushi is called Sumeshi. This means rice thats cooked for the right amount of time, in the right amount of water. It should be sticky but still al dente, shiny and not mashed together.

Here, I'll show you how to cook and season your sushi rice and i'll share my tips for handling sushi rice so it doesn't stick to everything. - Give it chance and it will get everywhere - your worktop, your floor, your hair, most definitely your hands - everywhere.

🍚 Which rice is best for making sushi rolls?

Short grain Japanese rice is the only rice you should be using for this sushi rice recipe. Most shops and supermarkets will sell bags of rice that are labelled as sushi rice. I highly recommend using the rice that is labelled as such, otherwise you run the risk of using a type that won't be sticky enough when cooked. If you struggle to find 'sushi rice' look for a medium grained white rice, usually named Nishiki.

Sushi rice spread onto a nori sheet with black sesame seeds sprinkled on top

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make approximately 600g of cooked sushi rice (enough to make sushi for 4 people) you will need the following:

  • 300g dried Sushi rice (Nishiki)
  • 400ml tap water (for cooking rice)
  • 2 tbsp Rice wine vinegar
  • 2 tbsp Mirin rice wine
  • 1 tsp Caster sugar
  • ½ tsp Salt

Substitutions: if you can't get hold of Mirin rice wine replace half of the Mirin with extra rice wine vinegar and the other half with extra sugar.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. First weigh out 300g of rice then transfer to a sieve and rinse under the tap until the water runs clear.
  2. Transfer to a small pan and add 400ml of tap water for every 300g of dried rice. Leave the rice to soak in the pan for 30 minutes.
  3. After 30 minutes of soaking, the rice can be cooked. Place a lid on the pan and then put the pan on the stove. Bring to the boil then turn down to a simmer and cook for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes take the pan off the heat and leave for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  4. After 10 minutes remove the lid and transfer the cooked rice to a large mixing bowl. cooked rice being transferred from a pan into a mixing bowl
  5. Whilst still warm add 2 tablespoons rice wine vinegar, 2 tablespoons Mirin rice wine, 1 teaspoon caster sugar and ½ teaspoon salt. Carefully mix and fold together well, allowing all the seasoning to fully coat the rice.adding sugar to rice
  6. The rice should be shiny and sticky with each grain separate and not mashed together. Ideally rice should be used at room temperature, so keep folding and mixing until the rice has cooled. The rice can then be used right away or if you're not ready to use it immediately, place a damp cloth over the bowl to stop the rice drying out.Sushi rice in a bowl with mirin, rice wine and sugar added

🍣 Is this recipe gluten free?

Extra care should be taken if you are wanting to make gluten free sushi. Although the rice is gluten free the rice vinegars used as the seasoning may not be. Always check the labels and try to find gluten free vinegars.

🍙 How to handle the prepared rice

Prepared sushi rice can be difficult to handle due to its sticky nature. The best way to handle cooked sushi rice is with wet hands. When you are ready to start making the sushi, set up your stall with a bowl of water at side. Use this to keep dipping and rinsing your hands as you work with the rice.

The water can also be used when it comes to cut the sushi. Dip the tip of the knife into the water then hold it up to allow the water to run down the blade. The water on the blade will allow for a clean cut on the sushi and prevent the nori from tearing.

Types of sushi

Once the rice is made it can be used to make all kinds of sushi including maki sushi, California rolls, Dragon rolls and nigiri sushi.

Sushi rice in a bowl

💭 Recipe tips

Rinse the dried sushi rice: Rinse the rice thoroughly before cooking to remove any surface starch which can make the rice too sticky once cooked.

Soak the rice before cooking: Before placing the rice and water on the stove to cook, allow it to soak for 30 minutes first. Soaking will encourage the rice to absorb water and will allow for a more even cooking when it is introduced to heat.

Leave the rice to rest: After cooking the rice allow it to sit in the pan with the lid still on for 10 minutes. Any remaining moisture will be fully absorbed and redistributed, resulting in a more even texture throughout the rice.

Add the rice seasoning whilst still warm: Add the vinegar, Mirin, salt and sugar to the rice whilst it is still warm so the flavours will absorb into each grain as it cools.

Gently fold the rice: Fold the rice gently with a wooden spoon, try to separate the rice grains rather than mixing together. If you have one, use a rice paddle rather than a spoon. Continue to fold until the rice is fully cooled.

Cover rice until ready to use: If you aren't using the rice right away, cover with a damp tea towel to stop the rice from drying out.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment or star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on Pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video.

 under 300 calories recipe1 hour to produce recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

cooked sushi rice spread on nori and being rolled with a bamboo mat
Print

📋 How to make sushi rice

This simple guide will show you how to make sushi rice; cooked and mixed to perfection ready for making your very own sushi rolls. A quick sushi rice recipe, which will ensure the best start to making sushi at home.
Course Dinner, lunch, party food, side, Snack, starter
Cuisine Asian, Japanese
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 274.1kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Small pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and wooden spoon

Ingredients

  • 300 g dried Sushi rice Nishiki
  • 400 ml tap water for cooking rice
  • 2 tablespoon Rice wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Mirin rice wine
  • 1 teaspoon Caster sugar
  • ½ teaspoon Salt

Instructions

  • First weigh out 300g of rice then transfer to a sieve and rinse under the tap until the water runs clear.
  • Transfer to a small pan and add 400ml of tap water for every 300g of dried rice. Leave the rice to soak in the pan for 30 minutes.
  • After 30 minutes of soaking, the rice can be cooked. Place a lid on the pan and then put the pan on the stove. Bring to the boil then turn down to a simmer and cook for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes take the pan off the heat and leave for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  • After 10 minutes remove the lid and transfer the cooked rice to a large mixing bowl.
  • Whilst still warm add 2 tablespoons rice wine vinegar, 2 tablespoons Mirin rice wine, 1 teaspoon caster sugar and ½ teaspoon salt. Carefully mix and fold together well, allowing all the seasoning to fully coat the rice.
  • The rice should be shiny and sticky with each grain separate and not mashed together. Ideally rice should be used at room temperature, so keep folding and mixing until the rice has cooled. The rice can then be used right away or if you're not ready to use it immediately, place a damp cloth over the bowl to stop the rice drying out.

Video

Notes

Rinse the dried sushi rice: Rinse the rice thoroughly before cooking to remove any surface starch which can make the rice too sticky once cooked.
Soak the rice before cooking: Before placing the rice and water on the stove to cook, allow it to soak for 30 minutes first. Soaking will encourage the rice to absorb water and will allow for a more even cooking when it is introduced to heat.
Leave the rice to rest: After cooking the rice allow it to sit in the pan with the lid still on for 10 minutes. Any remaining moisture will be fully absorbed and redistributed, resulting in a more even texture throughout the rice.
Add the rice seasoning whilst still warm: Add the vinegar, Mirin, salt and sugar to the rice whilst it is still warm so the flavours will absorb into each grain as it cools.
Gently fold the rice: Fold the rice gently with a wooden spoon, try to separate the rice grains rather than mixing together. If you have one, use a rice paddle rather than a spoon. Continue to fold until the rice is fully cooled.
Cover rice until ready to use: If you aren't using the rice right away, cover with a damp tea towel to stop the rice from drying out.
sushi rice - nutrition label

Nutrition

Serving: 158g | Calories: 274.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 65.5g | Protein: 4.8g | Fat: 0.8g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 80mg | Potassium: 66.8mg | Fiber: 1.1g | Sugar: 1.8g | Calcium: 4.1mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The post How to make Sushi Rice appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-sushi-rice/feed/ 0
Green Bean Almondine https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/ https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/#respond Thu, 22 Aug 2019 12:21:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10523 Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy...

Read More

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy green beans with almonds.

Green bean almondine

What is green bean almondine?

This recipe is a classic french dish and is simply green beans with almonds. The name has been adapted from the original French term of ‘amandine’ meaning 'a garnish of almonds’.

As nice and simple as all that sounds, in order to make this the best green bean recipe, there are a few extra additions that can really bring it to life. This mainly involves pan frying the almonds in butter and lemon juice. The lemon juice reduces into the butter and creates a sweet caramelised sauce. So delicious!

My own twist, which I really feel does make this the best green been almondine recipe ever, is the addition of freshly chopped dill. The subtle flavour of this unobtrusive herb partners so well with the sour lemon and creamy almonds.

green bean almondine with almond garnish

Green Bean Almondine Ingredients

To make this recipe you will need just 5 ingredients, plus a bit of seasoning. Keep in mind, fresh green beans are best for this recipe. They’re easy to prepare and deliciously crisp.

  • 200g Green Beans
  • 50g Butter
  • 50g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill
  • salt and pepper

Green bean almondine in the pan

How to prepare the green beans

Preparing green beans is not a difficult task at all. Plus, fresh green beans are well worth it for their crisp texture and flavour. Follow these guidelines and you’ll be cooking fresh green beans for your green bean almondine in no time!

  1. How to trim green beans

    Trimming green beans needn’t be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay – no trimming required.

    • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side.
    • Use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.
  2. How to clean green beans

As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

This green bean recipe is one of the easiest you’ll find. It takes just a few steps and is well worth the end result.

  1. The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.add water to green beans and simmer
  2. After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  3. Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.add flaked almond to butter
  4. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  5. Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds.add blanched green beans into the butter and almond mix
  6. Stir in some fresh dill and season. Then serve immediately.add fresh dill

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.

The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.

When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

green bean almondine side dish

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a simple roast chicken, a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

For dessert, depending on the time of year, try this delicious Bakewell tart with raspberry jam, apple dump cake with fresh apples. pumpkin cobbler with spiced butter toffee, healthy banana bread with week old bananas, strawberry rhubarb crisp, or peach cobbler with cake mix.

Green bean almondine with buttery almonds

So next time you’re stuck for ideas on what to serve with dinner, why not give this fabulous side dish a try.

 Recipe low in carbshigh in nutrients recipegluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

green bean almondine
Print

Green bean almondine

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens - this surly must be it!
Course Appetizer, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine French
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 182.6kcal

Ingredients

  • 200 g Green Beans
  • 50 g Butter
  • 50 g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill (Handful)
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

How to trim green beans

  • Trimming green beans needn't be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay - no trimming required.
  • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side, use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.

How to clean green beans

  • As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

  • The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.
    add water to green beans and simmer
  • After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.
    place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  • Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.
    add flaked almond to butter
  • Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.
    squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  • Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds. Stir in some fresh dill, season, and then serve immediately.
    add fresh dill

Video

Notes

Click here to see traffic light nutritional info for this recipe

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.
The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.
When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

Nutrition

Serving: 82g | Calories: 182.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 2.6g | Protein: 3.9g | Fat: 17.5g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 1.7g | Sugar: 1.8g

This recipe was inspired by a recipe from Family Foodie. I first shared this Green bean almondine recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

PIN FOR LATER

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens – this surely must be it!

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/feed/ 0
Cauliflower soup https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/#respond Fri, 15 Nov 2019 14:40:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11419 Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just...

Read More

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.

Cauliflower soup recipe

Can you make this recipe without cream?

Although most soups will benefit tremendously from a big dollop of cream, cauliflower soup is one of those recipes that can manage a velvety, creamy finish all on its own. Admittedly, there is some semi skimmed that goes into this soup recipe, but the rest of that delicious, creaminess is from the cauliflower itself. Give it 20 minutes to simmer in some stock, or 15 minutes to roast in the oven and the soft, fluffy florets will blitz down into an irresistibly, creamy soup in a matter of seconds.

 

Whether you use roasted cauliflower of cauliflower boiled in veggie stock, the results will always be the same - full flavoured and velvety smooth. However, see the end of this post if you are looking to make a cream of cauliflower soup recipe.

healthy cauliflower soup recipe

Ingredients for cauliflower soup

This easy soup recipe requires just a few simple ingredients, many of which I already had at home:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots (or 6 small) (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower (600g) leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450ml vegetable stock
  • 300ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning
easy cauliflower soup

How to make cauliflower soup

  1. Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  2. Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelisedfrying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  3. Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.adding cauliflower florets to the fried shallots
  4. Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk. adding stock to the pan adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  5. Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft. soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  6. Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
  7. Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend.
  8. Add more liquid to thin out and reach your desired consistency. cooked soup transferred to a food processor soup blended until smooth
  9. Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
  10. Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.soup served and seasoned
  11. Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Different types of cauliflower soup

This recipe is the most basic of soup recipes and is pretty damn good just as it is. However, cauliflower is a versatile vegetable and so if you're looking for a soup with a bit more punch, why not try one of the options below:

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make this soup spicy

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander.

Curried soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

Roasted cauliflower gives this soup and extra layer of smokey, nutty flavours, which is especially good combined with the melted cheese or curry spices from the above ideas. Simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

Roasted cauliflower is also fantastic in a roasted cauliflower salad.

creamy cauliflower soup

How to make this recipe super creamy

This recipe is one thats creamy all on its own. The mild flavour and soft texture of the cauliflower means that a quick blitz in the blender will give a lusciously creamy result every time. However, if you are looking for extra creaminess or even wanting to call your soup 'cream of cauliflower' then you may want to add in a little cream.

To make this soup a cream of cauliflower recipe simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Cauliflower soup without cream

Can you freeze this recipe?

This soup recipe can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.

Other homemade soup recipes to try:

📖 Recipe

cauliflower soup
Print

Cauliflower Soup

Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.
Course Appetizer, starter or main
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 114.7kcal

Equipment

  • Large saucepan
  • Food processor or hand blender

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots or 6 small (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower 600g leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning and crusty bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  • Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelised
    frying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  • Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.
    adding ground nutmeg to the soup pan
  • Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk.
    adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  • Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft.
    soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  • Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
    cooked soup transferred to a food processor
  • Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend. Add more liquid to thin out the soup and stop when you reach your desired consistency.
    soup blended until smooth
  • Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
    soup served and seasoned
  • Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.
  • Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Video

Notes

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make spicy cauliflower soup

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander. Curried cauliflower soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

To make roasted cauliflower soup, simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

How to make cauliflower soup creamy

To make cream of cauliflower soup simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Can you freeze cauliflower soup?

Cauliflower soup can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.
Nutritional info cauliflower soup

Nutrition

Serving: 378g | Calories: 114.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 11.7g | Protein: 9.6g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.5g | Sodium: 280mg | Fiber: 3.2g | Sugar: 9.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy cauliflower soup recipe

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/feed/ 0
Chocolate Muffins https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/ https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/#comments Mon, 23 Dec 2019 15:49:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11735 Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.   This is the best brownie...

Read More

The post Chocolate Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.  

Chocolate muffins

This is the best brownie recipe if your after super quick muffins with plenty of chocolate. These muffins have all the qualities of chocolate brownies but are so much quicker and easier to serve up. They also allow for a bit of extra decoration if you are wanting to make chocolate brownies for handing out at a special occasion.

Chocolate muffins for 'bun in the oven' baby announcement

My own special reason for creating this delicious collection of chocolate muffins was to announce my pregnancy - 'Bun in the oven style'. I just had to do something food related 🙂

Baby boy Jones due 21st April 2020!! Very exciting 🙂 

Bun in the oven baby announcement

Is chocolate brownie, cake?

Chocolate brownie is dense and crumbly and so considered to be a bar or biscuit rather than cake. Usually chocolate brownie is eaten with your fingers as whereas cake is eaten with a fork or spoon.

What do you bake brownies in?

If you are making chocolate brownie in a slab that you can cut up into portions its best to use a square or rectangular cake tin (9 inch). Have a look at this chocolate brownies recipe for further details. However, in the case of this recipe the chocolate brownie mix is baked in muffin cases. Brownie muffins have the same texture and density as a normal piece of brownie and so will come out slightly heavier than a normal sponge muffin or cupcake.

TIP: Make sure the brownies are fully cooled before removing from the muffin cases. If the muffins are still warm the brownie will stick to the case and break up as you try to remove it.

Easy brownie recipe

Chocolate for brownies

The best chocolate for making brownie chocolate muffins is cooking chocolate and cocoa powder. Cooking chocolate will melt down smoothly and quickly and the cocoa powder will provide that intense flavour brownies are so well known for. Extra chocolate can also be added to brownies - and why not. Brownies are all about the chocolate and I love to add in white chocolate chips.

Brownie cakes

Ingredients for chocolate brownies

  • 220g Unsalted butter
  • 280g Cooking chocolate (milk)
  • 4 Medium eggs
  • 300g Golden caster sugar
  • 100g Plain flour
  • 100g cocoa powder
  • 100g white chocolate chips (optional) (or add milk chocolate chips/chunks or chopped hazelnuts)

How to make chocolate muffins

These decadent brownie chocolate muffins are made with an easy brownie recipe, which takes minutes to mix together: 

  1. Pre heat oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with 280g cooking milk chocolate broken into chunks. cubed butter and cooking chocolate in a bowl
  2. Microwave in 30 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted. Place melted chocolate to one side to cool slightly.
    NOTE: with the butter mixed in it won’t take long for this to fully melt - so make sure you keep an eye on it and don’t over heat.butter and chocolate melted in a bowl
  3. In a large mixing bowl whisk together 4 eggs and and 300g sugar. The mixing of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon and a proper sabayon is achieved by whisking quickly and evenly until the mix turns pale and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.whisking together eggs and sugar - known as a sabayon
  4. Next pour the melted chocolate into the sabayon and stir in well.stirring melted chocolate into the whisked sugar and eggs
  5. Sift in the flour and the cocoa powder and gently stir in with a spatula until fully combined.
    NOTE: the mixture will be very stiff and seem quite dry but keep stirring and the mixture will come together.folding flour and cocoa into the brownie mix
  6. Add the white chocolate chips and stir in well to distribute evenly.stirring white chocolate chips into brownie mix
  7. Place muffin cases into the muffin tin then spoon the brownie mix into the cases. Each case should be filled with around 1 heaped tablespoon of the mixture (case will be ¾ full). Use a second spoon to scrap the mixture into the case. This recipe will be enough to fill around 16 muffin cases.spooning browning mix into muffin cases
  8. Place muffins into the pre heated oven and cook for 25 minutes.
    TIP: cook for 20 minute if you would like the centre of your muffins to be slightly gooey.chocolate muffins fresh out of the oven
  9. Remove from the oven and allow to completely cool. 
    NOTE: Brownies will firm up as they cool - so don’t worry if they seem a bit ‘wobbly’ when you pull them out of the oven.  

Frosting for chocolate brownies

The topping used in this chocolate muffins recipe is a simple vanilla mascarpone cream, with just 4 ingredients and whisked up in seconds. To make Vanilla mascarpone cream you will need:

  • 225g Mascarpone cheese
  • 75ml Double cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste ( or seeds of 1 vanilla pod)
  • Icing sugar to taste
  1. Place the mascarpone, double cream and vanilla in a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined and smooth. Taste and mix in icing sugar to your liking. mascarpone cheese, cream and vanilla in a bowl
  2. Transfer the cream to a piping bag with nozzle and pipe onto the top of completely cooled brownies. NOTE: if brownies aren’t completely cool the cream will melt and run off the muffins.piping mascarpone cream onto chocolate muffins

  3. Dust with cocoa powder and serve.

Frequently asked questions about brownie chocolate muffins

How do you make gooey chocolate muffins?

To make your chocolate muffins slightly gooey in the middle, bake for just 20 minutes instead of the 25 minutes suggested in the recipe. The muffins will look under cooked at this point but they will set as they cool, leaving the middle slightly gooey.

Can you freeze chocolate brownie muffins?

Once baked allow the brownie chocolate muffins to cool completely then wrap in cling film or place in a container with a lid. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and allow to defrost on the side over night.

Can you make these chocolate muffins in advance?

Yes these chocolate muffins can be made up to 5 days in advance. Once made, allow to completely cool then store in an air tight container.

Other cake and muffin recipes you might like:

 1 hour to produce recipevegetarian recipeunder 400 calories recipeChristmas Recipe

📖 Recipe

chocolate brownie muffins
Print

Chocolate muffins

Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.  
Course Dessert, pudding, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 16 muffins
Calories 361.2kcal

Equipment

  • Large Microwaveable bowl
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Muffin tin
  • Muffin cases
  • Piping bag with nozzle for frosting

Ingredients

For the chocolate muffins

  • 220 g Unsalted butter
  • 280 g Cooking chocolate milk
  • 4 Medium eggs
  • 300 g Golden caster sugar
  • 100 g Plain flour
  • 100 g cocoa powder
  • 100 g white chocolate chips optional (or add milk chocolate chips/chunks or chopped hazelnuts)

For the Mascarpone cream frosting

  • 225 g Mascarpone cheese
  • 75 ml Double cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste or seeds of 1 vanilla pod
  • Icing sugar to taste

Instructions

To make the chocolate brownie muffins

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C
  • Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with 280g cooking milk chocolate broken into chunks. Microwave in 30 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted.
    NOTE: with the butter mixed in it won’t take long for this to fully melt - so make sure you keep an eye on it and don’t over heat.
    cubed butter and cooking chocolate in a bowl
  • Place melted chocolate to one side to cool slightly
    butter and chocolate melted in a bowl
  • In a large mixing bowl whisk together 4 eggs and and 300g sugar. The mixing of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon and a proper sabayon is achieved by whisking quickly and evenly until the mix turns pale and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.
    whisking together eggs and sugar - known as a sabayon
  • Next pour the melted chocolate into the sabayon and stir in well.
    stirring melted chocolate into the whisked sugar and eggs
  • Sift in the flour and the cocoa powder and gently stir in with a spatula until fully combined.
    NOTE: the mixture will be very stiff and seem quite dry but keep stirring and the mixture will come together.
    folding flour and cocoa into the brownie mix
  • Add the white chocolate chips and stir in well to distribute evenly.
    stirring white chocolate chips into brownie mix
  • Place muffin cases into the muffin tin then spoon the brownie mix into the cases. Each case should be filled with around 1 heaped tablespoon of the mixture (case will be ¾ full). Use a second spoon to scrap the mixture into the case. This recipe will be enough to fill around 16 muffin cases.
    spooning browning mix into muffin cases
  • Place muffins into the pre heated oven and cook for 25 minutes.
    TIP: cook for 20 minute if you would like the centre of your muffins to be slightly gooey.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to completely cool.
    NOTE: Brownies will firm up as they cool - so don’t worry if they seem a bit ‘wobbly’ when you pull them out of the oven.
    chocolate muffins fresh out of the oven

To make the mascarpone cream topping

  • Place the mascarpone, double cream and vanilla in a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined and smooth. Taste and mix in icing sugar to your liking.
    mascarpone cheese, cream and vanilla in a bowl
  • Transfer the cream to a piping bag with nozzle and pipe onto the top of completely cooled brownies.
    NOTE: if brownies aren’t completely cool the cream will melt and run off the muffins.
    piping mascarpone cream onto chocolate muffins
  • Dust with cocoa powder and serve.

Video

Notes

Nutritional info chocolate muffins

How do you make gooey chocolate muffins?

To make your muffins slightly gooey in the middle, bake for just 20 minutes instead of the 25 minutes suggested in the recipe. The muffins will look under cooked at this point but they will set as they cool, leaving the middle slightly gooey.

Can you freeze chocolate brownie muffins?

Once baked allow the brownie muffins to cool completely then wrap in cling film or place in a container with a lid. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and allow to defrost on the side over night.

Can you make these chocolate muffins in advance?

Yes these chocolate muffins can be made up to 5 days in advance. Once made, allow to completely cool then store in an air tight container.
TIP: Make sure the brownies are fully cooled before removing from the muffin cases. If the muffins are still warm the brownie will stick to the case and break up as you try to remove it.

Nutrition

Serving: 84g | Calories: 361.2kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5.5g | Fat: 21.5g | Saturated Fat: 15.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 40mg | Fiber: 0.7g | Sugar: 33.3g

PIN FOR LATER

chocolate muffins made with a chocolate brownie recipe and topped with vanilla mascarpone cream

The post Chocolate Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/feed/ 4
Yorkshire Parkin Recipe https://properfoodie.com/parkin-for-bonfire-night/ https://properfoodie.com/parkin-for-bonfire-night/#comments Mon, 12 Oct 2020 23:35:27 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5163 Yorkshire Parkin is an age old ginger cake recipe from Northern England. It's moist, sticky and full of wholesome oats; perfect for Autumn and Bonfire night! It takes just 15 minutes to whip together (no machine required), then sit back as it slowly bakes in the oven and fills the house with a delightful, treacle...

Read More

The post Yorkshire Parkin Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Yorkshire Parkin is an age old ginger cake recipe from Northern England. It's moist, sticky and full of wholesome oats; perfect for Autumn and Bonfire night! It takes just 15 minutes to whip together (no machine required), then sit back as it slowly bakes in the oven and fills the house with a delightful, treacle aroma.

Yorkshire parkin sliced up and presented piled on top of one another in a loaf tin.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Traditionally made with wholesome oatmeal and plenty of sticky black treacle, this is the best kind of ginger cake for cold and frosty nights. Great on its own but extra special when served warm and with custard.

This parkin recipe is one that has been tried and tested again and again. Originally adapted from my Grandmas recipe and then tweaked over the years to get it perfectly moist and crumbly. This rich textured and full flavoured parkin is the only cake recipe I want to be making and eating at the start of November.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a 9x9 inch tin (about 16 pieces) of this Yorkshire parkin recipe you will need:

Ingredients for Parkin recipe: self raising flour, unsalted butter, fine oats, semi skimmed milk, golden syrup, black treacle, ground ginger, salt, large egg, muscovado sugar

Ingredient notes

Self Raising flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Fine oats or Oatmeal: Oatmeal is finely sliced oats, which have a fine texture. This helps to produce the perfect chewy texture that parkin is so well known for. The best option for parkin is medium oatmeal. However, if you don't have access to oatmeal you can use normal oats but try to opt for rolled oats or fine porridge oats. If you only have whole oats you could blitz these in a food processor in order to break them up before adding to the recipe.

Muscovado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this is finer, has less molasses and a milder taste.

Golden syrup: Again, I believe this is a UK based product and is best not substituted if it can be helped. Golden syrup is thick and smooth with a golden colour. It has a unique sweet, caramel, buttery taste. If you can't find it in your local store you can easily make your own golden syrup.

Black treacle: Again, a UK product but it can be swapped for dark molasses.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 140°C (275°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper.
  2. In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, salt, ginger and oats.
  3. Melt the muscovado sugar, butter, treacle, and golden syrup over a low heat in a small pan.
  4. Pour the melted mixture into the flour mixture.4 images showing step by step instructions. 1. line tin, 2. mix dry ingredients, 3. melt butter, sugar, syrup and treacle in pan, 4. pour melted mix into dry mix
  5. Gently stir the melted ingredients into the dry mixture until completely combined.
  6. In a small jug whisk together the milk and egg and gradually add to the cake mixture.
  7. Carefully transfer the mixture to the lined tin and smooth evenly with a wooden spoon.
  8. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and bake for 1 hour or until a skewer comes out clean. Remove from the oven and leave in the tin to cool, then transfer to a wire rack before slicing into 16 square pieces.4 images showing step by step instructions. 5. mix wet and dry ingredients, 6, whisk milk and egg and gradually add to cake mix, 7. pour cake mix into tin and smooth evenly, 8. Bake for 1 hour then cool and place on a rack.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should parkin be stored?

Once made this lovely Yorkshire Parkin can be wrapped in cling film and stored in an air tight container for a good few weeks. The high amount of sugar means that it keeps really well and actually improves with age. - A bit like a Christmas cake.

Can this cake be frozen?

Once baked this cake can be frozen as a whole or sliced up and frozen as separate pieces. Wrap the whole thing or individual pieces in a double layer of cling film then freeze for up to 3 months.

To defrost leave on the side for a couple of hours - this will take more or less time to defrost depend on the size. Alternatively microwave in 30 second bursts until defrosted and slightly warmed through.

Why has my parkin sunk?

Not baking parkin for long enough can mean the gooey mixture inside will cause the cake to collapse/sink as it cools. However, leaving it for longer can make the parkin too dry. The best advice is to check with a skewer 10 minutes before the end baking. Then make a judgement based on how clean the skewer is.

What is the difference between parkin and ginger cake?

Yorkshire parkin uses oatmeal and plenty of black treacle. Lancashire parkin, although still northern and still parkin, skips out the treacle and uses just golden syrup. Gingerbread or ginger cake also uses golden syrup and of course ginger, but has no treacle and no oats or oatmeal.

In my opinion parkin isn't parkin without fine oats for that chewy texture and a good amount of black treacle, which makes the cake warming and moist and also gives it a super strong and slightly bitter flavour thats almost like liquorish.

Full slab of parkin on a chopping board being sliced with a knife into 16 equal square pieces.

🍰 Other Autumn baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Yorkshire parkin sliced up and presented piled on top of one another in a loaf tin.
Print

Yorkshire Parkin Recipe

Yorkshire Parkin is an age old ginger cake recipe from Northern England. It’s moist, sticky and full of wholesome oats; perfect for Autumn and Bonfire night! It takes just 15 minutes to whip together (no machine required), then sit back as it slowly bakes in the oven and fills the house with a delightful, treacle aroma.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 16 pieces
Calories 276kcal

Equipment

  • 9x9 square baking tin
  • Greaseproof paper
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small saucepan
  • Measuring jug
  • Wooden spoon

Ingredients

  • 250 g Self-raising flour
  • 2 teaspoon Ground Ginger
  • Pinch of Salt
  • 250 g Fine oats or medium oatmeal
  • 120 g Light brown muscovado sugar
  • 150 g Unsalted Butter
  • 200 g Black Treacle (or dark molasses)
  • 100 g Golden Syrup
  • 150 ml Semi Skimmed Milk
  • 1 large egg

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 140°C (275°F).
  • Line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper.
  • Sieve 250g self raising flour into a large mixing bowl. Add a pinch of salt, 2 teaspoon ground ginger and 250g fine oats/oatmeal then mix together with a wooden spoon.
  • Next place 120g muscovado sugar, 150g butter, 200g black treacle, and 100g golden syrup into a small sauce pan. Put the pan over a low heat and melt, whilst stirring well. Once fully melted, carefully pour into the flour mixture and stir together. The mixture will appear quite thick.
  • Whisk together the milk and egg. Then gradually add the milk mix to the cake mixture, stirring well between each addition. The mixture should now loosen up.
  • Once all the milk is added transfer the cake mix to the lined tin. Spread evenly across the base of the tin.
  • Place the tin in the centre of the oven and cook for an hour or until a skewer comes out clean.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven. Leave the parkin to cool completely before removing from the tin. This will ensure your parkin stays in one piece. Then transfer to a wire rack before slicing into 16 square pieces.

Notes

Substitutions:
  • The flour in this recipe can be replaced with 250g (2 cups) all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder.
  • Fine oats or medium oatmeal can be swapped for rolled oats or fine porridge oats. Or blitz whole oats in a food processor before adding to the recipe.
  • Replace muscovado sugar with dark brown sugar (Note that dark brown sugar is finer, has less molasses and a milder taste).
  • If you can’t get hold of UK golden syrup, have a go making your own.
  • Black treacle can be replaced with dark molasses.
 
Freezing and reheating: Wrap individual pieces or the whole slab of Parkin in a double layer of cling film and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side for a couple of hours - this will take more or less time to defrost depend on the size. Alternatively microwave in 30 second bursts until defrosted and slightly warmed through.
Sinking parkin: Not baking parkin for long enough can mean the gooey mixture inside will cause the cake to collapse/sink as it cools. However, leaving it for longer can make the parkin too dry. The best advice is to check with a skewer 10 minutes before the end baking. Then make a judgement based on how clean the skewer is.
Storage: Once made the Parkin can be wrapped in cling film and stored in an air tight container for a good few weeks. The high amount of sugar in this recipe means that it keeps really well and actually improves with age.

Nutrition

Serving: 83g | Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 292mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 259IU | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips & FAQs.

The post Yorkshire Parkin Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/parkin-for-bonfire-night/feed/ 18
Plum and Rhubarb Crumble https://properfoodie.com/plum-and-rhubarb-crumble/ https://properfoodie.com/plum-and-rhubarb-crumble/#comments Tue, 02 Nov 2021 20:18:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14836 Plum and rhubarb crumble, also known as rhubarb crisp, is a classic and comforting British dessert. This easy rhubarb crumble is bursting with sticky caramelised fruit and finished with a traditional crispy crumble topping. Its made extra special with the addition of juicy plums, which adds an natural kick of sweetness to balance out the...

Read More

The post Plum and Rhubarb Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Plum and rhubarb crumble, also known as rhubarb crisp, is a classic and comforting British dessert. This easy rhubarb crumble is bursting with sticky caramelised fruit and finished with a traditional crispy crumble topping. Its made extra special with the addition of juicy plums, which adds an natural kick of sweetness to balance out the tart rhubarb.  

plum and rhubarb crumble cooked in a cast iron pan.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The middle of summer is the best and most productive time of year for rhubarb. If you've ever grown your own, you will know that at this time of year it goes crazy. Rhubarb crumble is always the first recipe on the list when a large batch of this tart and lovely fruit is ready.

By happy coincidence, mid summer also brings with it plump and juicy plums. Plums and rhubarb were just meant to be together when it comes to a crumble. One balances out the other perfectly they both roast down into a deliciously sweet and sticky filling.

🥘 Ingredients

To make plum and rhubarb crumble you will need:

Ingredients for Plum and Rhubarb crumble

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Fruit filling: You can replace the plums and rhubarb with your preferred fruit filling. Try an apple crumble or just go for all rhubarb or all plums.

Ginger and mixed spice: Sweet spices are great in crumble fro adding extra flavour and warmth. However, you can leave these out or substitute with other sweet spices such as cinnamon, star anise or nutmeg.

Demerara sugar: Demerara has large crunchy crystals with a caramel taste, which is perfect for a crumble. It can be substituted with brown sugar although this has a finer texture and more subtle taste.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Preheat oven to 200°C (390°F). Place plain flour and cold cubed butter into a large mixing bowl. Rub the butter into the flour using your finger tips until well mixed and like breadcrumbs. Set to one side.
  2. In a separate large mixing bowl mix together the sliced plums, chopped rhubarb, 150g Demerara sugar, ground ginger and mixed spice. Stir until the sugar and spice fully coats the fruit.
  3. Next transfer the fruit mixture to an ovenproof dish or cast iron pan. Spread the fruits out to cover the base of the dish. Scatter the crumble mixture over the top of the fruit. Then sprinkle the remaining 50g of sugar evenly over the top of the crumble.
  4. Place the plum and rhubarb crumble in the centre of the oven and bake for 30-40 minutes or until bubbling and golden brown. Four images showing how to make plum and rhubarb crumble for steps 1-4

💭 Expert tips

Crumble: For ease use a food processor to pulse the butter and flour into a crumble

Extra crispy topping: For an extra crispy crumble, finish off the baked crumble under the grill for 1 -2 minutes. Pay close attention as the topping will burn easily.

More crumble: This recipe has more fruit than crumble. I usually concentrate the majority of crumble in the centre and leave some fruit uncovered around the edges. This means that the fruit around the edges has more space to bubble and for the liquids to evaporate, leaving behind richer, sweeter and more caramelised fruit. However, if you would prefer a thicker crumble topping that covers all your fruit, then double the amounts of butter and flour in this recipe.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Do you need to peel rhubarb for a crumble?

Tougher rhubarb, from later on in the season may stringy and so will benefit from the outer edge being lightly peeled. However, in general rhubarb doesn't need to be peeled.

Should rhubarb be cooked before baking?

No, although raw rhubarb is very hard and robust it softened very quickly when exposed to heat. If cooked before baking you will find that the rhubarb becomes too soft and looses its shape.

How to store?

Cooked fruit crumble is best stored in the fridge. Once cooked allow to completely cool then cover with a lid or cling film and refrigerate for up to 4 days. Reheat in the microwave for 1-2 minutes. Note that topping will not be as crisp when reheated.

Can you freeze rhubarb crumble?

This recipe is better frozen before baking and with the raw crumble and filling stored separately. When ready to eat, defrost on the side for a few hours then make up the fruit crumble and bake according to this recipe.

Can you prepare this recipe in advance?

Both the filling and the crumble topping can be prepared in advanced. Refrigerate both separately. When you are ready, put the fruit crumble together and bake. The crumble may need slightly longer in the oven due to the ingredients being chilled.

Plum and rhubarb crumble baked in a iron pan with some served in a bowl with ice cream.

🍨 Other British desserts:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Rhubarb crumble recipe in a round cast iron pan with spoon
Print

Plum and Rhubarb Crumble

Plum and rhubarb crumble, also known as rhubarb crisp, is a classic and comforting British dessert. This easy rhubarb crumble is bursting with sticky caramelised fruit and finished with a traditional crispy crumble topping. Its made extra special with the addition of juicy plums, which adds an natural kick of sweetness to balance out the tart rhubarb.  
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 593kcal

Equipment

  • 2 large mixing bowls
  • 1 ovenproof dish or cast iron pan

Ingredients

  • 175 g plain flour
  • 100 g cold butter cubed
  • 250 g plums de-stoned and sliced in half
  • 450 g rhubarb washed and chopped into 2-3cm pieces
  • 1 teaspoon ground ginger
  • ½ teaspoon mixed spice
  • 150 g Demerara sugar for the fruit filling
  • 50 g Demerara sugar for the crumble

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 200°C (390°F). Place plain flour and cold cubed butter into a large mixing bowl. Rub the butter into the flour using your finger tips until well mixed and like breadcrumbs. Set to one side.
    175 g plain flour, 100 g cold butter
  • In a separate large mixing bowl mix together the sliced plums, chopped rhubarb, 150g Demerara sugar, ground ginger and mixed spice. Stir until the sugar and spice fully coats the fruit.
    150 g Demerara sugar, 250 g plums, 450 g rhubarb, 1 teaspoon ground ginger, ½ teaspoon mixed spice
  • Next transfer the fruit mixture to an ovenproof dish or cast iron pan. Spread the fruits out to cover the base of the dish. Scatter the crumble mixture over the top of the fruit. Then sprinkle the remaining 50g of sugar evenly over the top of the crumble.
    50 g Demerara sugar
  • Place the plum and rhubarb crumble in the centre of the oven and bake for 30-40 minutes or until bubbling and golden brown.

Video

Notes

Crumble: For ease use a food processor to pulse the butter and flour into a crumble
Extra crispy topping: For an extra crispy crumble, finish off the baked crumble under the grill for 1 -2 minutes. Pay close attention as the topping will burn easily.
More crumble: This recipe has more fruit than crumble. I usually concentrate the majority of crumble in the centre and leave some fruit uncovered around the edges. This means that the fruit around the edges has more space to bubble and for the liquids to evaporate, leaving behind richer, sweeter and more caramelised fruit. However, if you would prefer a thicker crumble topping that covers all your fruit, then double the amounts of butter and flour in this recipe.
Do you need to peel rhubarb for a crumble? Tougher rhubarb, from later on in the season may stringy and so will benefit from the outer edge being lightly peeled. However, in general rhubarb doesn't need to be peeled.
Should rhubarb be cooked before baking? No, although raw rhubarb is very hard and robust it softened very quickly when exposed to heat. If cooked before baking you will find that the rhubarb becomes too soft and looses its shape.
How to store? Cooked fruit crumble is best stored in the fridge. Once cooked allow to completely cool then cover with a lid or cling film and refrigerate for up to 4 days. Reheat in the microwave for 1-2 minutes. Note that topping will not be as crisp when reheated.
Can you freeze rhubarb crumble? This recipe is better frozen before baking and with the raw crumble and filling stored separately. When ready to eat, defrost on the side for a few hours then make up the fruit crumble and bake according to this recipe.
Can you prepare this recipe in advance? Both the filling and the crumble topping can be prepared in advanced. Refrigerate both separately. When you are ready, put the fruit crumble together and bake. The crumble may need slightly longer in the oven due to the ingredients being chilled.

Nutrition

Serving: 250g | Calories: 593kcal | Carbohydrates: 96g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 186mg | Potassium: 498mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 57g | Vitamin A: 956IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Aug 2020. Updated in Nov 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Plum and Rhubarb Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/plum-and-rhubarb-crumble/feed/ 7
Pear Chutney https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/#comments Mon, 10 Jan 2022 23:54:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5424 Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas...

Read More

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Brown sugar and ginger spiced pears, poached in cider and reduced to a sweet and spicy chutney. Your cheese and biscuits is crying out for this recipe! This easy homemade chutney recipe is also great for using up a glut of pears or generally making use of and preserving some lovely autumnal fruit. It also makes for a pretty good foodie gift or Christmas present, just preserve in jars and add some tags.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney. To make this spiced pear chutney you will need:

Ingredients to make homemade pear chutney.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.

Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.

Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.

Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.

Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.

Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
  2. Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
  3. Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally.4 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.2 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

What makes chutney a chutney?

Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.

Which vinegar is best for chutney?

Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.

A small jar filled with homemade chutney with a larger jar of chutney in the background.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
Print

Pear Chutney

Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.
Course Christmas, condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 200kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel (for transferring chutney to jars)
  • Jars (for storage)

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 4 medium Echalion shallots finely chopped - 300g
  • 3 large conference pears peeled and chopped into 2cm chunks - 650g
  • 2 red Gala apples cored and chopped into 1cm pieces with skins left on - 180g
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and finely chopped
  • 350 ml apple cider
  • 75 ml white wine vinegar 5% acetic acid
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 250 g demerara sugar
  • 1 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 1 cinnamon stick

Instructions

  • Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 4 medium Echalion shallots
  • Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
    3 large conference pears, 2 red Gala apples, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil
    350 ml apple cider, 75 ml white wine vinegar, ½ a lemon juiced, 250 g demerara sugar, 1 teaspoon mixed spice, 1 cinnamon stick
  • Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally
  • After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.
Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.
Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.
Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.
Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.
Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.
What makes chutney a chutney? Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.
Which vinegar is best for chutney? Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.
To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 110ml jar | Calories: 200kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 7mg | Potassium: 248mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2017. Updated in Jan 2022 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/feed/ 16
Christmas Cake Muffins with Sugared Pecans https://properfoodie.com/christmas-cake-muffins/ https://properfoodie.com/christmas-cake-muffins/#comments Mon, 28 Nov 2016 09:00:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2956 With my Christmas cakes made and all safely tucked away in tins, I feel a little bit cheated that I now have to wait for a slice after all that hard work. So this year, as a way to have my cake and eat it too; I've made Christmas cake muffins! And I'm really quite...

Read More

The post Christmas Cake Muffins with Sugared Pecans appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
With my Christmas cakes made and all safely tucked away in tins, I feel a little bit cheated that I now have to wait for a slice after all that hard work. So this year, as a way to have my cake and eat it too; I've made Christmas cake muffins! And I'm really quite pleased with these little cups of festive goodness. Not only can I enjoy a little treat in the lead up to Christmas but I can also check my Christmas cake recipe and make sure I'm happy with this years batch.

christmas cake muffins iced

How to make Christmas cake muffins

For these muffins I made up another batch of my Christmas cake mix, filled 18 muffin cases 3 quarters full and baked for 35 minutes. A lot quicker that baking a cake 🙂  Have a quick look at my Christmas cake post for instructions and step my step pictures for making the Christmas cake mix.

This recipe makes 18 Christmas muffins so there's plenty to go around and I have lots of friends and family who are more than happy to receive a couple of muffins of Christmas cheer.

christmas cake muffins

Straight out of the oven and topped with a scoop of ice cream or a blob of thick brandy cream, these Christmas muffins are crazy good.

The mixture contains a bit of cocoa powder, freshly grated nutmeg and a helping of orange juice; flavours which are all heightened from the warmth of the oven. I was so happy with my baking triumph that I was left nibbling the last crumbs off the inside of case. However, for these cakes to be true Christmas cake muffins I felt I should give a least half of them a bit of icing and some Christmas decor. The other half I left as they were, as they are pretty good on their own and its nice to have the option of icing or brandy cream 🙂

If you're not a huge fan of Christmas cake, why not try these brownie chocolate muffins or if you're trying to keep it healthy then have a quick look at my flourless mint chocolate courgette muffins, which would make a fantastic alternative.

Christmas muffins iced

Icing Christmas cake muffins

So the trick with the decoration for these cakes is to make sure that once baked there is still a little gap at the top of the muffins cases where the icing can sit. Filling the cases 3 quarters full  with cake mix tends to work out about right. However, if you do decide to ice only half then you can afford to have a few cases that are maybe slightly over-filled and so don't leave enough room for icing.

Once the Christmas muffins had cooled and I'd selected the best ones for icing I mixed 4 tablespoons icing sugar with a tablespoon of water and carefully iced the cakes using a teaspoon to spread the icing to the edges of each case. Before the icing set I topped the Christmas muffins with  dried cranberries and my homemade sugared pecans and chocolate stars.

Deliciously easy and another reason to get the Christmas tunes on and bop around the kitchen, using a wooded spoon as a mic 🙂

Other baking recipes you may like to try

Loving these muffins? Then why not have a look at my Ginger spiced pumpkin muffins, chocolate muffins, or my Raspberry and lemon muffins

For larger bakes: Lemon drizzle cake, Apple crumble, bakewell tart, plum and rhubarb crumble, Yorkshire parkin recipe, sticky apple treacle tart, banana bread, Banana cake. Or why not try Roast Chestnuts at home.

If you also happen to be stuck for ideas for your Christmas shopping, then check out my Christmas gifts for foodies - jam packed full of present ideas for the food lovers in your life.

📖 Recipe

christmas cake muffins
Print

Christmas Cake Muffins with Sugared Pecans

Christmas cake muffins, as they are or topped with icing sugar, and homemade sugared pecans and chocolate stars
Prep Time 40 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes

Ingredients

For the Cake mix

  • 650 g dried mixed fruits sultanas, raisins, currants and candied citrus peel
  • 200 ml sherry or your preferred spirit
  • Juice of 2 medium oranges
  • 250 g softened unsalted butter in 2cm cubes
  • 250 g light brown muscovado sugar
  • 1 tablespoon black treacle
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 225 g plain flour
  • 75 g ground almonds
  • 25 g cocoa powder
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon freshly ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

For icing and decoration

  • 4 tablespoon icing sugar
  • 1 tablespoon water
  • Sugared pecans and chocolate stars See link above for ingredients and method

Instructions

  • Click the links above to go to my Christmas cake recipe and see step by step instructions and pictures for preparing the cake mix.
  • To ensure your dried fruit is plump, juicy and full of flavour; try to soak it overnight in your preferred choice of alcohol and fruit juice. I always use sherry and usually soak 650g of dried mixed fruit with 200ml of fino sherry and the juice from two average sized oranges. Cover with cling film and leave on the side overnight.
  • Pre-heat the oven to 160 degrees C (fan)
  • This recipe makes enough cake mix for 18 muffins. Fill muffin trays with 18 cases (or spit into batches if you are limited with trays or oven space).
  • Set up your food mixer or mix with an electric hand whisk: The 250g of cubed butter and 250g light muscovado sugar go into the mixer first, along with 1 tablespoon of black treacle.
  • Start the mixer on a low speed until the ingredients have started to combine and then turn up to the top speed and leave to mix for at least 10 minutes - the butter and sugar should have combined into a light and fluffy mixture.
  • The next stage is the addition of the eggs, which takes time and patience if it is done correctly. Have your dry ingredients (plain flour, ground almonds, cocoa powder, mixed spice, nutmeg, and vanilla) already mixed in a bowl to one side - spoonful’s of this may be needed if the mixture starts to split. Beat the 4 medium eggs together in a pour-able jug. Return to the butter mix and put the mixer back on high. Slowly, slowly trickle the beaten eggs into the butter mix. This usually takes me 15-20 minutes.
  • If at any point you feel the mixture is getting too sloppy or if you think too much egg went in all at once; then add a spoonful of the dry ingredients to prevent the mix from splitting. Ideally the mixture should stay creamy and well whipped.
  • Once all the egg has been mixed in remove the bowl from the mixer; add the remaining flour mixture and the soaked fruits and then use a spatula to gently fold in these ingredients.
  • Grab a couple of dessert spoons and carefully spoon the mixture into your muffins cases to around three quarters full.
  • Place the muffins in the centre of the pre-heated oven and bake for 35 minutes. Check 25 minutes before the end of the baking time by inserting a skewer into the centre of one of the muffins - if the skewer comes out clean then the muffins are done. If not, return to the oven and check at 5 minute intervals.
  • Once baked through, carefully transfer the muffins to a wire rack and cool. Steal one and consume whilst still warm – for tasting purposes.
  • Once cooled, select muffins that have enough space at the top for icing. Ice each one with icing sugar and finish off with your favourite Christmas cake toppings. See links above for my favourite toppings: Homemade sugared pecans and chocolate stars.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g

Click here for nutritional information

**Estimated nutritional information per muffin and per 100g of un-iced Christmas cake muffin. If you want find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

Christmas cake muffins topped with icing and homemade sugared pecans and chocolate stars | ProperFoodie

The post Christmas Cake Muffins with Sugared Pecans appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/christmas-cake-muffins/feed/ 29
Lemon Drizzle Cake https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/ https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/#respond Sun, 23 Feb 2020 23:17:44 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12398 Lemon drizzle made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll...

Read More

The post Lemon Drizzle Cake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Lemon drizzle made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll ever make.

lemon drizzle cake with one piece sliced off at the front and lemons and fresh mint in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

This is a super easy cake recipe that can be in the oven and smelling amazing in next to no time. Much like banana bread, almond carrot cake or even Christmas cake, the secret to a good cake is of course is in the mixing.

💭 Top tips

  • Before making the cake mixture, make sure the butter has been left at room temperature for a couple of hours and is soft.
  • Whip together the butter and sugar until creamy. This can take up to 10 minutes in a stand mixer and even longer if you're mixing by hand. Its so worth it though.
  • Gradually add the the beaten eggs just a bit at a time whilst still mixing the creamed butter and sugar. This usually takes a good 10 minutes. If you add the eggs too quickly the mixture will split.
  • If you're worried too much egg has gone in at any point and the mixture looks like it might split - mix in a couple of tablespoons of the self raising flour. This will bring the mixture back together and allow you to continue to add the eggs.
  • Gently hand fold in the remaining flour and zest with a spatula (don't mix in mechanically) so keeping the mixture fluffy and full of air.
  • Bake the cake in a low oven (160 degrees C / 320 degrees F) and avoid opening the oven door during the first few minutes of baking. Higher temps and opening the door can result in the cake sinking in the middle.
  • Bake for around 45 minutes or until an inserted skewer comes out clean.
  • Use fresh lemon juice and zest for the best lemon flavour. To flavour the cake use the zest from 2 lemons. Then mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of sugar and spoon over whilst the cake is still warm after baking.
  • For extra decoration and lemon flavour make lemon icing by mixing lemon juice with icing sugar and spoon or pipe over your cooled cake.
  • I like also like to add extra toppings of freshly chopped mint leaves and lemon zest.
Lemon drizzle cake with lemon icing being sliced into with a knife

🥘 What you will need to make this recipe

Jump to Recipe

To make a loaf cake (10 slices) you will need the following ingredients:

  • 150g (⅔ cup) Softened butter cut into small cubes
  • 150g (¾ cup) Caster Sugar
  • 3 Eggs beaten
  • 200g (1 ¾ cups) Self raising flour
  • Lemon zest from 2 unwaxed lemons (10g)
  • 2 lemons juiced and 100g (½ cup) Sugar for the drizzle
  • 100g (1 cup) icing sugar and 1 lemon juiced (15ml) for the lemon icing
  • Mint leaves and extra lemon zest to decorate

Reference for cup measurements

Lemon drizzle cake with lemon icing and topped with lemon zest and mint

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by pre heating the oven to 160 degrees C / 320 degrees F. Then prepare the loaf tin by lining with greaseproof paper. Use margarine or butter to help stick the paper to the sides and base of the tinloaf cake tin lined with grease proof paper
  2. Add 150g of softened, cubed butter and 150g caster sugar to a mixing bowl or to your stand mixer/food processor. Cream together the sugar and butter using the beater attachment on the stand mixer. Alternatively use a hand held whisk or food processor.butter and sugar in the stand mixer
  3. Start the mixer off slowly and as the ingredients start to combine take it up to full speed. Then mix for around 10 minutes or until the sugar and butter are creamy.Cream together butter and sugar
  4. Gradually add 3 beaten eggs to the creamed sugar and butter, whilst keeping the mixer on high. (or add a bit of egg and then whisk in by hand before adding the next bit). Adding the egg should be done as slowly as possible and can take at least 10 minutes. TIP: If you add too much egg too quickly the mixture will split and be ruined. To help avoid this you can add 1 or 2 tablespoons of the Self raising flour, ahead of time. So make sure you already have your flour weighed out and if you're worried the mixture might split at any time - add in a bit of the flour and continue to mix.Gradually adding beaten egg to the creamed butter and sugar
  5. After all the egg is combined into the mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Add the self raising flour (or the remaining flour of you have already used some) and the zest of 2 unwaxed lemons. Use a spatula to gently fold the flour and zest into the mixture. Ensuring that the batter stays light and fluffy.Self raising flour and lemon zest added to cake mixture
  6. Carefully transfer the cake mix to the lined loaf tin and smooth down the top using the spatula.cake mixture transferred to a lined loaf tin
  7. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes or until a inserted skewer comes out clean. Leave the cake in the tin for the moment.Cake baked for 45 minutes or until skewer comes out clean
  8. In a small bowl mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of caster sugar to form a syrup. Prick the warm cake all over with a small skewer or cocktail stick. Spoon the lemon syrup all over the warm cake allowing some of the syrup to run into the holes. As the cake cools in the tin the syrup will set and crystallise on the outer edge of the cake.spoon over lemon and sugar mixture
  9. Once the cake is cooled slightly and the lemon syrup has set (after 20 minutes or so) remove from the tin and place on a wire rack to continue cooling. Next, mix together the icing sugar and juice of 1 lemon (15ml) to make lemon icing. The lemon icing is an optional step.Sugar and lemon juice mixed together
  10. Drizzle the icing over the cooled lemon drizzle cake. I used a piping bag for this but you can just spoon it over if you prefer. Finally top with freshly chopped mint leaves and extra lemon zestDrizzle cooled cake with lemon icing
Slice of lemon cake on a plate with the rest of the cake in the background

❓ Frequently asked questions

How long will this cake keep?

Lemon drizzle cake will keep well in a sealed container for at least 4 days - sometimes longer.

Best way to store

Lemon drizzle is best stored in an air tight container and to keep it extra fresh you can also wrap in cling film and then in foil.

Can you freeze this cake?

You can freeze lemon drizzle but I recommend you freeze the cooled cake as it is without any lemon syrup or lemon icing added. Upon defrosting the syrup and icing can be added. Freeze for up to 3 months and fully defrost at room temperature over night

How do you add lemon flavour to cake?

The best way to add lemon flavour to a cake is to add the zest of a couple of lemons to the raw cake mix. This allows the lemon flavour to be distributed evenly and then baked with the cake. Using a dry ingredient also means that the consistency of the cake won't be altered. After baking a lemon syrup can be poured over the warm cake for a boost of extra citrus flavour.

Why does my cake sink in the middle?

Lemon drizzle cake tends to sink if its bakes at too high a temperature of if the oven door is opened repeatedly during the first 10 minutes of baking. Bake at 160 degrees C or 320 degrees F and avoid opening the oven door until most of the baking time has passed. You may check that the cake isn't catching on the top after 30 minutes.

🍰 Other baking recipes you might like to try

📖 Recipe

lemon drizzle cake
Print

📋 Lemon Drizzle Cake

Lemon drizzle cake recipe made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll ever make.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, sweet
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 1 loaf cake
Calories 273.7kcal

Equipment

  • Loaf tin
  • Greaseproof paper
  • Grater to zest lemons
  • Stand mixer or handheld mechanical whisk
  • Spatula
  • Cooling wire rack
  • Piping bag for lemon icing (optional)

Ingredients

For the lemon cake:

  • 150 g (⅔ cup) Softened butter
  • 150 g (¾ cup) Caster Sugar
  • 3 medium Eggs beaten
  • 200 g (1 ¾ cups) Self raising flour
  • Lemon zest from 2 unwaxed lemons 10g

For the lemon drizzle:

  • 2 lemons juiced
  • 100 g (½ cup) Sugar

To decorate:

  • 100 g (1 cup) icing sugar
  • 1 lemon juiced 15ml
  • Mint leaves and extra lemon zest

Instructions

  • Start by pre heating the oven to 160 degrees C / 320 degrees F. Then prepare the loaf tin by lining with greaseproof paper. Use margarine or butter to help stick the paper to the sides and base of the tin.
  • Add 150g of softened, cubed butter and 150g caster sugar to a mixing bowl or to your stand mixer/food processor.
  • Cream together the sugar and butter using the beater attachment on the stand mixer. Alternatively use a hand held whisk or food processor.
Start the mixer off slowly and as the ingredients start to combine take it up to full speed. Then mix for around 10 minutes or until the sugar and butter are creamy.
  • Gradually add 3 beaten eggs to the creamed sugar and butter, whilst keeping the mixer on high. (or add a bit of egg and then whisk in by hand before adding the next bit). Adding the egg should be done as slowly as possible and can take at least 10 minutes. 

    TIP: If you add too much egg too quickly the mixture will split and be ruined. To help avoid this you can add 1 pr 2 tablespoons of the Self raising flour, ahead of time. So make sure you already have your flour weighed out and if you're worried the mixture might split at any time - add in a bit of the flour and continue to mix. 



  • After all the egg is combined into the mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Add the self raising flour (or the remaining flour of you have already used some) and the zest of 2 unwaxed lemons.
  • Use a spatula to gently fold the flour and zest into the mixture. Ensuring that the batter stays light and fluffy.



  • Carefully transfer the cake mix to the lined loaf tin and smooth down the top using the spatula.



  • Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes or until a inserted skewer comes out clean. Leave the cake in the tin for the moment.
  • 


In a small bowl mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of caster sugar to form a syrup.
  • Prick the warm cake all over with a small skewer or cocktail stick. Spoon the lemon syrup all over the warm cake allowing some of the syrup to run into the holes. As the cake cools in the tin the syrup will set and crystallise on the outer edge of the cake.



  • Once the cake is cooled slightly and the lemon syrup has set (after 20 minutes or so), remove from the tin and place on a wire rack to continue cooling.
  • Next, mix together the icing sugar and juice of 1 lemon (15ml) to make lemon icing. The lemon icing is an optional step.
 Drizzle the icing over the cooled lemon drizzle cake. I used a piping bag for this but you can just spoon it over if you prefer.
  • Finally top with freshly chopped mint leaves and extra lemon zest.

Video

Notes

How long will this cake keep?
Lemon drizzle cake will keep well in a sealed container for at least 4 days - sometimes longer.
Best way to store
Lemon drizzle is best stored in an air tight container and to keep it extra fresh you can also wrap in cling film and then in foil.
Can you freeze this cake?
You can freeze lemon drizzle but I recommend you freeze the cooled cake as it is without any lemon syrup or lemon icing added. Upon defrosting the syrup and icing can be added. Freeze for up to 3 months and fully defrost at room temperature over night.
How do you add lemon flavour to cake?
The best way to add lemon flavour to a cake is to add the zest of a couple of lemons to the raw cake mix. This allows the lemon flavour to be distributed evenly and then baked with the cake. Using a dry ingredient also means that the consistency of the cake won't be altered. After baking a lemon syrup can be poured over the warm cake for a boost of extra citrus flavour.
Why does my cake sink in the middle?
Lemon drizzle cake tends to sink if its bakes at too high a temperature of if the oven door is opened repeatedly during the first 10 minutes of baking. Bake at 160 degrees C or 320 degrees F and avoid opening the oven door until most of the baking time has passed. You may check that the cake isn't catching on the top after 30 minutes.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 273.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 2.4g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3.8g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 43.4mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 36.8g | Vitamin A: 183.1IU | Vitamin C: 3.9mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Lemon Drizzle Cake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/feed/ 0
Soft Bake Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe https://properfoodie.com/soft-bake-cookies-chocolate-chunks/ https://properfoodie.com/soft-bake-cookies-chocolate-chunks/#comments Fri, 28 Jul 2017 12:31:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4566 Easy soft bake chocolate chip cookies recipe, with a crumbly outer edge, a gooey centre and melted chunks of Cadburys dairy milk chocolate. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 🍪 Cookies with dairy milk chocolate If you're looking for a little, soft, gooey treat to bake up in the kitchen, then look no further. Definitely, 100 percent make these chocolate...

Read More

The post Soft Bake Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Easy soft bake chocolate chip cookies recipe, with a crumbly outer edge, a gooey centre and melted chunks of Cadburys dairy milk chocolate.

homemade soft bake cookies cooling on a wire rack

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍪 Cookies with dairy milk chocolate

If you're looking for a little, soft, gooey treat to bake up in the kitchen, then look no further. Definitely, 100 percent make these chocolate chip cookies, right now! I cannot stress enough how good they are, nor give enough warning about their all-consuming, addictive nature. They must contain some kind of magic, or maybe its just all the sugar and chocolate 🙂

All I can think about right now is how good my treacle and cardamom homemade ice cream would be sandwiched between two of these luscious cookies. 😯 

⏲️ How do you bake soft cookies?

Making soft bake cookies is all about the length of time they are in the oven. I find that baking for around 10 minutes gives a nice soft cookie, whereas 12 minutes gives more of a crunch.

soft bake cookies on a plate

🥘 What you'll need to make this recipe

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: JUMP TO RECIPE CARD

To make 12 of these delicious dairy milk soft bake cookies the ingredients you will need are:

  • 250g Plain flour
  • 100g Caster sugar
  • 250g Cadburys dairy milk chocolate (broken into chunks)
  • 1 medium egg and 1 egg yolk
  • 175g soft brown sugar
  • 150g unsalted butter (room temp)
  • Half teaspoon bicarbonate of soda
  • Pinch of sea salt

Cadburys chocolate substitute: If you can't get hold of any Cadburys chocolate or if you're not a dairy milk fan, you can replace with any other bar of chocolate. Alternatively, why not try this recipes with Chocolate chips, chunks of Terrys chocolate orange, chunks of Galaxy, Malteasers ....the options are endless!

soft bake cookies ingredients

🔪 Step by step instructions

The recipe for these soft bake cookies really is very simple and straight forward. I've used as few ingredients as possible, in order to create a traditional, bog-standard cookie.

  1. Prepare dry ingredients: Pre heat the oven to 200 degrees C. Mix together flour, bicarb of soda and salt in a large bowl.
  2. Mix wet ingredients: Use a stand mixer or electric whisk to combine the soften butter with the brown and white sugar
  3. Add eggs: Gradually add the whisked eggs to the butter and sugar mix to form a cookie dough mix.
  4. Fold in dry ingredients: Add the dry ingredients and the chocolate to the cookie dough mix and fold together until full combined.
  5. Bake: Form balls from the cookie dough and spread evenly on a baking tray. Place in the centre of the oven and bake for 10 minutes or until just golden brown.
  6. Leave to cool: Cool on a wire rack, then serve and enjoy!
Step by step images for making soft bake chocolate chip cookies

🍬  What does brown sugar do during baking?

This recipe calls for 2 types of sugar: the brown is needed due to its molasses content, which is acidic and reacts with the bicarb. The white sugar balances out the brown sugar and stops the cookies becoming too dark during baking. The reaction with the molasses and bicarb helps to create a nice, light cookie due to the production of a bit of air.

And its well worth the extra effort to weigh out two types of sugar. These cookies are extra special, extra tasty and certainly a treat we'll be having plenty more of in the future.

chocolate chip cookies

❄️ Can I freeze soft bake cookies?

It's best to freeze these soft bake cookies before baking. For best results shape the unbaked cookie dough into a cylinder. Wrap with cling film and freeze. When you're ready to bake, remove the frozen cookie dough from the freezer. Unwrap and slice the cylinder into circles around a cm thick. Place the frozen circles onto a baking tray and bake for 20 minutes or until cookies just start to turn golden brown.

💭  Recipe tips for chocolate chip cookies

Use soften, room temperature butter, which will combine with the sugar and make it easier to cream together

Use both brown and white sugar to ensure an even golden colour when baking

Do not rush the addition of the eggs as the mixture can split of added too quickly. If you think you may have added to much egg at any point, add a couple of spoonfuls of the dry ingredients mixture before continuing. 

After forming your cookie dough balls, make sure you space them out well on the tray - they will spread once in the oven.

For a soft bake cookie remove from the oven after around 10 minutes or just as the cookies start to turn golden brown. The cookies may appear underdone at this point but they will harden slightly as they cool. For a harder more crumbly cookie, bake for 12 minutes.

🍰 Other baking recipes you may like to try

For other easy bakes you can try at home have a look at my apple crumble, cinnamon swirls, Bakewell tart, chocolate muffins, raspberry and lemon muffins, banana bread, gooey chocolate brownies recipe, or my super easy lemon drizzle cake.

Other biscuit recipes

Let me know what you think of these dairy milk cookies by leaving a comment and rating below! You can also save this recipe on pinterest: Soft Bake cookies. Or if you prefer you can pin the video!

 30 minutes to produce recipeunder 400 calories recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

homemade soft bake cookies
Print

📋 Soft Bake Cookies with Dairy Milk Chocolate Chunks

Easy and quick soft bake cookies, with a crumbly outer edge, gooey centre and dotted with melted chunks of Cadburys dairy milk chocolate
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, pudding, Snack, treat
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 12 cookies
Calories 377.9kcal

Equipment

  • Electric Stand Mixer and hand whisk
  • Flat baking tray

Ingredients

  • 250 g Plain Flour
  • ½ teaspoon Bicarbonate of Soda
  • Pinch of crushed sea salt
  • 150 g Unsalted butter room temp
  • 175 g Soft brown sugar
  • 100 g Caster Sugar
  • 1 medium whole egg
  • 1 medium egg yolk
  • 250 g Cadburys milk chocolate roughly broken up into chunks

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 200 degrees C (fan). Sieve the flour into a large bowl and mix in the bicarb and salt. Set to one side.
    mixing together dry ingredients
  • Cube the soft butter and add to your mixer bowl (or add to a standard large bowl if you are mixing by hand). Add both the brown sugar and caster sugar to the butter and cream together.
    TIP: If using a mixer, start on a low speed and gradually increase to full. Mix on high for 5-10 minutes until creamy and lighter in colour. If mixing by hand use a large wooden spoon and beat for several minutes until light and creamy.
    combining butter and sugar in the food mixer
  • Next, whisk together the whole egg and egg yolk and then slowly add this to your butter mix, with the mixer still on high. Do not rush the addition of the egg. If mixing by hand: add a bit of the egg mixture then stir - continue to add & stir until all the egg is fully combined.
    Gradually adding whisked egg to butter and sugar
  • Next add the flour and chocolate to the mixture and use a spatula to fold in well. Make sure all the flour is fully combined with the cookie mixture.
    mixing flour and chocolate chunks into cookie dough mixture
  • You should now have a nice gooey cookie dough ready for baking. Use your hands to shape the dough into little balls (around 2 - 2.5 cm diameter) and place on a baking tray. Leave plenty of space around each ball as they will spread as they bake. I baked mine in 2 batches to ensure plenty of space.
    making balls out of cookie dough
  • Place the cookie balls in the oven and bake for 10 minutes or until slightly golden. To ensure a soft baked cookie, remove from the oven just as they start to turn golden brown, the cookie dough may appear undercooked but this will set further during cooling and help to keep the cookies soft.
    cooking cookies on wire rack
  • Once removed from the oven, leave to cool on the tray for 5 minutes before carefully transferring to a wire rack. Cool for a further 20 minutes - then enjoy!!
    soft bake cookies fresh out of the oven

Video

Notes

Can I freeze these cookies?
It's best to freeze these dairy milk cookies before baking. For best results shape the unbaked dough into a cylinder. Wrap with cling film and freeze. When you're ready to bake, remove the frozen cookie dough from the freezer. Unwrap and slice the cylinder into circles around a cm thick. Place the frozen circles onto a baking tray and bake for 20 minutes or until cookies just start to turn golden brown.
Recipe tips:
  • Use soften, room temperature butter, which will combine with the sugar and make it easier to cream together
  • Use both brown and white sugar to ensure an even golden colour when baking
  • Do not rush the addition of the eggs as the mixture can split of added too quickly. If you think you may have added to much egg at any point, add a couple of spoonfuls of the dry ingredients mixture before continuing. 
  • After forming your cookie dough balls, make sure you space them out well on the tray - they will spread once in the oven.
  • For a 'soft bake' cookie remove from the oven after around 10 minutes or just as the cookies start to turn golden brown. The cookies may appear underdone at this point but they will harden slightly as they cool. For a harder more crumbly cookie, bake for 12 minutes.
  • Chocolate chip cookies can mean any kind of chocolate so feel free to use standard chocolate chips or dairy milk chunks. Or go for something completely different like chunks of chocolate orange, fruit and nut chunks, malteasers, broken up matchmakers - whatever takes your fancy.
nutritional information for dairy milk cookies

Nutrition

Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 377.9kcal | Carbohydrates: 52.1g | Protein: 4.5g | Fat: 18.3g | Saturated Fat: 10.8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5.1g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 165mg | Fiber: 1.3g | Sugar: 35.4g | Vitamin A: 164.6IU | Calcium: 84.4mg | Iron: 1.3mg

The post Soft Bake Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/soft-bake-cookies-chocolate-chunks/feed/ 13
Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/#comments Fri, 09 Dec 2016 18:18:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3045 A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top...

Read More

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tips for handling and sealing sterilised jars.

Featured ad for Marigold

fig and apple chutney with cheese

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Theres something so sophisticated and decadent about dotting cheese and biscuits with a good dollop of chutney. The best chutney is sweet and tangy all at the same time, which helps to cut through the strong cheese. Figs and balsamic lend themselves perfectly to this task. The seedy figs and dark vinegar also create a chutney with a stunning, deep purple colour and a slight crunch as you bite through it. Delicious.

Figs, by the way, also do exceedingly well in a sweet and sticky homemade fig jam. Or if you're after a different flavoured chutney try my spiced pear and cider chutney.

Fig, apple and balsamic chutney in a bowl

🍽 What equipment do I need?

I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this fig chutney recipe fills about 10 of these. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) this chutney recipe will fill around 6 of these.

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

Preparing the ingredients for the recipe is pretty straight forward. Its mainly a lot of chopping before everything is piled into one pan and simmered for around 30 minutes. To make 10 small jars or 6 large jars of fig chutney you will need the following:

  • 350g red onions chopped
  • 500g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 1 tbsp olive oil
  • 550g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 2 tsp mixed spice
  • 350g muscovado sugar
  • ½ tsp nutmeg
  • ½ tsp cinnamon
  • 150ml red wine vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)
  • 250ml balsamic vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)

Note: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney. So it just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off)

♨️ Sterilising jars

To sterilise my jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.

🔪 Instructions

To make the fig chutney:

  1. In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.chopping onions with a non slip board
  2. Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.Slicing figs
  3. Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  4. Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  5. After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  1. Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  1. Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
  2. Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.fig chutney in jars

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I preserve fig and apple chutney?

As figs have a borderline acid pH, its advised to add acid to the jam - usually lemon juice. The acid helps to preserve the fruit correctly. In this case I've added vinegar instead. In terms of this particular recipe the 400ml of vinegar and 350g of sugar should be enough to preserve the chutney for at least 6 months. This is assuming that both vinegars have an acetic acid content of at least 5% and that the chutney is brought to boiling point during cooking and kept there for 30 minutes.

How do I seal the jars?

The chutney should also be transferred to sterilised jars (see above for sterilisation process) whilst it is still hot and jars should be sealed immediately. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How should chutney be stored?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. If it does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks.
This seal check and the sterilising of the jars in the oven should be enough to ensure the chutney stores well in the cupboard for 6 months. - Have a read of these preserving guidelines for more advice on storing chutneys/jams.
Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

💭 Top tips with Marigolds

  1. Surprisingly a Marigold glove can come in quite handy when you have a lot to chop. I tend to find that my chopping board wanders off or spins around when I'm chopping. However, pop a marigold glove under the board and problem solved.rubber glove under a chopping board to stop it slipping
  2. Marigolds are also particularly useful when it comes to handling and sealing hot jars. I usually sterilise my jars in a low oven and then transfer the hot chutney straight to the heated jars. The process of getting the chutney into the jar and getting the lids screwed on tight can be tricky when the jars and chutney are so hot. However, pop on a pair of Marigolds and your hands are automatically protected from the heat. In addition, the rubber glove provides extra grip so you can ensure the lids of the jars are screwed on super tight.using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Little homemade jars of chutney also make great Christmas presents - just add a cute label and ribbon and you're good to go. Even better - pair this gift up with a jar of my homemade Cranberry, Apple and Nutmeg sauce or my Spiced Pear and Cider Christmas Chutney 🙂

Other Christmas Recipes

📖 Recipe

Fig and apple chutney with cheese and biscuits
Print

📋 Fig and apple chutney with balsamic vinegar

A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tip for handling and sealing sterilised jars.This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney.
Course chutney, condiment, Dessert, sauces, side
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 47.1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 350 g red onions chopped
  • 500 g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 550 g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 350 g muscovado sugar
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 150 ml red wine vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%
  • 250 ml balsamic vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%

Instructions

To make the chutney:

  • In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.
    chopping onions with a non slip board
  • Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.
    Slicing figs
  • Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.
    chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  • Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  • After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  • Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  • Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
    fig chutney in jars
  • Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.
    using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Notes

Jars: I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this recipe fills about 10 of those. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) it will probably fill around 6 of these.
Should I peel the apples?: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker, adds more flavour and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney – so just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off).
How do I preserve my chutney?: In this recipe the 350g of sugar and 400ml of vinegar will preserve the chutney. Make sure that you use vinegars with at least 5% acetic acid content and bring the chutney to the boil and keep there for at least 30 minutes for this to be effective.
How do I sterilise my jars?: To sterilise the jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.
How do I seal the jars?: Place hot chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How is should chutney be stored?: You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Marigold tips: Use a marigold glove under your chopping bard to keep it steady. Put on a pair of marigolds to protect your hands when handling hot jars and to get a better grip when screwing on the lids.
nutritional info fig and apple chutney

Nutrition

Serving: 45g | Calories: 47.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 10.9g | Vitamin A: 3.6IU | Vitamin C: 1.1mg | Calcium: 14.6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Please note that the above post contains affiliate links, which means if you click these links and then go on to purchase the products, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay.  I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/feed/ 27
Easy Bread Rolls Recipe https://properfoodie.com/easy-mini-bread-rolls/ https://properfoodie.com/easy-mini-bread-rolls/#comments Fri, 19 Aug 2016 12:35:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2201 Easy bread rolls recipe! Made from scratch with store cupboard ingredients, these tasty, bake at home bread rolls are perfect for serving up at a dinner party or alongside your soup. Made in a traditional yet simple way theres no bread machine or dough hook here; just simple bread-making, from scratch, using your hands. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post Easy Bread Rolls Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Easy bread rolls recipe! Made from scratch with store cupboard ingredients, these tasty, bake at home bread rolls are perfect for serving up at a dinner party or alongside your soup. Made in a traditional yet simple way theres no bread machine or dough hook here; just simple bread-making, from scratch, using your hands.

homemade white bread rolls made with strong bread flour

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Freshly baked bread rolls are one of lifes little joys. The dedication put into to the kneading, the anticipation of the dough rising, that amazing smell filling the house during baking and that satisfying first break into a warm, crusty, homemade bread roll. Wonderful.

This easy bread rolls recipe is a great option for anyone baking bread for the first time. Its a tried and tested traditional recipe and one that I use again and again. If bread-making is something you haven't done before or something that you've tried and decided not to attempt again; then these bread rolls are the best place to start. I found that my bread making became a little easier and more successful once I'd understood the basic principles a little better. Generally making bread is all about creating the right environment for each ingredient. 

freshly baked bread rolls cooling on a wire rack

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make 8 small bread rolls you will need the following:

  • 150 ml (⅔ cup) warm semi-skimmed (2%) milk
  • 1 tbsp Olive oil
  • 1 tsp Caster sugar
  • 225g (1 ½ cups) Strong white bread flour
  • 1 tsp Crushed sea salt
  • 10g Fresh yeast or 7g (2 ¼ tsp) sachet of dried yeast
  • Extra oil for oiling work surface and bowl (do not use flour)
  • 1 egg and a splash of milk for glazing.
  • Poppy seeds or sesame seeds to decorate (optional)

Reference for cup measures

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Gently warm 150ml of semi-skimmed (2%) milk to body temperature (37°C), either on the stove or in the microwave. Test temperature with your finger. If it feels to hot allow to cool before using.
  2. Next add 1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon caster sugar and the yeast to the milk. Stir gently to dissolve. Leave for a couple of minutes to allow the yeast to activate.
  3. Sieve the flour and salt into a large mixing bowl and mix well.
  4. Next add the milk and yeast mixture to the flour a little at a time (add ¾ initially) and mix using finger tips or a wooden spoon. Add enough liquid until it starts to come together and forms a nice sticky dough. Gradually add remaining milk making sure all the yeast has been added. Use luke warm water if more liquid is required (better to be too wet than too dry).
  5. Drizzle a bit of oil on a clean work surface to prevent the dough from sticking. Turn the dough out onto the oiled work surface and knead for 10 minutes by hand until smooth and elastic.
  6. The 1st prove: Place the dough in a lightly oiled bowl and cover with cling film and leave in a warm place to double in bulk, this will take approx. 1 hour.
  7. After an hour remove the cling film and hit dough firmly with your hand to knock back. This will release the built up CO2. Turn out onto the work surface and use finger tips to flatten then roll into an even sausage shape. Use a large knife to halve, halve again and halve again into 8 even pieces.
  8. To create the roll shape place the first piece of dough on the work surface and then place the flat of your hand on top. Make a circular motion and gradually move in your thumb and allow knuckles to rise, creating a smooth sphere. Make sure you press quite firmly in order to remove creases. Repeat with each piece of dough.
  9. The 2nd prove: Place the rolls onto a lined or greased baking tray. Brush rolls with egg wash (1 egg whisked with a bit of milk) and sprinkle with sesame seeds or poppy seeds if desired. Cover tray with lightly oiled cling film. Leave them in a warm place until they appear well risen (30 mins).
  10. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (FAN) (350°F) whilst waiting for the second prove.
  11. After 30 minutes you should see a rise to the bread rolls. Add a tiny pinch of sea salt to the top of each roll then bake for 25 minutes - check at 15 minutes. Bake until the bread sounds hollow when tapped on the bottom.
  12. Cool on a rack before devouring. And don't forget to enjoy that freshly baked bread smell! 

🍞 Why do we use yeast to make bread?

The most important ingredient in bread making is the yeast, which is the thing that makes bread rise. Yeast will activate and produce carbon dioxide when given food (sugar), warmth and moisture (milk). Bread rises as carbon dioxide is produced and becomes trapped.

I prefer to use fresh yeast; mainly because its completely free! All supermarkets with a bakery will prepare bread using fresh yeast and will generally have a mountain of it. Supermarkets can't sell yeast as its a live product, but they can give it to customers for free upon request. Usually fresh yeast will keep in a sealed bag or container, in the fridge for 2-3 weeks.

However, theres nothing wrong with dried yeast and either can be used in this recipe. Just remember that you will need to use a little more fresh yeast compared to dried.

It is also important to know that high temperatures or too much salt can kill the yeast. Just like us, yeast is at its happiest at around 37°C. So at the start of this recipe its important to only warm the milk to around body temperature. (Use a thermometer to double check if you are unsure and allow it to cool if it is too hot).

🥖 What is gluten?

Gluten is the protein that allows bread to stretch as carbon dioxide is released from the yeast. The gluten protein is formed when 2 other proteins, present in flour, come together during kneading. Bread flour contains higher amounts of these proteins.

💭 Recipe tips

Fully dissolve the yeast: Fresh yeast can sink to the bottom of the liquid and not fully dissolve. Check this by mixing with your finger tips - tracing the bottom of the milk vessel ensuring no clumps of yeast are stuck at the bottom.

Mix the salt into the flour rather than the milk: Salt will add flavour to the rolls but can kill the yeast, so best to mix and disperse this in the flour before the milk is added. 

Use oil not flour on your work surface: When kneading the dough use oil on the work surface to stop it sticking. Don’t use flour as this will dry out the dough and a sticky dough is preferable when bread making.

To make evenly sized bread rolls: To create evenly sized bread rolls you can weigh each piece of dough once you have halved into 8 pieces. However, rolling the dough into a sausage and then halving 3 times is usually pretty accurate. 

To make crusty bread rolls: To create a better crust on your rolls you can spray the inside of the oven with water at regular intervals during baking. Or place a roasting tin at the bottom of the oven and fill with water at the start of baking.

❓Frequently asked questions

Why does the milk need to be warm?

The warm milk allows the yeast to activate. However, if its too hot (more than body temperature) it will kill the yeast.

Why is there sugar in this recipe?

Sugar added to the milk will feed the yeast and help it to activate properly. Yeast needs food, warmth and moisture to activate. The sugar is the food and the milk is the warmth and moisture.

Why do we knead dough?

Kneading is one of most important stages in bread making and provides the opportunity for the two proteins found in flour to come together and form gluten. It also allows the yeast to work its magic and release carbon dioxide (CO2). Use power from your shoulder to knead thoroughly, the dough will go slightly whiter as you knead. Stretch out to see if snaps or stretches, continue kneading until the dough becomes nice and stretchy.

How long should I knead the dough?

Dough should be kneaded for at least 10 minutes. You will know when the dough has been kneaded enough when it becomes stretchy and elastic. The best test is to roll the dough into a ball and then press firmly into the centre with your finger. The dough should bounce back.

Why does bread need to be proved twice?

Allowing the dough to prove just means to rest it and give it the opportunity to rise. Over proofing can produce unstructured or uneven bread. So the 1st prove should only be for around 1 hour. Knocking back (hitting the risen dough with your hand) removes the air meaning the dough can be handled again and shaped. A second prove allows the shaped dough to rise again, this usually requires less time (around 30 minutes).

When are the bread rolls ready?

To test if the rolls are cooked through, carefully turn over and tap on the bottom. The roll should sounds hollow.

Why is my bread heavy?

The main cause of heavy or dense bread is a lack of rise. Bread can have a reduced rise for a number of reasons including not enough protein, not kneaded for long enough, left to prove for too long, too much salt.
- Not enough protein in the bread would mean less gluten and so not as much CO2 can be trapped. The protein content comes from the flour, which is why it is important to use a flour with high protein content (bread flour). 
- If the bread isn’t kneaded for long enough the gluten won’t have enough time to form and build up. In addition the yeast may not be fully activated. 
- If the dough is left to prove for too long the yeast can die (over-fermentation). Its important to only prove for an hour in the first prove and then just 30 minute in the second prove. If you want to do the first prove over night you can do this if you place the dough in the fridge. The cold slows down the fermentation process.
- Too much salt can kill the yeast so stopping the formation and trapping of CO2.

Can you freeze bread rolls?

Yes once baked and fully cooled you can freeze bread rolls. However, bread rolls are far better fresh out of the oven. Defrosted bread can have a slight stale texture to it. To freeze place rolls in a container or food bag and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost remove from the freezer and leave on the side for an hour. Alternatively use the bread defrost function on a microwave.

🥗 How to serve

These easy bread rolls are the perfect accompaniment to a fresh bowl of soup or stew. Or for something different why not use them for mini picnic sandwiches or create mini burgers (sliders). I also love to have barbecued pulled beef brisket piled high on a roll and finished off with a dollop of homemade coleslaw - perfection!

🥐 Other types of bread

For a sweeter kind of bread try:

This bread roll recipe and its principles can also apply to any type of savoury bread, including rolls, loaves or any other shape of bread. Just shape the dough as you please once its ready. I also like to add extra ingredients to my bread to give it a more interesting flavour. A couple of teaspoons of herbs, spices, nuts etc can be added to the flour at the start of the recipe. My favourites are:

  • Focaccia bread (rosemary)
  • Tiger bread (cheese) 
  • Olive bread
  • Walnut bread
  • Pita bread (onion seed)
  • Artisan bread
  • Wholemeal roti bread

If you enjoy making your own bread why not try making your own homemade fresh pasta.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment and star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on pinterest.

 2hr45m to produce recipeUnder 200 calories recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

homemade bread rolls
Print

Easy Bread Rolls Recipe

Easy bread rolls recipe! Made from scratch with store cupboard ingredients, these tasty, bake at home bread rolls are perfect for serving up at a dinner party or alongside your soup. Made in a traditional yet simple way theres no bread machine or dough hook here; just simple bread-making, from scratch, using your hands.
Course lunch, side, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 rolls
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 ml (⅔ cup) warm semi-skimmed (2%) milk
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Caster sugar
  • 225 g (1 ½ cups) Strong white bread flour
  • 1 teaspoon Crushed sea salt
  • 10 g Fresh yeast or 7g (2 ¼ tsp) sachet of dried yeast
  • Extra oil for oiling work surface and bowl do not use flour
  • 1 egg and a splash of milk for glazing
  • Poppy seeds or sesame seeds to decorate optional

Instructions

  • First, gently warm 150ml of semi-skimmed (2%) milk to body temperature (37°C), either on the stove or in the microwave. Test temperature with your finger. If it feels too hot allow to cool before using.
  • Next add 1 tablespoon olive oil and 1 teaspoon caster sugar to the milk. Then add the yeast and stir gently to dissolve. Leave for a couple of minutes to allow the yeast to activate. TIP: if using fresh yeast gently rub it between your fingers, once its in the milk, in order to fully dissolve.
  • Next sieve the flour and salt together into a large mixing bowl. Mix well using tips of fingers or a whisk.
  • Next add the milk and yeast mixture to the flour a little at a time (add ¾ initially) and mix using finger tips or a wooden spoon. Add enough liquid until it starts to come together and forms a nice sticky dough. Be careful not to squeeze the dough with your hand as it starts to come together. Ensure you incorporate all flour from bottom and sides. Gradually add remaining milk making sure all the yeast has been added. Use luke warm water if more liquid is required (better to be too wet than too dry).
  • Drizzle a bit of oil on a clean work surface to prevent the dough from sticking. Turn the dough out onto the oiled work surface and knead for 10 minutes by hand until smooth and elastic. TIP: test if the dough is ready by rolling into a ball then press into the centre with your finger. The dough should give an exaggerated bounce back.
  • The 1st prove: Place the dough in a lightly oiled bowl and cover with cling film and leave in a warm place to double in bulk, this will take approx. 1 hour.
  • After an hour remove the cling film and hit dough firmly with your hand to knock back. This will release the built up CO2. Turn out onto the work surface and use finger tips to flatten then roll into an even sausage shape. Use a large knife to halve, halve again and halve again into 8 even pieces. TIP: If you want to be really even with your rolls you can weigh each piece to check they are the same size.
  • To create the roll shape place the first piece of dough on the work surface and then place the flat of your hand on top. Make a circular motion and gradually move in your thumb and allow knuckles to rise, creating a smooth sphere. Make sure you press quite firmly in order to remove creases. Repeat with each piece of dough.
  • The 2nd prove: Place the rolls onto a lined or greased baking tray. Brush rolls with egg wash (1 egg whisked with a bit of milk) and sprinkle with sesame seeds or poppy seeds if desired. Cover tray with lightly oiled cling film. Leave them in a warm place until they appear well risen (30 mins).
  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (FAN) (350°F) whilst waiting for the second prove.
  • After 30 minutes you should see a rise to the bread rolls. Add a tiny pinch of sea salt to the top of each roll then bake for 25 minutes - check at 15 minutes. Bake until the bread sounds hollow when tapped on the bottom. TIP: Spraying the oven with water at regular intervals can help create a better crust.
  • Cool on a rack before devouring. And don't forget to enjoy that freshly baked bread smell 🙂

Notes

Recipe tips:

Fully dissolve the yeast: Fresh yeast can sink to the bottom of the liquid and not fully dissolve. Check this by mixing with your finger tips - tracing the bottom of the milk vessel ensuring no clumps of yeast are stuck at the bottom.
Mix the salt into the flour rather than the milk: Salt will add flavour to the rolls but can kill the yeast, so best to mix and disperse this in the flour before the milk is added.
Use oil not flour on your work surface: When kneading the dough use oil on the work surface to stop it sticking. Don’t use flour as this will dry out the dough and a sticky dough is preferable when bread making.
Even bread rolls: To create evenly sized bread rolls you can weigh each piece of dough once you have halved into 8 pieces. However, rolling the dough into a sausage and then halving 3 times is usually pretty accurate.
Crusty bread rolls: To create a better crust on your rolls you can spray the inside of the oven with water a regular intervals during baking. Or place a roasting tin at the bottom of the oven and fill with water at the start of baking.

Frequently asked questions:

Why does the milk need to be warm? The warm milk allows the yeast to activate. However, if its too hot (more than body temperature) it will kill the yeast.
Why is there sugar in this recipe? Sugar added to the milk will feed the yeast and help it to activate properly. Yeast needs food, warmth and moisture to activate. The sugar is the food and the milk is the warmth and moisture.
Why do we knead dough? Kneading is one of most important stages in bread making and provides the opportunity for the two proteins found in flour to come together and form gluten. It also allows the yeast to work its magic and release carbon dioxide (CO2). Use power from your shoulder to knead thoroughly, the dough will go slightly whiter as you knead. Stretch out to see if snaps or stretches, continue kneading until the dough becomes nice and stretchy.
How long should I knead the dough? Dough should be kneaded for at least 10 minutes. You will know when the dough has been kneaded enough when it becomes stretchy and elastic. The best test is to roll the dough into a ball and then press firmly into the centre with your finger. The dough should bounce back.
Why does bread need to be proved twice? Allowing the dough to prove just means to rest it and give it the opportunity to rise. Over proofing can produce unstructured or uneven bread. So the 1st prove should only be for around 1 hour. Knocking back (hitting the risen dough with your hand) removes the air meaning the dough can be handled again and shaped. A second prove allows the shaped dough to rise again, this usually requires less time (around 30 minutes). 
When is the bread ready? To test if the rolls are cooked through, carefully turn over and tap on the bottom. The roll should sounds hollow.
Why is my bread heavy? The main cause of heavy or dense bread is a lack of rise. Bread can have a reduced rise for a number of reasons including not enough protein, not kneaded for long enough, left to prove for too long, too much salt.
  • Not enough protein in the bread would mean less gluten and so not as much CO2 can be trapped. The protein content comes from the flour, which is why it is important to use a flour with high protein content (bread flour).
  • If the bread isn’t kneaded for long enough the gluten won’t have enough time to form and build up. In addition the yeast may not be fully activated.
  • If the dough is left to prove for too long the yeast can die (over-fermentation). Its important to only prove for an hour in the first prove and then just 30 minute in the second prove. If you want to do the first prove over night you can do this if you place the dough in the fridge. The cold slows down the fermentation process.
  • Too much salt can kill the yeast so stopping the formation and trapping of CO2.
Can you freeze bread rolls? Yes once baked and fully cooled you can freeze bread rolls. However, bread rolls are far better fresh out of the oven. Defrosted bread can have a slight stale texture to it. To freeze place rolls in a container or food bag and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost remove from the freezer and leave on the side for an hour. Alternatively use the bread defrost function on a microwave.
bread rolls nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 51g | Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 4.2g | Fat: 2.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.3g | Sodium: 320mg | Potassium: 96.8mg | Fiber: 0.9g | Sugar: 1.8g | Vitamin A: 3.8IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 0.8mg

The post Easy Bread Rolls Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/easy-mini-bread-rolls/feed/ 2
Massaman curry paste https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry-paste/#respond Tue, 14 Jan 2020 23:11:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11912 Massaman curry paste made from scratch and whipped up in just 5 minutes. First blend together the ingredients to make Thai red curry paste, before adding extra spices to create Thai yellow curry paste and then finally massaman paste. Save a bit of each as its made so you can have the whole collection of...

Read More

The post Massaman curry paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Massaman curry paste made from scratch and whipped up in just 5 minutes. First blend together the ingredients to make Thai red curry paste, before adding extra spices to create Thai yellow curry paste and then finally massaman paste. Save a bit of each as its made so you can have the whole collection of Thai pastes jarred up and ready to go. Next time you fancy a Thai curry you'll be spoilt for choice. 

Massaman curry paste

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

This recipe is used as the base to create the sauce for Massaman curry. Massaman paste is actually created from Thai red curry paste but with sweeter spices added like cardamom seeds and ground cinnamon. As a result Massaman curry is much sweeter and milder than its other Thai relatives; Thai red curry and Thai green curry.

Other milder options for a curry night in include fish biryani, and chicken tikka masala curry with homemade tikka masala paste. For more recipe ideas for a cosy night in have a look at my romantic dinner recipes post.

🥄 How to use paste in a curry

Curry paste is usually made by blending together raw ingredients such as fresh chillies, fresh herbs, shallots, garlic and spices. Therefore, when making curry the curry paste is usually added to the pan first in order to start the cooking process and the release the flavour from all the herbs and spices. For Massaman curry, around 2 tablespoon of Massaman curry paste will be enough to make a curry for four people.

🌶 Massaman vs red curry paste

Thai red paste

Thai red curry paste is the base for making all other Thai curry pastes, apart from Thai green curry paste, which is stand alone and used for Thai green curry. From Thai red curry paste you can make Thai red curry or add further spices for Thai yellow curry paste or Massaman curry paste. In addition to this you can also use it to make Thai jungle curry, which is usually given extra heat by adding fresh chillies and dried chillies.

Thai yellow paste

Thai yellow curry paste is made by adding ground coriander, cumin, curry powder and black pepper to red paste. The result is a paste that is slightly milder in both flavour and colour. This paste can be used in Thai yellow curry and Chicken Panang curry.

Thai Massaman paste

Thai Massaman curry paste is made from the same ingredients as Thai red curry paste  but with a few additions. First, coriander, cumin, curry powder and black pepper are added to make Thai yellow paste.

Then Massaman paste is made by adding curry powder, cinnamon and cardamom to the Thai yellow paste. Ingredients are separated below so you can stop at either the Thai red or Thai yellow stage and save some of the paste for making red or yellow curries before continuing to make the Massaman paste.

a blend of Thai ingredients in a bowl with cardamom and cinnamon at the side

🥘 Ingredients

Thai red paste

  • 3 large shallots finely chopped (or 6 small - 75g)
  • 3 large red chillies finely chopped (50g)
  • 2 tbsp garlic paste or 1 clove chopped fresh garlic
  • 1 tbsp Thai galangal paste or freshly chopped ginger
  • 1 tbsp chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste
  • 1 tbsp kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel 
  • Splash of fish sauce
  • 1 tsp ground coriander
  • 1 tsp ground turmeric
  • ½ tbsp oil
  • Tap water if needed to loosen the mixture and help to blend.

Thai yellow paste

  • 4 tablespoon Thai red paste (made from the above)
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

Massaman paste

  • 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste (made from the above)
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • Seeds from 2 cardamom pods
placing thai ingredients in a blender

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by blending together the ingredients for Thai red paste. In a small blender add 3 large chopped shallots, 3 chopped red chillies, 1 finely chopped garlic clove or 2 tablespoon garlic paste, 1 tablespoon freshly chopped ginger or ginger paste, 1 tablespoon chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste,1 tablespoon of kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel, 1 tsp ground coriander, 1 tsp ground turmeric, and ½ tbsp oil. Blend until smooth adding tap water to loosen the mixture if requiredfish sauce
  2. At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the paste for making Thai red curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.thai red curry paste freshly blended
  3. Next use the rest of the red paste as a base for making Thai yellow curry paste. Take 4 tablespoon of the Thai red paste and place in a small bowl. To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.adding spices to a bowl
  4. At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai yellow curry or Panang curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.Freshly made Thai yellow curry paste
  5. Finally, use the rest of the Thai yellow curry paste as a base for making Massaman paste. Take 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste and place in a small bowl. To this add 1 teaspoon curry powder, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the seed from 2 cardamom pods. TIP: use the flat side of knife to apply pressure to the cardamom pods and split them open. Discard the cardamom pod shells. Gently crush the cardamom seeds with the sharp edge of knife before adding to the paste mixture.adding spices to a bowl
  6. If you aren't planning to use the paste in a curry immediately, transfer to an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost overnight in the fridge before use. To make massaman curry for 4 people you will need about 2 tablespoon of massaman curry paste.freshly made massaman curry paste

💭 Recipe tips

Can you freeze this paste?: Yes, store in a jar or sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before use.

How much curry paste is needed in a curry?: Around 2 tablespoon of curry paste will be enough to make a curry for four. However, you can add slightly more or less depending on how strong you want the curry to be.

Is this recipe spicy?: Massaman paste, along with Thai yellow paste, is one of the mildest. Both red and green curry pastes are made with fresh chillies which provide the spice. As more spices are added to the red paste to make Massaman paste, the initial heat becomes diluted so providing a more gentle flavour.

Make in advance: Curry pastes are great made in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make mine and then split into small containers – each container has enough for one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away. 

Blending paste: Use a small blender to blend together the paste. If the ingredients don’t blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.

Scaling this recipe: If you plan to save half of each paste as its made, the amount of useable paste available to make the next paste will halve each time. Times up the amount of ingredients to make more. Or if you don't want to save either the Thai red paste or Thai yellow paste but want it all to go into Massaman paste: Count out the number of table spoons of red curry paste you have made and then add the appropriate amount of Thai yellow spices and Massaman spices to this (knowing that the amounts listed above make 8 tablespoon of thai red paste and 4 tablespoon of Thai yellow paste).

Example: You have 8 tablespoon of Thai Red paste that you would like to turn into Massaman paste. To this add 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoon curry powder, few grinds of black pepper, 4 teaspoon curry powder, 4 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the crushed seeds from 8 cardamom pods.

📖 Other paste recipes

Let me know what you think of this Massaman paste recipe by leaving a comment and rating below! You can also save this recipe on pinterest: Or if you prefer you can pin the video!

 15 minutes to produce recipeunder 100 kcalvegetarian recipebetter than takeaways fakeaway recipe

📖 Recipe

Massaman curry paste
Print

📋 Massaman curry paste

Massaman curry paste made from scratch and whipped up in just 5 minutes. First blend together the ingredients to make Thai red curry paste, before adding extra spices to create Thai yellow paste and then finally massaman paste. Save a bit of each as its made so you can have the whole collection of Thai pastes jarred up and ready to go. Next time you fancy a Thai curry you'll be spoilt for choice. 
THE RECIPE BELOW WILL ALLOW YOU TO SAVE HALF OF THE AMOUNT OF THAI RED PASTE AND THAI YELLOW PASTE THAT YOU MAKE ALONG THE WAY AND WILL LEAVE YOU WITH AROUND 2-3 tablespoon OF MASSAMAN CURRY PASTE - ENOUGH TO MAKE A CURRY FOR 4 PEOPLE.
Course condiment, paste
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 tablespoon
Calories 15.6kcal

Equipment

  • Small blender or nutribullet

Ingredients

For Thai red paste:

  • large shallots finely chopped  or 6 small - 75g
  • large red chillies finely chopped  50g
  • tbsp  garlic paste or 1 clove chopped fresh garlic
  • tbsp  Thai galangal paste or freshly chopped ginger
  • tbsp  chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste
  • tbsp  kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel
  • Splash of fish sauce
  • tsp  ground coriander
  • tsp  ground turmeric
  • ½  tbsp  oil
  • Tap water if needed to loosen the mixture and help to blend.

For Thai Yellow paste:

  • 4 tablespoon Thai red paste made from the above
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

For Massaman curry paste:

  • 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste made from the above
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • 2 cardamom pods

Instructions

To make Thai red paste

:

  • Start by blending together the ingredients to make Thai red paste. In a small blender add 3 large chopped shallots, 3 chopped red chillies, 1 finely chopped garlic clove or 2 tablespoon garlic paste, 1 tablespoon freshly chopped ginger or ginger paste, 1 tablespoon chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste,1 tablespoon of kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel, 1 tsp ground coriander, 1 tsp ground turmeric, and ½ tbsp oil. Blend until smooth adding tap water to loosen the mixture if required

.
    Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  • At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the paste for making Thai red curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.
    thai red curry paste freshly blended

To make Thai yellow paste

:

  • Next use the rest of the Thai red paste as a base for making Thai yellow paste. Take 4 tablespoon of the red paste and place in a small bowl. To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.
    adding spices to Thai red paste to make thai yellow paste
  • At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai yellow curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.
    Freshly made Thai yellow curry paste

To make Massaman curry paste

:

  • Finally, use the rest of the Thai yellow paste as a base for making Massaman paste. Take 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste and place in a small bowl. To this add 1 teaspoon curry powder, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the seed from 2 cardamom pods.
  • TIP: use the flat side of knife to apply pressure to the cardamom pods and split them open. Discard the cardamom pod shells. Gently crush the cardamom seeds with the sharp edge of knife before adding to the paste mixture.
    mixing spices into thai yellow paste to make massaman paste

Storing and using the massaman curry paste:

  • If you aren't planning to use the paste in a curry immediately, transfer to an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost overnight in the fridge before use. 
To make massaman curry for 4 people you will need about 2 tablespoon of massaman curry paste.
    freshly made massaman curry paste

Video

Notes

Can you freeze this paste?: Store in a jar or sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before use.
How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?: Around 2 tablespoon of curry paste will be enough to make a curry for four. However, you can add slightly more or less depending on how strong you want the curry to be.
Is this recipe spicy?: Massaman paste, along with Thai yellow paste, is one of the mildest Thai curry pastes. Both red and green curry pastes are made with fresh chillies which provide the spice. As more spices are added to the red paste to make Massaman paste, the initial heat becomes diluted so providing a more gentle flavour.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make mine and then split into small containers – each container has enough to make one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away. 
Blending paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai red paste. If the ingredients don’t blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.
Scaling this recipe: If you plan to save half of each paste as its made, the amount of useable paste available to make the next paste will halve each time. Times up the amount of ingredients to make more. Or if you don't want to save either the Thai red paste or Thai yellow paste but want it all to go into Massaman paste: Count out the number of table spoons of red curry paste you have made and then add the appropriate amount of Thai yellow spices and Massaman spices to this (knowing that the amounts listed above make 8 tablespoon of thai red paste and 4 tablespoon of Thai yellow paste).
Example: You have 8 tablespoon of Thai Red paste that you would like to turn into Massaman paste. To this add 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoon curry powder, few grinds of black pepper, 4 teaspoon curry powder, 4 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the crushed seeds from 8 cardamom pods.
Nutritional info Massaman curry paste

Nutrition

Serving: 17g | Calories: 15.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.9g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 154mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 32.6IU | Vitamin C: 6.2mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 3.1mg
Homemade massaman curry paste

The post Massaman curry paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry-paste/feed/ 0
Thai Yellow Curry Paste https://properfoodie.com/thai-yellow-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-yellow-curry-paste/#respond Sat, 16 Nov 2019 18:07:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=13462 Thai yellow curry paste is easy create at home using just a few basic ingredients and spices. This versatile paste can be used as the base for a number of different Thai curries and is great to have handy in the fridge ready for your next 'fakeaway' Thai curry night. Whip up this paste in...

Read More

The post Thai Yellow Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Thai yellow curry paste is easy create at home using just a few basic ingredients and spices. This versatile paste can be used as the base for a number of different Thai curries and is great to have handy in the fridge ready for your next 'fakeaway' Thai curry night.

Thai yellow curry paste in a dish with peppercorns in the background

Whip up this paste in just 5 minutes - see the video below to find out just how easy this is. Plus watch how you can produce three pastes from one. 

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

📖 Making Thai curry paste at home

Thai yellow curry paste is made by adding ground coriander, cumin, curry powder and black pepper to already made or store bought Thai red curry paste. Thai red paste is the starting block for all other Thai curry pastes; apart from Thai green curry paste, which stands alone.

Thai yellow paste is slightly milder than red paste, in both flavour and colour, and can be used in a number of Thai dishes:

Thai yellow curry paste in a small dish with spices at the side

👩🏻‍🍳 Recipe inspiration

Ive based this recipe on curry paste I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand.

On this cookery course I had access to a traditional Thai food market and used fresh, whole spices. I can’t say its always convenient to get out a pestle and mortar and grind whole spices into powders. Nor is it always possible to get hold of all the traditional Thai ingredients that I used in Thailand. However, It is possible to closely match ingredients and of course use pre ground spices for the curry and the Thai yellow curry paste, which is what I have done for this recipe. 

🥘 Ingredients you will need for this paste

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe

For 4-5 tablespoon of this paste recipe you will need the following:

  • 4 tablespoon Thai red curry paste
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

Substitutions: If you don't have the time or the ingredients to make the red paste you can use a jar of shop bought paste instead.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Take 4 tablespoon of the Thai red paste (homemade or shop bought) and place in a small bowl.4 tablespoon of red paste being spooned into a small mixing bowl
  2. To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.half teaspoon ground coriander being added to the bowl
  3. At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai Massaman curry paste. The rest can then be used to make Thai yellow curry or Panang curry.mixing together red paste with coriander, curry powder, cumin and black pepper to make thai yellow paste
  4. If not using the paste right away then transfer to an air tight jar/container and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.

🌶 Can you substitute red curry paste for yellow?

Red paste is the main ingredient in yellow curry paste and so technically it is already the same paste but with a few extra ingredients added. These additional ingredients create a different flavour and ultimately determine the type of curry you are making (see above).

If you prefer to buy jarred curry paste but are struggling to find Thai yellow paste then yes jarred Thai red is a great substitute and you can use this recipe to turn the shop bought red paste into yellow paste.

♨️ Is red curry paste hotter than yellow?

Red paste is slightly hotter than yellow due to the extra milder ingredients being added to make yellow paste.

💭 Recipe tips

Blending paste: Use a small blender to make the red paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.

Storage and steralisation: Sterilise some small jars for storing any extra paste. Wash jars in warm water then place on a baking tray and dry in a low oven for 5 to 10 minutes. Fill the jars with paste whilst they are still warm and seal with a lid (use marigolds to help with handling hot jars). Store in the fridge for up to one month. Alternatively place leftover paste in a clean, sealable container (no sterilisation) and store in the fridge for up to 1 week or in the freezer for up to 3 months. 

Scaling this recipe: This recipe assumes the use of this Thai red paste recipe, which makes around 8 tablespoon of paste. This recipe also assumes that you would like to save some of the Thai red paste as well as using it to make the Thai yellow paste. Therefore, this recipe calls for half of the red paste (4 tbsp) and will make enough paste to go into 2 curry recipes for serving 4 people. If you want don't want to save half of the paste but want to use it all to make Thai yellow, then double the rest of the ingredients in this recipe. For any other amount just remember that the amount of spices in this recipe is for 4 tablespoon of Thai red paste.

Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers - each container has enough to make one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away.  

🍛 Other curry recipes you might like to try:

 15 minutes to produce recipeunder 100 kcalBetter than takeawaysgluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Thai yellow curry paste
Print

📋 Thai yellow curry paste

Thai yellow curry paste is easy to make at home using just a few basic ingredients and spices. This versatile paste can be used as the base for a number of different Thai curries and so its great to have handy in the fridge ready for your next 'fakeaway' Thai curry night.
Course condiment, main meal, meal prep
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 tablespoon
Calories 12.1kcal

Ingredients

  • Thai yellow paste
  • 4 tablespoon Thai red paste made from the above
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

Instructions

  • Take 4 tablespoon of the Thai red paste (homemade or shop bought) and place in a small bowl.
    4 tablespoon of thai red paste being spooned into a small mixing bowl
  • To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.
    1 teaspoon curry powder being added to bowl containing 3 tablespoon of thai red paste and half teaspoon of ground coriander
  • At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai Massaman curry paste. The rest can then be used to make Thai yellow curry or Panang curry.
    mixing together thai red paste with coriander, curry powder, cumin and black pepper to make thai yellow paste
  • If not using the paste right away then transfer to an air tight jar/container and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.
    Thai yellow curry paste

Video

Notes

Blending paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai red paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.
Storage and steralisation: Sterilise some small jars for storing any extra paste. Wash jars in warm water then place on a baking tray and dry in a low oven for 5 to 10 minutes. Fill the jars with paste whilst they are still warm and seal with a lid (use marigolds to help with handling hot jars). Store in the fridge for up to one month. Alternatively place leftover paste in a clean, sealable container (no sterilisation) and store in the fridge for up to 1 week or in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
Scaling this recipe: This recipe assumes the use of this Thai red paste recipe, which makes around 8 tablespoon of paste. This recipe also assumes that you would like to save some of the Thai red paste as well as using it to make the Thai yellow paste. Therefore, this recipe calls for half of the Thai red paste (4 tbsp) and will make enough paste to go into 2 curry recipes for serving 4 people. If you want don't want to save half of the Thai red paste but want to use it all to make Thai yellow, then double the rest of the ingredients in this recipe. For any other amount just remember that the amount of spices in this recipe is for 4 tablespoon of Thai red paste.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers - each container has enough to make one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away.  
Nutritional info yellow curry paste

Nutrition

Serving: 13g | Calories: 12.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.3g | Protein: 0.8g | Fat: 0.7g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Potassium: 120.9mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 32.4IU | Vitamin C: 6.2mg | Calcium: 33.7mg | Iron: 1.7mg

The post Thai Yellow Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-yellow-curry-paste/feed/ 0
Amarone Risotto https://properfoodie.com/amarone-risotto/ https://properfoodie.com/amarone-risotto/#comments Thu, 14 Sep 2017 08:03:04 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4762 Our Italian wedding breakfast: Little pearly grains of soft risotto rice gently stewed in butter and Amarone red wine, topped with freshly grated parmesan cheese and chopped parsley Italian wedding planner: 'Dream Academy': Dream Academy Wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Verona Before I get going with this gorgeously irresistible, wine-filled Amarone risotto I just wanted...

Read More

The post Amarone Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Our Italian wedding breakfast: Little pearly grains of soft risotto rice gently stewed in butter and Amarone red wine, topped with freshly grated parmesan cheese and chopped parsley

Valpolicella red wine risotto

Italian wedding planner: 'Dream Academy': Dream Academy

Wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Verona

Before I get going with this gorgeously irresistible, wine-filled Amarone risotto I just wanted to mention that: I GOT MARRIED!! 😆

The inspiration for this risotto comes from our Italian wedding breakfast and so I feel it is entirely appropriate to give you a little background wedding story in order to set the scene.

An Italian Wedding

On the 26th August 2017 I officially became Mrs Jones when I married my best friend and soul mate: Ben. Its a day neither of us will ever forget.

We were married on a small island in the middle of a picturesque lake, set in the Gardens of a Veronese Villa in Northern Italy. A location we picked and fell in love with well over a year ago.

groom and groomsmen waiting on te island villa bertani

I arrived as expected in a sleek white car, slightly late and as giddy as a little girl waiting for Santa on Christmas Eve.

Bride in the car

[- Me after a good 5 hours of hair and make-up prep, finished off with a good amount of wriggling and straining in order to get into my dress in the Italy heat.]

Arriving at the point in time that we had been planning for the last year and a half, was certainly nerve racking and very emotional. . . We were about to become husband and wife!

wedding at Villa Bertani Italy

I can't tell you how incredible the whole event was for both of us. A whirlwind day of one magical experience after another. Amazing musicians, perfect weather, immaculately dressed groomsmen, stunning bridesmaids, striking flowers . . . you get the idea.

bride and bridemaids and villa bertani

music at villa bertani

Basically, I loved every bit of our amazing Italian wedding and yes I may even brag a little and burst with pride at the whole darn thing. But if a bride can't be boastful and overjoyed on her wedding day, then when can she?

wedding in a vineyard

Italian wedding food

So, what about the food. Yes the food!! Other than actually getting married, the food was one of the most important parts for Ben and I. We love Italy and we love Italian food even more. So our Italian wedding day just had to erupt with the most amazing representation of all kinds of Italian foods imaginable. The canapés (and I say canapés but it was more like a feast fit for the 5000) were a stunning array of cheeses, meats, stews, flat breads, and so many more delicious things, which I would care to remember in more detail had I been allowed the appetite of my normal self. As it were, the emotions of the day were clearly too much for my startled stomach. However, just to look and see our guests enjoy each new found foodie delight was more than enough.

italian wedding canapes villa bertani

The sit down meal had been carefully selected by myself and Ben a few months earlier. We stuck to the traditional Italian meal structure of pasta course, risotto course, main course and dessert. Basically it was not really the time to be in a restrictive dress or to be feeling too excited to eat. . .

With the right posture and a steady pace I was able to do my usual trick and clear every last morsel.

This was one meal that I was not going to waste.

Amarone risotto

And now, back home in rainy Glossop, the distant sounds of the mandolin, the fading yellow light from the August sun, and the aroma of risotto rice gently stewing in a rich Amarone red wine are all I can think about. So, lets not waste any more time and lets get down to business: my version of the amazing, primo piatto (first course) Amarone Risotto dish that stole my stomach (my heart was already taken) on our Italian wedding day.

How to make Amarone Risotto

Amarone, the most highly regarded wine of the Valpolicella area in Northern Italy. Followed closely by the Valpolicella Ripasso and Valpollicella classico, the deep, sweet flavours of this type of wine, had us both at Hello. Not that we have a great knowledge of wines, but we have been lucky enough to participate in a few Italian wine tastings over the last few years. So we have a reasonable idea of what we do and don't like. (More on wine tasting to follow in another post shortly!)

Amarone wine risotto

In Italy the pairing of wine with food is essential, this is most clearly demonstrated in this wonderful dish where the wine is the main ingredient and star of the show. Using good quality wine in recipes is one of the most important things I have ever learnt about cooking. Scraping together a few extra pennies for the Amarone wine in this particular recipe is totally worth it. However, if the Amarone is a little out of your price range, the Ripasso or even Classico are considered excellent alternatives.

Arborio rice gently stewed in butter and amarone red wine

Amarone risotto ingredients

This stunning and moreish plate of sweet Amarone risotto can be recreated with just a few basic ingredients. With a little patience and time taken over the addition of the wine and stock, a beautiful mound of food can be created. A mound of food that will no doubt be appearing regularly at our table from now on.

Amarone listed ingredients

Cooking the perfect risotto

Risotto is one of the first dishes I ever made as a young kitchen explorer. My first attempts were always very appealing to me, although probably slightly sloppy and overcooked. But over the years I have observed and practised the best techniques for cooking this delicious grain, and I'm always striving to spoon out the best silky, smooth, al dente risotto dish as is possible.

Amarone risotto

So first things first: BUTTER. Yes butter. No risotto is complete with out the rich starting point of a good helping of melted butter. The butter is also used to "awaken the rice". Coating the uncooked grains with the warmed butter helps to soften the grain and allow it to soak up liquids more easily. And the aim of this recipe: get the wine into the rice!!

amarone red wine risotto vertical

I used both stock and wine (more of the latter) as the liquid ingredients for this recipe. Adding the liquid a bit at a time and allowing the rice to absorb each addition before adding the next. Generally this is considered the best technique for producing perfectly cooked risotto rice. A quick simmer with the lid on, after the final addition, will ensure that the grains are cooked to just the right point and that they are sitting snugly in a rich, thick wine sauce.

Bellissimo!

Our wedding planner

Before I leave you to consider this luscious Amarone risotto for your next meal, I must mention and thank our wonderful Italian wedding planner: Marion Hunter. If you are yet to walk down the aisle and if you ever find yourself considering a wedding in Northern Italy I would highly recommend you check out Marion's services. We will never ever forget our magical day and will be forever grateful to Marion for her dedication and commitment to our wishes and dreams. Thank you Marion!

Find out more about Marion and her company 'Dream Academy' here: Dream Academy

Wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Verona

Verona wedding

Find out what we got up to on our Italian Honeymoon at Torciano Winery, in San Gimignano and in Bologna.

Other risotto recipes you might like to try: Haddock and rosemary risotto, Mushroom risotto, leftover turkey risotto.

📖 Recipe

Arborio rice gently stewed in butter and amarone red wine
Print

Amarone Risotto

Little pearly grains of soft risotto rice gently stewed in butter and Amarone red wine, topped with freshly grated parmesan and chopped parsley
Course Dinner, lunch
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 2 People
Calories 785kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large Onion 200g finely chopped
  • 2 cloves Garlic finely chopped
  • 50 g Butter
  • 250 ml of veg stock or beef stock if not sticking to a veggie recipe
  • 400 ml of Valpolicella Amarone red wine Can be replaced with Ripasso or Valpolicella Classico
  • 200 g Arborio risotto rice
  • 25 g freshly grated parmesan
  • 10 g fresh parsley roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Place a large shallow pan on a medium heat and add the butter. Once the butter has melted add the chopped onion and garlic then gently fry for a couple of minutes. As the onions begin to sweat down add the rice and mix well to allow each grain to be coated with the butter. Coating the uncooked grains with the warmed butter helps to soften the grain and allow it to soak up liquids more easily. And the aim of this recipe: get the wine into the rice!!
  • Next, with the pan still on a medium heat, add around ⅕ of the stock and ⅕ of the wine. stir and allow to simmer for a few minutes.
  • The liquid will quickly be absorbed by the rice, at this point add another helping (⅕) of stock and wine. Continue until all the liquid has been added, ensuring each addition is absorbed before the next is added.This usually takes around 20 minutes. After pouring in the last addition, place a lid on the pan and simmer for 5 minutes.
  • Taste your risotto and check the rice is cooked before mixing in half of the parmesan. Then taste and season if necessary.
  • Finally serve the risotto and top with the remaining parmesan and the parsley.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 572g | Calories: 785kcal | Carbohydrates: 94.6g | Protein: 13.4g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 15.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6.4g | Fiber: 3.6g

Arborio rice gently stewed in butter and amarone red wine

The post Amarone Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/amarone-risotto/feed/ 16
Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/ https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/#comments Sun, 24 Dec 2017 13:12:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5603 Delicious honey glazed carrots and parsnips with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year. Christmas dinner sides Its Christmas Eve!! And theres just enough time for me to pop up one more recipe before I start on my...

Read More

The post Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Delicious honey glazed carrots and parsnips with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year.

honey glazed carrots and parsnips

Christmas dinner sides

Its Christmas Eve!! And theres just enough time for me to pop up one more recipe before I start on my own Christmas prep for tomorrow. Getting organised with all the side dishes is a great way to be able to concentrate on the star of the show on the actual day. Not only are these honey glazed carrots and parsnips super tasty and really pretty but they also really easy to make and can be prepared ahead of the big day.

Christmas carrots and parsnips honey roast root vegetables

Honey glazed carrots and parsnips

So along with my gorgonzola sprouts and a delicious Tia Maria Tiramisu dessert I'm also going to be preparing some honey glazed carrots and parnsips a day in advance. I love little baby carrots with a little tuft of green left on the end, however, standard carrots sliced into skinny batons will work just as well for this recipe.

garlic and thyme honey roast carrots and parsnips

Preparing root vegetables in advance

And this recipe really couldn't be any simpler - and it really will take away any hassle on the day and save on extra pots and pans to wash. The baby carrots need no special prep, they can go straight on tray along with a few sprigs of thyme and a couple of crushed garlic cloves. I used standard parsnips to go along with my carrots, which I roughly chopped into similar shapes and sizes as the baby carrots.

garlic and thyme carrots and parsnips

Once all the veggies are lined up - drizzle over a table spoon of honey, a table spoon of oil, a sprinkle of salt and pepper and then add a few dots of proper butter. Pop the whole lot into the oven and roast for 20 minutes. Easy!! Once cooked these can be transferred to a sealable container and refrigerated for up to 2 days.

honey roast carrots and parsnips prepared in advance

On the big day place your honey glazed carrots and parsnips back on a baking tray and reheat in the oven for 5 minutes - done and dusted 🙂 For more great Christmas Day prep ideas, check out my homemade cauliflower cheese, homemade Cranberry sauce and Honey glazed prawns starter. Or if you don't feel the need to roast a whole turkey try out my simple roast chicken recipe. And once Christmas is all over with don't forget to make good use of that leftover turkey with a Turkey sunshine risotto or Mulligatawny soup.

If you also happen to be stuck for ideas for your Christmas shopping, then check out my Christmas gifts for foodies - jam packed full of present ideas for the food lovers in your life.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

📖 Recipe

christmas carrots and parsnips
Print

Christmas honey roast root vegetables with Garlic and Thyme

Deliciously glazed honey roast root vegetables with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year.
Course Christmas, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 People

Ingredients

  • 150 g baby carrots
  • 200 g parsnips
  • 3 whole crushed garlic cloves
  • A few sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • tablespoon of runny honey
  • 10 g butter
  • Salt and pepper

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees.
  • The baby carrots need no prep - place these straight onto a large baking tray. If you are using standard carrots then peel, remove the ends and chop into skinny batons. Place onto the tray.
  • To prepare the parsnips wash them thoroughly then remove the ends and chop into a similar size and shape as the carrots. Spread the parsnips evenly amongst the carrots.
  • Next peel 3 garlic cloves and gently crush each one by placing the flat side off the knife over the top of the clove and gently pushing on top with the palm of your hand. Add the cloves to the tray along with the sprigs of fresh thyme.
  • Drizzle the whole lot with olive oil and honey then roughly chop the butter into small cubes and dot around the tray. Finish with a pinch of salt and pepper.
  • Place the tray in the centre of the oven and roast for 20 minutes.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven and serve. If you are preparing in advance then allow the veggies to cool before transferring to a sealable container, then refrigerate for up to 2 days.
  • To reheat place the vegetables back onto a tray and bake in a 180 degree oven for 5 minutes.

PIN FOR LATER

Honey glazed carrots and parsnip root vegetables with garlic and thyme

The post Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/feed/ 2
Foil Pack Potatoes https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/ https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/#respond Wed, 19 Jun 2019 21:18:01 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10145 Foil pack potatoes cooked on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe! Foil pack potatoes The smell of these little potatoes will hit you way before you've even caught a glimpse of them....

Read More

The post Foil Pack Potatoes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Foil pack potatoes cooked on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe!foil pack potatoes

Foil pack potatoes

The smell of these little potatoes will hit you way before you've even caught a glimpse of them. Theres no holding back the aroma of dried rosemary slowly baking away whilst nestled in foil with garlic and butter. Once the foil is unwrapped its usually a matter of second before they're all gone.

Roasting or grilling potatoes and veggies really brings out the best flavour and there are so many fantastic ways of doing this. My favourite is is oven baked cauliflower cheese with a creamy homemade cheese sauce. For something a little less fattening; Honey glazed carrots and parsnips cooked on a tray in the oven until perfectly caramelised by the heat, perfect for Sunday dinner or even Christmas day. Or how about roasted Cauliflower salad, which is very popular at the minute. This roasted cauliflower salad is a great dish for serving up at a party or to make your working lunch a little more interesting.

garlic and rosemary roast potatoes

Ingredients for foil pack potatoes

  • Baby potatoes
  • Olive oil
  • Dried rosemary
  • Fresh thyme
  • Whole garlic cloves
  • Sea salt
  • Butter
  • Fresh parsley

How to cook Potatoes in Foil Packets

  1. Pre heat barbecue grill to medium or oven to 200 degrees C. Chop potatoes into bite sized pieces then place in a bowl and mix with oil, seasoning, whole garlic cloves and dried rosemary.mix well to fully coat the potatoes
  2. Transfer the potatoes to a piece of foil, around 70cm in length. Bunch the potatoes in the middle of the foil and on top place 3 sprigs of thyme and 15g of cubed of butter.transfer to foil
  3. Bring the edges of the foil together and wrap.wrap and close foil
  4. Barbecue or roast for 40 minutes then remove from the grill or oven and open up the foil. Remove the thyme and add in more butter and seasoning then return to the grill or oven with the foil open.after 40 minutes unwrap and remove thyme, add more seasoning and butter
  5. Cook for a further 15 minutes or until golden brown then top with parsley and enjoy.bake open for a further 15 minutes the top with parsley

Can I cook foil packets in the oven?

Yes foil packets are perfect for oven cooking. Theres no need to prepare anything differently just place the foil pack on a tray before inserting into the oven.

roast garlic butter potatoes

Foil pack potatoes are the perfect side dish to your meat and 2 veg and so will go well with almost any meal. If you do have the Barbecue out then definitely pair this recipe up with a grilled porterhouse steak or how about grilled lamb chops with mustard, rosemary and garlic.

potatoes on the barbecue

These potatoes are also great with a lighter salad option or even just on their own. So next time you're having a barbecue make sure you get a pack of these on the grill!

Other potato recipes ideas

 1 hour to produceunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

foil pack potatoes
Print

Foil pack potatoes

Foil pack potatoes grilled on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe!
Course Appetizer, party food, Side Dish, Snack, starter, sunday dinner
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 196.8kcal

Ingredients

  • 660 g Baby potatoes chopped into bite size pieces
  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Dried rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme
  • 7 Whole garlic cloves no need to peel
  • Pinch of Sea salt and pepper
  • 30 g Butter
  • 20 g Fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Pre heat the barbecue to medium or oven to 200 degrees Chop the potatoes into bite sized pieces then place in a bowl and mix with oil, seasoning, whole garlic cloves and dried rosemary.
    mix well to fully coat the potatoes
  • Transfer the potatoes to a piece of foil, around 70cm in length. Bunch the potatoes in the middle of the foil. Place 3 sprigs of thyme and half (15of cubed of butter on top of the potatoes.
    transfer to foil
  • Bring the edges of the foil together and wrap, ensuring a tight seal all around. If the width of the foil isn’t long enough to wrap properly then double wrap with second piece of foil in the opposite direction.
    wrap and close foil
  • Place the foil directly onto the barbecue grill or if roasting place on a tray before inserting into the oven.
  • Grill or roast for 40 minutes then remove from the grill or oven and open up the foil. Remove the thyme and add in the rest of the butter and season again. Then return to the grill or oven with the foil open and cook for a further 15 minutes or until golden brown.
    after 40 minutes unwrap and remove thyme, add more seasoning and butter
  • Top with parsley and enjoy!
    bake open for a further 15 minutes the top with parsley

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 186g | Calories: 196.8kcal | Carbohydrates: 28.7g | Protein: 3.4g | Fat: 8.4g | Saturated Fat: 4.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.8g | Sodium: 160mg | Sugar: 2.4g

I first shared this Foil pack potatoes recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site where I am a contributor.

foil pack potatoes baked in the oven with garlic cloves and served with butter and parsley

The post Foil Pack Potatoes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/feed/ 0
Stuffed peppers with couscous https://properfoodie.com/stuffed-peppers-couscous-cheese-sauce/ https://properfoodie.com/stuffed-peppers-couscous-cheese-sauce/#comments Mon, 04 Jun 2018 23:01:05 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6829 FEATURED AD FOR THE ENGLISH PROVENDER CO. Roasted stuffed peppers bursting at the seams with giant pearls of couscous in a creamy cheese sauce and topped with a sweet tomato and chilli chutney Stuffed peppers recipe This definitely has to be classed as a summertime recipe for me, sunny days when the BBQ comes out...

Read More

The post Stuffed peppers with couscous appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
FEATURED AD FOR THE ENGLISH PROVENDER CO. Roasted stuffed peppers bursting at the seams with giant pearls of couscous in a creamy cheese sauce and topped with a sweet tomato and chilli chutney

stuffed roasted pepper with couscous cheese sauce

Stuffed peppers recipe

This definitely has to be classed as a summertime recipe for me, sunny days when the BBQ comes out and its all about alfresco dining with friends!

When the sun starts to shine I cant help but start planning some great summer feast ideas. Starting off with these slightly charred, vegetarian stuffed peppers, packed full of creamy, couscous in cheese sauce - with a lovely dollop of sweet, tangy tomato chutney on the top. - Yes the cheese sauce, and couscous, and chutney did go all over my face, but its so worth it! (scroll to the end of this post to read about how I make my perfect cheese sauce).

I do love a good cheese sauce and I have a few other lovely meals that work so well with this silky smooth sauce. Obviously, the go-to cheese sauce recipe has to be leeks in cheese sauce with your Sunday roast. But its also a really great way to jazz up your sprouts at Christmas, and I also love a creamy cheese sauce in my fish pie - mmmm.

Stuffed peppers ingredients

To make this stuffed peppers with couscous recipe you will need a few simple ingredients:

  • Bell peppers
  • Giant couscous
  • Butter
  • Flour
  • Semi-skimmed milk
  • Cheddar cheese
  • paprika
  • cayenne pepper
  • Chutney
  • salt and pepper
  • Salad leaves

baked cheese sauce stuffed peppers and couscous

How to make stuffed peppers with cous cous

The basis of this stuffed pepper recipe is a simple cheese sauce

  1. Cut a lid out of the top of each pepper and use a spoon to remove the seeds and hollow out the insides.
  2. Cook the couscous in simmering water with the lid on for 15 minutes.
  3. Drain and set the couscous to one side
  4. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees
  5. Make the cheese sauce (tips at the bottom of this post and full recipe instructions below).
  6. In a bowl mix together the cooked couscous and cheese sauce
  7. Spoon the couscous in cheese sauce into the peppers, replace the lids and place on a baking tray.
  8. Place the stuffed peppers in the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until slightly charred

What to serve with stuffed peppers?

This stuffed pepper recipe is packed with couscous and oozing with cheese sauce, although they are a great vegetarian option they are kind of on the heavy, indulgent side so a great accompaniment would be something light or even a salad.  My mango and avocado salad would be a good choice.

On the other hand if you were to substitute the couscous and cheese sauce and make stuffed peppers with rice then the dish would become a great side itself to chicken or beef or practically anything that gets thrown on the BBQ.  These BBQ skewers pair up rather nicely or check out my chicken, proscuitto and blackberry salad for a healthy option.

The English Provender company very kindly provided me with some of their delicious tomato chutney for this recipe - and it really paired up fantastically well with the Mediterranean flavours and velvety cheese sauce.  Why not add a dollop and make this a stand alone meal of its own.

couscous and cheese sauce in bell pepper

Low carb stuffed peppers

For a low carb alternative to this recipe the couscous could be replaced with a mince filling (mince turkey, mince chicken, mince beef) or for a slightly healthier option why not try quinoa stuffed peppers or even quorn stuffed peppers.

Can you freeze stuffed peppers before cooking?

Provided you have cooked the main elements of the dish already like the couscous or any meats you may have included, then it is OK to freeze your stuffed peppers.  Allow the stuffed peppers to cool after any cooking has taken place and place them into an appropriate container.  You can also use food bags to portion up your stuffed peppers as you please.  You can cook your stuffed peppers from frozen, if you wish to do this, cook them in the oven for an extra 15 minutes on top of the 30 minutes described in the recipe and make sure they are piping hot throughout before serving.

cheesy pepper and couscous with tomato chutney 2

How long will stuffed peppers last in the fridge?

If wrapped in cling film or sealed in a seal-able container you can store your stuffed peppers for up to 5 days without problem, i would recommend you consume them cooked fresh or freeze what you don't need to cook from scratch at a later date.

Can you reheat stuffed peppers?

These peppers are definitely best roasted in the oven from fresh or from frozen as the delicate bell peppers can become a little soft if microwaved.  Also depending on your fillings you should follow these basic rules:

  • Always refrigerate leftovers and aim to consume ideally within 3 days
  • never freeze food more than once
  • always completely defrost food before cooking
  • always make sure food is piping hot throughout before serving

couscous in cheese sauce stuffed peppers

Homemade cheese sauce

I absolutely adore cheese sauce, and it works so well in this dish. Cheese sauce can get a bad rep as being hard to make. But once you've made it, or at least made it wrong a few times and ended up manically trying to sieve out the lumps, then you eventually get the hang of it and realise it ain't so hard :-).

How to make the perfect cheese sauce

The first rule of cheese sauce making is to have equal amounts of butter and flour. Usually around 20-30g of each, but this depends on how much sauce you are making. Melt the butter in a small pan and then add the flour to form a paste.

The second rule is to remember that you want to try and keep your sauce thick and allow the milk to be absorbed into the paste. So next step, keep the pan on a low to medium heat and gradually begin to add the milk to the paste (around 1 pint of milk can be added to 30g butter and 30g flour). Stir quickly between each addition of milk, remembering to run the spoon all around the edges and base of the pan. As each addition of milk thickens, add a little more until all the milk has been added. At this point, you will have successfully made a white sauce.

The final rule is to make sure the flour has been fully cooked out (otherwise the sauce will have a slight floury taste). To cook out the flour, keep the white sauce on the heat and continue to stir until it just starts to boil. At this point the pan can be taken off the heat and the grated cheese can be stirred in to turn the white sauce to a cheese sauce. Then get adding it to your leeks, peppers, sprouts, fish pies or whatever else takes your fancy 🙂

 1 hour to make recipeunder 500 calories recipe1 of 5 a dayvegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

couscous in cheese sauce stuffed peppers
Print

Stuffed peppers with couscous

Roasted stuffed peppers bursting at the seams with giant pearls of couscous in a creamy cheese sauce and topped with a sweet tomato and chilli chutney
Course Dinner, Main Course, starter
Cuisine American, Moroccan
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 People
Calories 319kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 medium sized bell peppers tops cut off and peppers hollowed out (save the lids for decoration if you wish)

For the couscous in cheese sauce

  • 200 g dried giant Israeli couscous (I used Merchant Gourmet Giant Couscous)
  • 400 ml boiling water
  • 30 g butter
  • 30 g flour
  • pint 350ml semi skimmed milk
  • 75 g cheddar grated
  • Pinch of sea salt and pepper
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • Tomato chutney I used English Provender Tomato Chutney
  • Extra grated cheese for topping

To serve

  • Rocket or salad leaves

Instructions

To prepare the peppers

  • Cut a lid out of the top of each pepper around the main stem (use the stem to lift your lid off). Use a spoon to hollow out the peppers and fully remove all the seeds and pith. Set to one side ready to stuff later.

To prepare the couscous

  • Place a small pan on medium heat and add the couscous and boiling water. Bring to the boil then simmer with the lid on for 15 minutes - or for length of time stated on the packet. Keep an eye on this and top up the water if required. Once cooked, drain and set the couscous to one side.
  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees

To make the cheese sauce.

  • Melt the butter in a small pan and then add the flour to form a paste. Keep the pan on a low to medium heat and gradually begin to add the milk to the paste. Stir quickly between each addition of milk, remembering to run the spoon all around the edges and base of the pan. As each addition of milk thickens, add a little more until all the milk has been added. At this point, you will have successfully made a white sauce. Make sure the flour is fully cooked out of the sauce by continuing to heat and stir until it just starts to boil. At this point the pan can be taken off the heat and the grated cheese can be stirred in to turn the white sauce to a cheese sauce. Make sure the cheese has fully melted (briefly return to the heat if needed) then season wth salt and pepper and stir in the paprika and cayenne pepper.

Stuffing the peppers

  • Add the Cooked giant couscous to the cheese sauce and mix together well.
  • Next place your hollowed out peppers on a baking tray. Carefully spoon the couscous in cheese sauce into each of the peppers until full. Sprinkle a little extra grated cheese on the top of each pepper and then carefully and a teaspoon of tomato chutney on top of the cheese.
  • Place the stuffed peppers into the centre of the pre heated oven and roast for 30 minutes or until slightly charred on the outside.
  • Remove from the oven and add a little more chutney if desired then serve with rocket or salad leaves…..and the rest of your summer feast!!

Nutrition

Serving: 345g | Calories: 319kcal | Carbohydrates: 41.5g | Protein: 12.7g | Fat: 12.8g | Saturated Fat: 7.5g | Sodium: 360mg | Sugar: 11.7g

PIN FOR LATER

stuffed bell peppers with couscous in cheese sauce

The post Stuffed peppers with couscous appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/stuffed-peppers-couscous-cheese-sauce/feed/ 4
5 minute Satay Sauce https://properfoodie.com/5-minute-satay-sauce/ https://properfoodie.com/5-minute-satay-sauce/#respond Sun, 20 Mar 2016 12:43:18 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1876 This satay sauce literally takes 5 minutes and is a great way to liven up your meal, particularly a chicken dish. Whats not to love with that delicious tahini and peanut butter going on. Its even freezer friendly, so get a few batches made and frozen, ready for those last minute dinner parties or BBQs....

Read More

The post 5 minute Satay Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This satay sauce literally takes 5 minutes and is a great way to liven up your meal, particularly a chicken dish.

Chicken satay sauce
Chicken satay sauce

Whats not to love with that delicious tahini and peanut butter going on.

Its even freezer friendly, so get a few batches made and frozen, ready for those last minute dinner parties or BBQs.

For a couple of ideas of how to use this great sauce check out my satay skewers and chicken satay platter with quinoa salad

How to make satay sauce

📖 Recipe

Chicken satay sauce
Print

5 minute Satay Sauce

Chicken satay sauce
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon crunchy peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoon brown tahini sauce
  • 1 green chilli deseeded and roughly chopped
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and roughly chopped
  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger peeled and roughly chopped
  • 15 g fresh coriander roughly chopped
  • 10 g of fresh mint leaves roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon light soy sauce
  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 2 tablespoon cold water

Instructions

  • Place all the satay sauce ingredients into a food processor and blitz together. Gradually add small amounts of cold water until a smooth consistency is reached.

The post 5 minute Satay Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/5-minute-satay-sauce/feed/ 0
Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/#comments Sun, 04 Feb 2018 08:30:25 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5879 Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!. . . NUTELLA TIGELLA! Nutella Its February! and I have 3 reasons for Nutella consumption this month! The first,...

Read More

The post Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!. . .

NUTELLA TIGELLA!

Italian Tigella with cheese and ham filling

Nutella

Its February! and I have 3 reasons for Nutella consumption this month! The first, which is just around the corner, is World Nutella Day. Yep a whole day devoted to Nutella. The second is pancake day and even though I'm generally a honey and lemon kinda girl, there might be the odd dip in the Nutella jar. And of course the third is Valentines - and I guess consumption of any kind of chocolate in huge quantities is allowed on Valentines day 🙂

Valentines Tigella

Tigella

So now lets talk about Tigella!! NUTELLA TIGELLA. Ben and I were first introduced to the amazing Nutella Tigella in Bologna last year after our amazing Italian wedding when we were honeymooning around Tuscany. We had never come across this type of Italian bread before, even though it was our 5th visit to Italy! I'm so glad that we decided to sit down and give them try.

debbie and ben at zerocinquantino in Bologna

ham and cheese tigella in Bologna

Not content with our basket full of savoury Tigella, we just had to try the Nutella Tigella as well.

nutella tigella in Bologna

Mmm, amazing!! So you know that I just had to give these a whirl myself at home - and World Nutella Day has forced me into action.

Tigella one with brie and ham and one with nutella

Homemade Italian Tigella

The Tigella is quite a basic bread dough, with the addition of a bit of butter. Its actually not a million miles away from my mini bread rolls recipe.

This dough needs to be left to rise (prove) twice, the first time for an hour and the second for 30 minutes, so you need at least an afternoon free to give these delightful little breads a go.

Tigella dough

Unlike the bread rolls, once this dough has risen once, it is then knocked back and rolled out. I rolled my dough to about half a cm in thickness and then cut out my Tigella circles with a 3 inch round cutter (a glass would do the same job).

Tigella dough cut into Tigella circles

These are then proved a second time before being baked for 10 minutes or until they puff up into little pillows - bellissimo! And so simple.

Tigella baked in the oven

Traditionally the Tigella is made in a metal clamp type instrument, which gives them their golden brown colour and imprints a pretty pattern on either side. As the Tigella implement isn't cheap, I decided to improvise.

toastie maker tigella

Baking in the oven for 10 minutes means that the Tigella keep their round shape as they cook and then a quick blast in a toastie maker gives them a lovely golden finish. Although they literally need about 30 seconds in the toastie maker - any more and they dry out a little too much.

I cut mine open after they had baked in the oven and then quickly toasted before adding fillings.

Nutella first:

Nutella Tigella

and then plenty of ham and cheese:

Italian Tigella savoury and sweet

I'm thinking this would make such a lovely feast on Valentines Day 🙂

Find out what else we got to on our honeymoon at Torciano winery and in San Gimignano

📖 Recipe

Italian Tigella savoury and sweet
Print

Italian Tigella

Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 1 hour 50 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 2 hours
Calories 109kcal

Ingredients

  • 500 g 00 Flour
  • 200 ml water
  • 100 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 25 g unsalted butter
  • 10 g fresh yeast or 7g dried yeast
  • Pinch of sea salt

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small pan for heating
  • 3 inch round cutter or upside down glass
  • Lightly oiled baking trays
  • Toastie machine if you wish to toast to a golden brown colour

Instructions

  • Mix the water and milk together in a small pan and heat until just warm (luke warm). Use your finger to test the temperature and stop heating as soon as the mixture feels slightly warm. Next dissolve the yeast in the milk and water and leave to activate for around 10 minutes.
  • Meanwhile melt the butter in a pan or in the microwave. Then sieve the flour into a large bowl and add the salt. Mix well with your fingers then make a well in the flour and pour in the melted butter. Start to mix the flour gradually with your fingers and then begin to add the milk mixture bit by bit. Add enough of the milk mix until the dough comes together. Turn the dough out onto a floured work surface and knead for 10 minutes or until smooth.
  • Lightly oil the bowl and place the kneaded dough in the centre then cover with cling film. Leave to prove (rise) for 1 hour.
  • After an hour turn out the dough and divide into 2 manageable pieces. Roll out one half to around half a cm thick. Using a 3 inch circular cutter or an upside down glass, cut circular shapes into the rolled dough. Gather up the left over dough, re-roll and cut out more circles. Repeat this with the second half of the dough.
  • Line up the dough tigella on lightly oiled baking trays and cover with a damp tea towel. Leave to rise for a second time for 30 minutes.
  • Pre heat oven to 180 degrees
  • After 30 minutes remove the tea towel and transfer the tigella to the oven and bake for 10 minutes.
  • Once baked, slice in half and add your favourite fillings. To add a touch of colour, place the tigella in a toastie maker for 30 seconds before adding the filling.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 109kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.7g | Protein: 7.3g | Fat: 1.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.8g | Sodium: 80mg

The post Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/feed/ 8
Peanut Butter and Chocolate Biscuit Squares https://properfoodie.com/peanut-butter-chocolate-squares/ https://properfoodie.com/peanut-butter-chocolate-squares/#comments Tue, 02 Aug 2016 14:04:12 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2102 Peanut butter and chocolate biscuit squares are the ultimate way to have a full blown, deliciously gooey, outrageously tasty treat. Seriously - this recipe is all about indulgence. Yes I know this isn't very fitting with the healthy eating side of things, but sometimes a helping of chocolate - slash - peanut butter - slash...

Read More

The post Peanut Butter and Chocolate Biscuit Squares appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Peanut butter and chocolate biscuit squares are the ultimate way to have a full blown, deliciously gooey, outrageously tasty treat. Seriously - this recipe is all about indulgence.

Peanut butter and choclate biscuit squares

Yes I know this isn't very fitting with the healthy eating side of things, but sometimes a helping of chocolate - slash - peanut butter - slash - digestive biscuits, all in one mouthful; is just what is needed. I think I need to make my peace with this right now and be up front about the fact that I will never, ever give up desserts or chocolates.

As desserts are massively lacking in my recipe archives; this post is all about rectifying that and making room for my need to eat chocolate. Calorie counting or reducing fat content is not what this recipe is about, in any way  - this is an all out gorge yourself dessert.

Peanut butter

Peanut butter is not something I usually eat in massive quantities, I'm not really a fan of it on its own or even on toast (or in a peanut butter and jam sandwich for that matter, whats that all about?). However, there are a couple of things that peanut butter works really well with. Firstly, its an absolute must in satay sauce. I love satay sauce just as dip or smothered over chicken and grilled; its truly delicious and my own satay sauce recipe wouldn't be complete without a dollop of peanut butter. Secondly, peanut butter is a fabulous partner to chocolate; the mixture of sweet and salty means any peanut butter and chocolate dessert will be an instant hit.   The other crazy thing about peanut butter is how ridiculously easy it is to make yourself - should you be able to get your hands on some peanuts that is. I really struggled, as all the peanuts in my local supermarket were either dry roasted or covered in salt. So homemade peanut butter is for another day and this recipe just uses the average stuff out of a jar, nice and simple.

So this is a really easy dessert with no need for any baking. There's a bit of butter and chocolate melting and then a bit of mixing, but its mainly about layering, setting and eating.

Peanut butter and chocolate biscuit squares 

This recipe makes enough to fill one 9" by 9" square tin. From this I cut out 25 squares; so its a brilliant dessert if you have a few mouths to feed. But it will also keep in a tin for at least a week, so its perfect to have as stand-by, emergency treat as well 🙂

Enjoy!!

WARNING - read the nutritional information at your own risk.

Other biscuit recipes

📖 Recipe

Print

Peanut Butter and Chocolate Biscuit Squares

Peanut butter and chocolate biscuit squares are the ultimate way to have a full blown, deliciously gooey, outrageously tasty treat. Seriously - this recipe is all about indulgence.
Prep Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Calories 199kcal

Ingredients

  • 250 g digestive biscuits
  • 125 g melted unsalted butter
  • 200 g milk chocolate chips
  • 20 g soft unsalted butter
  • 300 g smooth peanut butter
  • 100 g syrup
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place the digestives in a plastic bag, remove all the air and tie a knot in the top. Crush the digestives into crumbs by gently hitting with a rolling pin. Alternatively you can break down the biscuits in a food processor.
  • In a bowl stir the melted butter into the crushed digestives.
  • Transfer the biscuit mix to a lined or greased square baking tin (9" x 9"). Use a spatula to press down the biscuit; making sure it reaches into all the corners and is evenly spread across the base of the tin. Place the tin in the fridge for 20 minutes in order to set the biscuit base.
  • Whilst the biscuit is in the fridge prepare the peanut filling by mixing together the peanut butter, syrup and vanilla extract.
  • After 20 minutes remove the tin from the fridge. Carefully spread the peanut mix over the biscuit. Use a spatula or cake slice to get an even finish. Return to the fridge for a further 20 minutes.
  • Next prepare the chocolate by setting up a bain-maris: pour 1 cm of water into a large pan and bring to the boil. Balance a large heat proof bowl over the top of the pan - do not let the water touch the base of the bowl. Add the chocolate and soft butter to the bowl and let it gradually melt. You shouldn't need to touch the bowl until the chocolate is completely melted. However, be careful of the steam when you do remove the bowl from the pan.
  • Alternatively you can melt the chocolate and butter in the microwave. Heat for 20 seconds at a time, then check and stir. Repeat until fully melted. 
  • Once the chocolate is melted, set to one side to cool slightly. Remove the tin from the fridge and pour the slightly cooled chocolate over the peanut layer. Spread evenly again using the spatula. Finish off by dragging the spatula lightly across the top of the chocolate in lines from left to right. This will create a ripple effect as it sets.
  • Leave to set in a cool dry place or if you can't wait that long; return once again to the fridge. However, leaving to set out of the fridge will help the chocolate to retain its shine and colour.
  • Check to see if the chocolate is set before turning out of the tin and slicing into squares. Enjoy!!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 199kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 3.8g | Fat: 14.4g | Saturated Fat: 5.8g | Sugar: 8.9g

Peanut Butter & Chocolate Biscuit Squares | Properfoodie.com

The post Peanut Butter and Chocolate Biscuit Squares appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/peanut-butter-chocolate-squares/feed/ 5
Gingerbread and mulled wine picnic sponsored by Domu https://properfoodie.com/gingerbread-mulled-wine-picnic/ https://properfoodie.com/gingerbread-mulled-wine-picnic/#comments Sat, 17 Dec 2016 12:16:56 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3074 Its gingerbread time! The Christmas cake is made, the chutney and cranberries have been jarred, the tree is up and the festive tunes are on. So now, on the 17th of December, the only thing left to do is to make up some crumbly, gingery and very festive biscuits. These biscuits contain one of my...

Read More

The post Gingerbread and mulled wine picnic sponsored by Domu appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
jump-to-recipe-button

Its gingerbread time!

The Christmas cake is made, the chutney and cranberries have been jarred, the tree is up and the festive tunes are on. So now, on the 17th of December, the only thing left to do is to make up some crumbly, gingery and very festive biscuits. These biscuits contain one of my favourite, go-to-dessert ingredients: cardamom! Checkout my Homemade ice cream and my Dairy free panna cotta posts for more cardamom inspiration.

Cardamom pairs up so well with ginger that I feel this gingerbread should be renamed ginger and cardamom bread. The cardamom spice is so versatile in both sweet and savoury dishes, but in this particular case it really gives the humble gingerbread that extra sparkle, which is just what we need at Christmas.

Gingerbread biscuits

To create the perfect gingerbread

that is not too hard but not so soft that it loses its shape during cooking, I included a mixture of ingredients that had enough consistency to hold the biscuits together and also created a wonderful spicy and warming flavour. A mixture of treacle and syrup ensured enough stickyness, but not too much bitterness, and a light brown muscavado sugar added extra sweetness without being too overpowering. Finally baking for just under 10 minutes provided a lovely light brown finish and a bite that was slightly crunchy on the outer edges but lovely and soft in the middle. This is my perfect gingerbread!!

Gingerbread stack

This year I've gone one step further with my gingerbread and have created a full on gingerbread picnic with mulled wine. Now, I know its winter and its cold out, but who says a picnic has to be outside! This gingerbread and mulled wine picnic is intended for living room floors only, and let me tell you; an indoor picnic just before Christmas is so uplifting on a dark wintry night and is definitely something that could become a bit of a tradition for us.

Gingerbread

If you have children, then I imagine a gingerbread picnic would go down amazingly well on Christmas Eve - with mulled wine swapped for warmed Ribena or hot chocolate of course. I would like to say that the whole gingerbread picnic thing was entirely my own idea. However, I cannot take full credit for the whole thing, as it was the lovely people at Domu who included me in their Bloggers Secret Santa, which lead to the arrival of a wonderful picnic basket. And I also must thank the wonderful blogger who chose to send me the VonShef picnic basket! Thank you my Secret Santa blogging friend!

gingerbread picnicSo - I received this lovely picnic basket package on Thursday

and not only has it livened up my gingerbread-eating-days but its also going to be perfect for using up on our newly acquired allotment in the summer. To say I was chuffed to bits with this gift is an understatement.

The picnic basket itself is made of wicker with a grey checked lining and poly-synthetic, leather straps and handles. The traditional style of the basket immediately won me over and as far as I can tell, it appears to be quite sturdy and well put together. Domu also has a couple of other picnic baskets including one with two lids and one that is a backpack. So lots of choice and all quite reasonably priced.

This basket is a 2 person basket and includes: 2 ceramic plates; 2 plastic wine glasses; a bottle opener with corkscrew; 2 sets of knives, forks and spoons; mini salt and pepper shakers; 2 cotton napkins; and a large picnic blanket with waterproof material on the underside. Once the blanket is removed theres plenty of space left over for packing sandwiches and theres even room for a bottle of wine.  If your interested in this picnic basket you can check out the full details here.

Gingerbread biscuits and picnic basket

The gingerbread biscuits are super easy to make.

Just heat up butter, sugar, treacle and syrup in a small pan then once fully melted pour into the dry ingredients. This forms the gingerbread pastry which can be rolled and then shapes cut out. To make it easier I always have water and flour to hand. Water for if the pastry becomes to dry and crumbly and flour should it be too sticky. I also roll the pastry with a sheet of cling film under the pastry and a sheet over the top of it. Not only does this stop the rolling pin sticking to the pastry but it also makes it a lot easier to pick up the cut out shapes, by just peeling them off the cling film.

cutting out gingerbread biscuits

To add an extra special touch to my ginger bread biscuits this year, I also cut rectangular shapes at the top or bottom of a few of them in order to create 3D biscuits that will stand up on their own.

gingerbread biscuits on lined baking tray

Super impressive and particular nice to do if your sharing your picnic with kids.

gingerbread biscuits 3D

I've included a downloadable template at the end of this post, which is a guide for cutting out the rectangles in order to create 3D gingerbread. The main tips for this is to remember that the width of the cut out rectangle needs to be slightly bigger than the thickness of the biscuits (allowing room for a slight rise during baking). I cut my rectangles with a width of just under a cm to ensure there was enough room.

If you can't quite manage a gingerbread picnic, then these biscuits are great to keep in a tin over Christmas and whip out when friends call. They also make lovely homemade Christmas gifts. So if your struggling with last minute presents, then a batch of these could be your answer.

gingerbread stack for a picnic

Hope you get chance to make a batch 🙂 Happy Christmas!!

Download your free 3D templates here

Nutritional Info


📖 Recipe

Gingerbread biscuits with cardamom
Print

Gingerbread and mulled wine picnic

Gingerbread biscuits with a secret ingredient, served as a indoor picnic with mulled wine
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 18 biscuits
Calories 129kcal

Ingredients

  • 100 g butter cubed
  • 100 g light brown muscavado sugar
  • 2 tablespoon golden syrup
  • 1 tablespoon black treacle
  • 300 g plain flour sieved
  • 2 teaspoon ground ginger
  • 3 cardamom pods
  • 2-3 tablespoon water

Instructions

  • In a saucepan melt the butter, sugar, syrup and treacle. Once fully melted set to one side in order to cool slightly.
  • Sieve the flour into a large mixing bowl and add the ginger.
  • Crush the cardamom pods with the side of a large knife and remove the seeds. Use a pestle and mortar to grind up the seeds, or chop as finely as you can with a knife.
  • Add the ground cardamom seeds to the flour and ginger, then mix well.
  • Make a well in the flour mix and pour in the melted butter mix. Stir well and bring together to form a pastry. The pastry should be slightly sticky, if it appears too dry add 2 or 3 tablespoons of water and knead well.
  • wrap the pastry in cling film and chill in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This will make it easier to roll out the pastry.
  • Pre-heat the oven to 180 degrees C and line 2 baking trays with grease proof paper.
  • After chilling, lay a piece of cling film on the work surface and put the pastry in the middle. Cover the pastry with another sheet of cling film and use a rolling pin to roll out. The cling film will stop the pastry sticking to the work top and to your rolling pin. It will also make it easier to transfer the cut out shapes to your baking sheet by simply peeling off the cling film.
  • Roll out the pastry to around the thickness of a £1 coin, then use pastry cutters to cut out shapes. Bring together the left over pastry, re roll and cut out more shapes.
  • Download my templates at the end of this post if you you wish to make the 3D biscuits.
  • Transfer the biscuits to the lined baking trays and place in the oven for 8-10 minutes.
  • Cool biscuits on a wire rack and decorate.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 129kcal | Fat: 4.8g

**Estimated nutritional information per serving of chutney and per 100g of Chutney. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

With great thanks to Domu for the opportunity to use their products. This is not a paid post and all thoughts and opinions expressed are my own.

Gingerbread and mulled wine picnic

The post Gingerbread and mulled wine picnic sponsored by Domu appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/gingerbread-mulled-wine-picnic/feed/ 2
Cranberry Sauce Recipe https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/ https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/#comments Sun, 02 Jan 2022 20:24:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2995 Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Not only is the best sauce to serve...

Read More

The post Cranberry Sauce Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up.

Homemade cranberry sauce in a small jar with a teaspoonful of sauce at the side with larger jar in background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is the best sauce to serve up on Christmas Day but it also makes for a pretty good Christmas present. With little jars at the ready and a few tags this easy homemade cranberry sauce recipe can quickly be turned into a great homemade foodie gift.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of sauce. To make homemade cranberry sauce you will need:

cranberry and apple sauce christmas present

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Cranberries: Use fresh cranberries

Muscavado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste, which balances out the tart cranberries. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this has less molasses and so a milder taste.

Apples: Use baking apples, which cook down into a smooth puree and so are the best option for a sauce.

Ground nutmeg: This is optional but I like to add this for a hint of festive spice.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and chop the apples and squeeze the juice out of half an orange.
  2. Place all the ingredients in one large pan, mix well and put on the hob on a medium heat.
  3. Bring to the boil then allow to simmer gently.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes or until apples are soft and cranberries have burst.Four step by step images showing how to make cranberry sauce for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or un-burst berries. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot cranberry sauce to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.Two step by step images showing how to make cranberry sauce for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the sauce that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • Consistency: Cranberry sauce should have a jam like consistency. The sauce will thicken and become jam like as the cranberries are heated and release pectin. Be aware that as the sauce cools it will become thicker. Therefore, stop heating the sauce when it is still slightly thinner than you would like.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot cranberry sauce in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the sauce cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of cranberry sauce can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Is cranberry sauce meant to be sweet or sour?

Cranberry sauce is a balance between sweet from the sugar and tart from the cranberries. Tartness can be reduced by the addition of sweet juices such as apple or orange juice.

Small jar filled with homemade cranberry sauce with a spoonful of sauce at the side.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade cranberry sauce in a small jar with a teaspoonful of sauce at the side with larger jar in background.
Print

Cranberry Sauce Recipe

Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up.
Course condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 10 Small jars
Calories 203kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel and jam jars (if jarring)

Ingredients

  • 600 g cranberries
  • 400 g baking apples cored peeled and chopped

  • 400 g light brown muscavado sugar
  • Juice from ½ an orange
  • 250 ml water
  • 1 ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg

Instructions

  • Peel and chop the apples and squeeze the juice out of half an orange.
    400 g baking apples, Juice from ½ an orange
  • Place all the ingredients in one large pan, mix well and put on the hob on a medium heat.
    600 g cranberries, 400 g baking apples, 400 g light brown muscavado sugar, Juice from ½ an orange, 250 ml water, 1 ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • Bring to the boil then allow to simmer gently.
  • Simmer for 30 minutes or until apples are soft and cranberries have burst.
  • After 30 minutes use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or un-burst berries. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot cranberry sauce to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the sauce that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Cranberries: Use fresh cranberries.
Muscavado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste, which balances out the tart cranberries. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this has less molasses and so a milder taste.
Apples: Use baking apples, which cook down into a smooth puree and so are the best option for a sauce.
Ground nutmeg: This is optional but I like to add this for a hint of festive spice.
Consistency: Cranberry sauce should have a jam like consistency. The sauce will thicken and become jam like as the cranberries are heated and release pectin. Be aware that as the sauce cools it will become thicker. Therefore, stop heating the sauce when it is still slightly thinner than you would like.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot cranberry sauce in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the sauce cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of cranberry sauce can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Is cranberry sauce meant to be sweet or sour? Cranberry sauce is a balance between sweet from the sugar and tart from the cranberries. Tartness can be reduced by the addition of sweet juices such as apple or orange juice.

Nutrition

Serving: 30g | Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 152mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 62IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2016. Updated in Dec 2021 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

This post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

Cranberry, apple and nutmeg sauce a great homemade Christmas present and perfect condiment to Christmas dinner

 

The post Cranberry Sauce Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/feed/ 2
No churn ice cream: 3 Ways https://properfoodie.com/no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways/ https://properfoodie.com/no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways/#respond Wed, 24 Aug 2016 15:55:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2247 So far this week I've had the most fun time ever; making and taking photos of ice cream! The sun is still here (for the moment) and I am making the most of it. Ice cream has most definitely got to be the British staple when the sun is shining. It doesn't take much, just...

Read More

The post No churn ice cream: 3 Ways appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
jump to recipe square

So far this week I've had the most fun time ever; making and taking photos of ice cream!

Homemade-ice-cream-3-ways-in-glass

The sun is still here (for the moment) and I am making the most of it. Ice cream has most definitely got to be the British staple when the sun is shining. It doesn't take much, just the briefest of warm spells and the ice cream is out (even before we get to venture as far as floppy sun hats and shorts). But what is most astounding about ice cream (in my opinion anyway) is how ridiculously easy it is to make and how much more enjoyable it is when you get to hand out scoops of your own homemade creamy ice cream to friends and family. This recipe is no churn ice cream and so its really very simple.

This no churn ice cream is  minimum effort and maximum fun.

Just a few ingredients, a quick whip up in the mixer, into the freezer for a few hours, no churning required and then dish up.

I love ice cream and definitely love trying different flavours, so there was no way that I was just going for one type of ice cream when I started on this recipe. In the end I went for 3 flavours: first of all starting with the simple yet ever so popular vanilla;

vanilla-ice-cream-in-cone

then venturing to the fabulously, tipsy rum and raisin;

Homemade-rum-and-raisin-ice-cream-scoop

before going for a something a little bit different with cardamom and black treacle.

homemade-cardamom-and-treacle-ice-cream-scoop

Hands down the cardamom and black treacle is my favourite.

The treacle and spice mix together to provide a luscious gingerbread flavour, which is so moreish that I think I might have to make a tub of this every week for the rest of my life.

So to the recipe:

The base of this no churn ice cream is just 3 simple ingredients: double cream, condensed sweetened milk and vanilla extract. The key thing when making no churn ice cream is not to over whip. I experimented a few times and had a couple of fails where the cream and milk split. After trial and error I decided this was most certainly due to mixing the cream and milk at the same time and over whisking. So it works best if you whip the cream first and then fold in the milk. Its also important to keep an eye on the whipping process and stop as soon as the mixture is thick enough (smooth peaks start to form, but not as thick as clotted cream).

Once the cream and milk is combined and whipped up, extra ingredients can be mixed and folded in to create the different flavours. So its really easy to create any kind of ice cream you want or use whatever you can find in your cupboard/spice rack and go for something new and exciting. In general the mix will take a little extra liquid without losing its consistency (E.g. 5 tablespoon of rum or 2 dessert spoons of treacle mix well into the recipes below). However, more solid ingredients such as raisins, cocoa powder, chocolate chips, fudge pieces, spices or anything else you can think of will help to keep a nice consistency as the mix freezes.

Once you have your ice cream in the freezer, get hold of a few friends and some decent waffle cones and get stuck in.

homemade-ice-cream-3-ways-in-glass-in-hand

I used metal loaf tins, double wrapped with cling film to freeze my ice cream in. However, any freezer proof container will do, just be sure to cling well or use a secure lid.

Hope you get chance to whip up some yourself. I'd love to see and hear about your own ideas for new flavours! Comment below or tag with #properfoodieblog on twitter, facebook or instagram.

📖 Recipe

homemade-no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways
Print

Homemade, no churn ice cream: 3 Ways

3 Creamy, delicious homemade ice creams: Vanilla, Rum & Raisin, and Cardamom and Black Treacle.
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Calories 210kcal

Ingredients

For the ice cream base:

  • 450 ml double cream
  • 150 ml half a can of condensed sweetened milk
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract.

For vanilla add:

  • Seeds of 1 vanilla pod or 1 teaspoon of vanilla bean paste

For Rum and Raisin add:

  • 125 g of raisins
  • 5 tablespoon dark rum
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder

For the Cardamom and Black Treacle add:

  • 5 cardamom pods shelled and seeds crushed
  • 2 dessert spoons of black treacle plus extra to drizzle on top if desired

Instructions

For the ice cream base:

  • Place the cream and vanilla extract into the bowl of a mixing machine and use the whisk tool to thicken. Whisk on high for around 3-5 minutes (longer if whisking by hand). Keep a close eye on the whisking process and do not over whip. As soon as the cream starts to thicken, reduce the speed and stop as soon as soft peaks begin to form.
  • Next add the condensed milk and use a spatula to fold in gently (at this point the mixture should be thick but just about pour-able).

For Vanilla ice cream:

  • Remove the vanilla seeds from the pod: slice the pod in half down its length and then use the back of a knife to scrape down the inside of the pod and release the seeds. Add the seeds (or vanilla bean paste) at the start along with the vanilla extract, before whipping.

For the Rum and Raisin ice cream:

  • Place the raisins in a bowl and pour over the rum. Cover with cling film and place in the fridge to soak for at least 30 minutes. Once the cream has been whipped and combined with the milk; add the cinnamon and soaked raisins (pour in all the rum) then fold in gently.

For the Cardamom and Black Treacle ice cream:

  • Crush the cardamom pods by placing the flat of a knife over them and pushing down with your hand. This should split the pod and release the seeds inside. Discard the outer pod and gather together the seeds. Crush the seeds into course powder using a knife or pestle and mortar. Once the cream and milk have been combined add the powdered cardamom seeds and 2 dessert spoons of treacle. Fold in gently. You may wish to add the treacle gradually to prevent it from clumping in one place.

Freezing:

  • Once the ice cream is made transfer into a freezable container (I used metal loaf tins) and seal with a lid or double wrap with cling film. Freeze for at least 4 hours before scooping.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 210kcal | Fat: 21.4g

Per serving of Vanilla Ice Cream (2 scoops)

vanilla ice cream label

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Creamy, homemade,no churn ice cream

Creamy, homemade vanilla ice cream, no churn and simple to make

Homemade rum and raisin ice cream

Homemade cardamom and black treacle ice cream

The post No churn ice cream: 3 Ways appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways/feed/ 0